FCC ID: W4LNT0001 Bluetooth module

User Guide Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station Version 1.00 Revision A January 2009 Canada This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Le prsent appareil numrique nmet pas de bruits radiolectriques dpassant les limites applicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans le rglement sur le brouillage radiolectrique dict par le Ministre des Communications du Canada. Europe This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements for a Class B device pursuant to European Council Directive 89/336/EEC on EMC, thereby satisfying the requirements for CE Marking and sale within the European Economic Area (EEA). These requirements are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential or commercial environment. Representative in Europe Trimble GmbH Am Prime Parc 11 65478 Raunheim, Germany Australia and New Zealand This product conforms with the regulatory requirements of the Australian Communications Authority (ACA) EMC framework, thus satisfying the requirements for C-Tick Marking and sale within Australia and New Zealand. Taiwan Battery Recycling Requirements The product contains a removable Ni-MH battery. Taiwanese regulations require that waste batteries are recycled.

Notice to Our European Union Customers For product recycling instructions and more information, please go to www.spectraprecision.com/ev.shtm. Recycling in Europe: To recycle Spectra Precision WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment, products that run on electrical power.), Call +31 497 53 24 30, and ask for the "WEEE Associate". Or, mail a request for recycling instructions to:

Spectra Precision Europe BV c/o Menlo Worldwide Logistics Meerheide 45 5521 DZ Eersel, NL Declaration of Conformity We, Spectra Precision Limited 10355 Westmoor Drive Suite #100 Westminster, CO 80021 United States of America

+1-720-587-4700 declare under sole responsibility that the product:

Focus 4 Total Station complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Corporate Office Spectra Precision 10355 Westmoor Drive Suite #100 Westminster, CO 80021 USA

+1-720-587-4700 Phone 888-477-7516 (Toll free in USA) www.spectraprecision.com Legal Notices Copyright and Trademarks 2006-2009, Nikon-Trimble Co. Limited. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Spectra Precision, the Spectra Precision logo, Focus, and the Focus logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Spectra Precision, registered in the United States and in other countries. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Nikon-Trimble Co. Limited is under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Release Notice This is the January 2009 release (Revision A) of the Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide. It applies to version 1.00 of the Focus 4 Total Station. Manufacturer Nikon-Trimble Co., Ltd. Technoport Mituiseimei Bldg. 16-2, Minamikamata 2-chome, Ota-ku Tokyo 144-0035 Japan Product Limited Warranty Information For applicable product Limited Warranty information, please refer to the Limited Warranty Card included with this Spectra Precision product, or consult your Spectra Precision Authorized Distribution Partner. Notices Class B Statement Notice to Users. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communication. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Changes and modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer or registrant of this equipment can void your authority to operate this equipment under Federal Communications Commission rules. C WARNING - This equipment has been certified to comply with the limits for a Class B personal computer and peripherals, pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. Only peripherals (computer input/output devices, terminals, printers, etc.) certified to comply with the Class B limits may be attached to this equipment. Operation with non-certified personal computer and/or peripherals is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception. The connection of a non-

shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC Certification of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits established by the FCC for this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. 2 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Notices for optional Bluetooth unit USA FCC Part 15 Subpart/RSS-210, OET bulletin 65 supplement C satisfied. C CAUTION - Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canada RSS-210 Low Power Device Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. European Union countries, Iceland, Norway, Liechtenstein, Turkey, and Switzerland EN300 328v1.7.1, EN50360 satisfied Hereby, Nikon-Trimble Co., Ltd., declares that this instrument is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Declaration of Conformity available at http://www.nikon-trimble.com/

RF exposure compliance To comply with FCC/IC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This transmitter must not be co-located with or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 3 4 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Safety For your safety read the safety and warnings section and this manual carefully and thoroughly before using the Spectra Precision Focus 4 total station. Although Spectra Precision products are designed for maximum safety, using them incorrectly or disregarding the instructions can cause personal injury or property damage. You should also read the documentation for any other equipment that you use with a Spectra Precision Focus 4 total station. Note Always keep this user guide near the instrument for easy reference. Warnings and Cautions The following conventions are used to indicate safety instructions:

C WARNING Warnings alert you to situations that could cause death or serious injury. C CAUTION Cautions alert you to situations that could cause injury or property damage. Always read and follow the instructions carefully. Rechargeable Lithium-ion (Li-ion) batteries C WARNING Do not damage the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery. A damaged battery can cause an explosion or fire, and can result in personal injury and/or property damage. To prevent injury or damage:

Do not use or charge the battery if it appears to be damaged. Signs of damage include, but are not limited to, discoloration, warping, and leaking battery fluid. Do not expose the battery to fire, high temperature, or direct sunlight. Do not immerse the battery in water. Do not use or store the battery inside a vehicle during hot weather. Do not drop or puncture the battery. Do not open the battery or short-circuit its contacts. C WARNING Avoid contact with the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery if it appears to be leaking. Battery fluid is corrosive, and contact with it can result in personal injury and/or property damage. To prevent injury or damage:

If the battery leaks, avoid contact with the battery fluid. If battery fluid gets into your eyes, immediately rinse your eyes with clean water and seek medical attention. Do not rub your eyes!

If battery fluid gets onto your skin or clothing, immediately use clean water to wash off the battery fluid. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 5 Safety C WARNING Charge and use the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery only in strict accordance with the instructions. Charging or using the battery in unauthorized equipment can cause an explosion or fire, and can result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. To prevent injury or damage:

Do not charge or use the battery if it appears to be damaged or leaking. Charge the Lithium-ion battery only in a product that is specified to charge it. Be sure to follow all instructions that are provided with the battery charger. Discontinue charging a battery that gives off extreme heat or a burning odor. Use the battery only in equipment that is specified to use it. Use the battery only for its intended use and according to the instructions in the product documentation. Warnings Before using the instrument, read the following warnings and follow the instructions that they provide. C WARNING Never look at the sun through the telescope. If you do, you may damage or lose your eyesight. C WARNING The Focus 4 total station is not designed to be explosion-proof. Do not use the instrument in coal mines, in areas contaminated with coal dust, or near other flammable substances. C WARNING Never disassemble, modify, or repair the instrument yourself. If you do, you may receive electric shocks or burns, or the instrument may catch fire. You may also impair the accuracy of the instrument. C WARNING Use only the specified battery charger and AC adapter that are supplied with the instrument. Do not use any other charger or adapter as this may cause the battery pack to catch fire or rupture. C WARNING Do not cover the battery charger and AC adapter while the battery pack is being recharged. The charger must be able to dissipate heat adequately. Coverings such as blankets or clothing can cause the charger to overheat. C WARNING Avoid recharging the battery pack in humid or dusty places, in direct sunlight, or near heat sources. Do not recharge the battery pack when it is wet. If you do, you may receive electric shocks or burns, or the battery pack may overheat or catch fire. C WARNING Although the battery pack has an auto-reset circuit breaker, you should take care not to short circuit the contacts. Short circuits can cause the battery pack to catch fire or burn you. 6 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Safety C WARNING Never burn or heat the battery. Doing so may cause the battery to leak or rupture. A leaking or ruptured battery can cause serious injury. C WARNING Before storing the battery pack or battery charger, cover the contact points with insulation tape. If you do not cover the contact points, the battery pack or charger may short circuit, causing fire, burns, or damage to the instrument. C WARNING The battery is not waterproof on its own. Do not get the battery wet when it is removed from the instrument. If water seeps into the battery, it may cause a fire or burns. Cautions Before using the instrument, read the following cautions and follow the instructions that they provide:

C CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. C CAUTION The tops of the tripod ferrules are very sharp. When handling or carrying the tripod, take care to avoid injuring yourself on the ferrules. C CAUTION Before carrying the tripod or the instrument in the carry case, check the shoulder strap and its clasp. If the strap is damaged or the clasp is not securely fastened, the carry case may fall, causing personal injury or instrument damage. The shoulder strap is available as an optional extra. C CAUTION Before setting up the tripod, make sure that no-ones hands or feet are underneath it. When the legs of the tripod are being driven into the ground, they could pierce hands or feet. C CAUTION After mounting the instrument on the tripod, securely fasten the thumb screws on the tripod legs. If the thumb screws are not securely fastened, the tripod may collapse, causing personal injury or instrument damage. C CAUTION After mounting the instrument on the tripod, securely fasten the clamp screw on the tripod. If the clamp screw is not securely fastened, the instrument may fall off the tripod, causing personal injury or instrument damage. C CAUTION Securely fasten the tribrach clamp knob. If the knob is not securely fastened, the tribrach may come loose or fall off when you lift the instrument, causing personal injury or instrument damage. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 7 Safety C CAUTION Do not stack objects on the plastic carry case, or use it as a stool. The plastic carry case is unstable and its surface is slippery. Stacking or sitting on the plastic carry case may cause personal injury or instrument damage. C CAUTION The system in the instrument may stop functioning in order to avoid any errors in measurements when the instrument detects strong electromagnetic wave(s). If this happens, turn off the instrument and remove the source of the electromagnetic wave(s). Then turn on the instrument to resume the work. Laser safety The Focus 4 is a Class 2 laser instrument, in accordance with IEC60825-1, Am2 (2001):

Safety of Laser Products. To counteract hazards, it is essential for all users to pay careful attention to the safety precautions and control measures specified in the standard IEC60825-1, (2001-08), particularly EN60825-1:1994, A11:1996, and A2:2001, as this refers to the hazard distance that is defined in this User Guide. Note The hazard distance is the distance from the laser at which beam irradiance or radiant exposure equals the maximum permissible value to which personnel may be exposed without being exposed to health risks. C WARNING Only qualified and trained persons should be assigned to install, adjust, and operate the laser equipment. C WARNING Precautions should be taken to ensure that persons do not look directly, with or without an optical instrument, into the beam. C WARNING Wherever practicable, the laser beam path should be located well above or below eye level. 8 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Safety Specifications for laser emission Laser pointer Wave length Output power Distance meter Wave lenght Output power Pulse width Laser plummet (option) Wave length Output power 630-680 nm CW: Po 1.0 mW 850-890 nm Pulse: Po 6.4 mW

< 5 ns 635 nm CW: Po < 1.0 mW Conforming standards EN60825-1/Am.2 : 2001 (IEC60825-1/Am.2 : 2001) Laser pointer: Class 2 Distance meter: Class 1 Laser plummet: Class 2 (Option) FDA21CFR Part 1040 Sec.1040.10 and 1040.11 Except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No.50, dated June 24, 2007. EU USA Labels Laser Radiation Do not stare into beam Class 2 Laser Product Po1mW CW =630-690nm IEC60825-1:2001 LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT Po<1.0mW CW =635nm I E C 6 0 8 2 5 - 1 , 2 0 0 1 Laser pointer Laser plummet (option) Complies with 21 CFR 1040 . 10 and 1040 . 11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No . 50 , dated June 24 , 2007 MADE IN JAPAN NIKON-TRIMBLE CO.,LTD. Technoport Mitsuiseimei Bldg. 16-2,Minamikamata 2-chome, Ota-ku, Tokyo 144-0035 Japan This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules . Operation is subject to the following two conditions :

1 this device may not cause harmful interference , and 2 this device must accept any interference received , including interference that may cause undesired operation. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 9 Safety 10 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Contents 1 2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Rechargeable Lithium-ion (Li-ion) batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Specifications for laser emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Conforming standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 System diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Care and maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Adjusting and tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Related information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Setting up the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Unpacking and repacking the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Charging the battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Applying power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Conditioning / calibrating a battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Detaching the battery pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Attaching the battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Setting up the tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Centering the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Centering with the optical plummet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Centering with the laser plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Centering with a plumb bob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Leveling the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Focusing the telescope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Setting the measurement mode and preparing the target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Measurement with a prism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Measurement in reflectorless (N-Prism) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Viewing and changing the measurement settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Target field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Prism constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 11 Contents 3 4 Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Parts of the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Instrument keyboard and display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Instrument keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Status bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 LCD backlight, laser pointer, beep sound, and contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

[DSP] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

[MODE] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

[HOT] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Bubble indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Laser plummet (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Turning on the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Turning off the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Sleep mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Regional configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 List available jobs or data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Entering data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Entering a point name or number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Entering a code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Advanced feature: Searching for a code using the first character . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Entering values in feet and inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Creating or opening a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Creating a new job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Creating a control job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Measuring distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Sighting a prism reflector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Taking a distance measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Viewing and changing the measurement settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 HA reset and angle operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Setting the horizontal angle to 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Entering the horizontal angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Station setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Known. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Resection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Advanced feature: Viewing and deleting a measurement in resection. . . . . . . . . . . 67 Base XYZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Remote BM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 BS Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Stakeout menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 S-O to Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 L-O from Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 12 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 5 Contents L-O from Arc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 XYZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Advanced feature: Specifying a layout list by inputting points by range . . . . . . . . . . 75 Programs menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Remote distance measurement (RDM) - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 RDM (Radial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 RDM (Cont) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 REM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Cogo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Advanced feature: Entering a range of points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Advanced feature: Entering angle and distance offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Recording measurement data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Switching between display screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Opening an existing job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Creating a new job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Deleting a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Setting the control job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Displaying job information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Settings (basic job settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Power saving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Other settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Viewing records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Deleting records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Editing raw records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Searching records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Entering coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Downloading coordinate data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Uploading coordinate data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Advanced feature: Editing the data order for upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 1sec-Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

[MSR] button settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

[DSP] button settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 13 Contents 6 7 A Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Checking and Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Adjusting the electronic level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Checking and adjusting the circular level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Checking and adjusting the optical/laser plummet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Zero point errors of vertical scale and horizontal angle corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Checking the calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Adjusting the calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 The instrument constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Checking the laser pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Transferring Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Transferring coordinate data to the total station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Record format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Data example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Transferring coordinate data from the total station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Data examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Main body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Measurement range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Distance measurement precision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Measurement intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Angle measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Tilt sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Tangent screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Tribrach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Optical plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Optical laser plummet (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Display and keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Connections in the base of instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Environmental performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Standard components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 External device connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 14 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Contents B Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Cogo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Job manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Stakeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Recording data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Station setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 System error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 15 Contents 16 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Introduction In this chapter:

System diagram

Care and maintenance

Related information C H A P T E R 1 1 This user guide describes the unique capabilities and features available in the Spectra Precision Focus 4 total station. The software for the Focus 4 total station makes it easy for you to learn to operate one model of instrument and, with little additional training, to apply that knowledge to other models. Before using the instrument, read this user guide carefully. In particular, pay attention to the warnings and cautions that appear in the Safety section, see Safety, page 5. Your comments and suggestions about the Focus 4 total station are welcome. Please contact us at the address given in the front of this manual. In addition, your feedback about the supporting documentation helps us to improve it with each revision. Email your comments to sales@spectraprecision.com. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 17 1 Introduction System diagram The system diagram shows the hardware that is used with the Focus 4 total station. Focus 4 Note You must use the Spectra Precision Focus 4 total station with tribrach W30 or W30b. 18 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Introduction 1 Care and maintenance Before using the instrument, read and follow the following maintenance instructions. The Focus 4 total station is a precision instrument that you should store, use, and clean in an appropriate way. C CAUTION The battery pack contains a Lithium-ion battery. When disposing of the battery pack, follow the laws or rules of your municipal waste system. For more information on the safety warnings associated with the Lithium-ion battery, see Rechargeable Lithium-ion (Li-ion) batteries, page 5. C CAUTION Store the battery pack with the battery pack discharged. Environmental conditions Do not leave the instrument in direct sunlight or in a closed vehicle for prolonged periods. Overheating the instrument may reduce its efficiency. If the total station has been used in wet conditions, immediately wipe off any moisture and dry the instrument completely before returning it to the carry case. The Focus 4 total station contains sensitive electronic assemblies which have been well protected against dust and moisture. However, if dust or moisture gets into it, severe damage could result. Sudden changes in temperature may cloud the lenses and drastically reduce the measurable distance, or cause an electrical system failure. If there has been a sudden change in temperature, leave the instrument in a closed carry case in a warm location until the temperature of the instrument returns to room temperature. Storage Do not store the total station in hot or humid locations. In particular, you must store the battery pack in a dry location at a temperature of less than 30 C

(86 F). High temperature or excessive humidity can cause mold to grow on the lenses. It can also cause the electronic assemblies to deteriorate, and so lead to instrument failure. Store the battery pack with the battery discharged. When storing the instrument in areas subject to extremely low temperatures, leave the carry case open. If the tribrach will not be used for an extended period, lock down the tribrach clamp knob and tighten its safety screw. The carry case is designed to be watertight, but you should not leave it exposed to rain for an extended period. If exposure to rain is unavoidable, make sure that the carry case is placed with the Spectra Precision nameplate facing upward. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 19 1 Introduction Cleaning Do not use organic solvents such as ether or print thinner to clean the non-metallic parts of the instrument, such as the keyboard, or the painted or printed surfaces. Doing so could result in discoloration of the surface or in peeling of printed characters. Clean these parts only with a soft cloth or tissue that is lightly moistened with water or a mild detergent. To clean the optical lenses, lightly wipe them with a soft cloth or a lens tissue that is moistened with alcohol. Adjusting and tightening When adjusting the leveling screws, stay as close as possible to the center of each screws range. The center is indicated by a line on the screw. The reticle plate cover has been correctly mounted. Do not release it or subject it to excessive force, for example in an attempt to make it watertight. Reticle plate cover Before attaching the battery pack, make sure that the contact surfaces on the battery and Focus 4 total station are clean. Securely press the cap that covers the data output/external power input connector terminal. The instrument is only watertight if the cap is attached securely or when the data output/external power input connector is used. The Focus 4 total station is not watertight when the data output/external power input connector is used. Static electricity from the human body, discharged through the data output/external power input connector, can damage the instrument. Before handling the instrument, touch any other conductive material once in order to remove static electricity. Be careful not to pinch your finger between the telescope and trunnion of the instrument. 20 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Introduction 1 Related information Contact your local Spectra Precision dealer for more information about the support agreement contracts for software and firmware, and an extended warranty program for hardware. Consider a Spectra Precision training course to help you use your total station to its fullest potential. For more information, go to the Spectra Precision website at www.spectraprecision.com. Alternatively, send an email to support@spectraprecision.com. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 21 1 Introduction 22 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide C H A P T E R 2 Setting up the Instrument 2 This chapter explains how to prepare the Focus 4 total station before you use it in the field. In this chapter:

Unpacking and repacking the instrument

Charging the battery pack

Detaching the battery pack

Attaching the battery pack

Setting up the tripod

Centering the instrument

Leveling the instrument

Focusing the telescope

Setting the measurement mode and preparing the target

Viewing and changing the measurement settings Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 23 2 Setting up the Instrument Unpacking and repacking the instrument Note Handle the Focus 4 total station carefully to protect it from shocks and excessive vibration. To unpack the instrument, grip the carry handle and carefully remove the instrument from the carry case. To replace the instrument in the carry case, place it as shown in the figure. Charging the battery pack Before charging the battery pack, read the following warnings, cautions, and notes. C WARNING Do not damage the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery. A damaged battery can cause an explosion or fire, and can result in personal injury and/or property damage. To prevent injury or damage:

Do not use or charge the battery if it appears to be damaged. Signs of damage include, but are not limited to, discoloration, warping, and leaking battery fluid. Do not expose the battery to fire, high temperature, or direct sunlight. Do not immerse the battery in water. Do not use or store the battery inside a vehicle during hot weather. Do not drop or puncture the battery. Do not open the battery or short-circuit its contacts. C WARNING Avoid contact with the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery if it appears to be leaking. Battery fluid is corrosive, and contact with it can result in personal injury and/or property damage. To prevent injury or damage:

If the battery leaks, avoid contact with the battery fluid. If battery fluid gets into your eyes, immediately rinse your eyes with clean water and seek medical attention. Do not rub your eyes!

If battery fluid gets onto your skin or clothing, immediately use clean water to wash off the battery fluid. 24 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Setting up the Instrument 2 C WARNING Charge and use the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery only in strict accordance with the instructions. Charging or using the battery in unauthorized equipment can cause an explosion or fire, and can result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. To prevent injury or damage:

Do not charge or use the battery if it appears to be damaged or leaking. Charge the Lithium-ion battery only in a product that is specified to charge it. Be sure to follow all instructions that are provided with the battery charger. Discontinue charging a battery that gives off extreme heat or a burning odor. Use the battery only in equipment that is specified to use it. Use the battery only for its intended use and according to the instructions in the product documentation. C WARNING To charge the battery pack, use only the battery charger and AC adapter that are supplied with the instrument. Do not use any other charger or you may cause the battery pack to catch fire or rupture. The enclosed battery pack cannot be used with other chargers. C WARNING Do not cover the battery charger and AC adapter while the battery pack is being recharged. The charger must be able to dissipate heat adequately. Coverings such as blankets or clothing can cause the charger to overheat. C WARNING Avoid recharging the battery pack in humid or dusty places, in direct sunlight, or near heat sources. Do not recharge the battery pack when it is wet. If you do, you may receive electric shocks or burns, or the battery pack may overheat or catch fire. C WARNING Although the battery pack has an auto-reset circuit breaker, you should take care not to short circuit the contacts. Short circuits can cause the battery pack to catch fire or burn you. C WARNING Never burn or heat the battery. Doing so may cause the battery to leak or rupture. A leaking or ruptured battery can cause serious injury. C WARNING Before storing the battery pack or battery charger, cover the contact points with insulation tape. If you do not cover the contact points, the battery pack or charger may short circuit, causing fire, burns, or damage to the instrument. C WARNING The battery is not waterproof on its own. Do not get the battery wet when it is removed from the instrument. If water seeps into the battery, it may cause a fire or burns. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 25 2 Setting up the Instrument Calibration on light (1) Power jack Charge light (1) 5 V, 4 A Battery slot 1 Calibration button Top edge of case Charge light (2) Calibration on light (2) Battery slot 2 Applying power Plug in the charger to the supplied AC adapter to turn the unit on. The power input must be 5 V with at least 4 A of current capability. Each battery may take up to 2 A while charging. Charging the battery Slide a battery into either battery slot to begin charging. The adjacent charge indicator will illuminate yellow when charging is in progress. The charge indicator will change to green when charging is complete. Take note of the following:

Charger slots are completely independent so a battery may be inserted regardless of what is occurring in the other battery slot. Charging may take 2-4 hours if the battery was normally discharged. Charging may take up to 5 hours with a completely drained battery which has been stored for several months without use. If the charge indicator(s) are blinking, there is a problem with the battery or with the charger. 26 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Setting up the Instrument 2 Lithium-ion batteries should not be charged above 40 C to 45 C (104 F to 113 F). A blinking charge light may mean that the batteries are too hot for charging. Charging will resume after the batteries cool down. Conditioning / calibrating a battery You must calibrate the battery (condition) once every 6 months or more often if required. Calibration ensures that the reported remaining battery charge is accurate. To start calibrating a battery, hold down the calibration button on the unit and then insert a battery. Only the battery that was inserted while the button is pressed begins calibration. During battery calibration, the battery will be charged, discharged completely, and then recharged again. Calibration should complete in approximately 17 hours. Do not cover the charger vents during a calibration cycle. The blue calibration indicator light(s) blink slowly (on 1.5 sec, off 2 sec) while calibration is in progress. The charge light(s) may be on or off during the calibration cycle if the case temperature does not get too high. When a calibration cycle is completed, the calibration light stops blinking but remains on until the corresponding battery is removed. Case temperature:

The temperature of the bottom case may continue to climb to approximately 43 C before temperature regulation is enabled to keep the case from becoming warmer. As the battery voltage drops, the case cools down and the automatic temperature limiting is no longer necessary. This minimizes the time required to discharge a battery. If the case temperature continues to become too hot internally, even after temperature regulation is enabled, there is a secondary failsafe that aborts the calibration completely. If an abort occurs, the calibration light(s) blink rapidly and battery charging is re-enabled. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 27 2 Setting up the Instrument Detaching the battery pack C CAUTION Avoid touching the contacts on the battery pack. 1. 2. If the instrument is turned on, press [PWR] to turn it off. Turn the battery box release knob counterclockwise, open the battery box cover and then pull the battery pack out of the battery box. Attaching the battery pack 1. 2. 3. 4. Clear any dust or other foreign particles from the battery contacts. Turn the battery box release knob counterclockwise and then open the battery box cover. Put the battery pack into the battery box. Connect the battery pack at the bottom with the connecting direction faced inside. Close the battery box cover and then turn the knob clockwise until you hear a click sound. C CAUTION If the battery pack is not attached securely, this could adversely affect the watertightness of the instrument. 28 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Setting up the Instrument 2 Setting up the tripod C CAUTION The tips of the tripod ferrules are very sharp. When handling or carrying the tripod, take care to avoid injuring yourself on the ferrules. Note Do not carry the instrument while it is attached to a tripod. 1. Open the tripod legs far enough for the instrument to be stable. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Locate the tripod directly over the station point. To check the position of the tripod, look through the center hole in the tripod head. Firmly press the tripod ferrules into the ground. Level the top surface of the tripod head. Securely fasten the thumb screws on the tripod legs. Place the instrument on the tripod head. Insert the tripod mounting screw into the center hole of the base plate of the instrument. 8. Tighten the tripod mounting screw. Centering the instrument When you center the instrument, you align its central axis precisely over the station point. To center the instrument, you can use the optical plummet, the laser plummet, or a plumb bob. The plumb bob is sold separately. Centering with the optical plummet Note For high accuracy, check and adjust the optical plummet before you center the instrument. 1. 2. Set up the instrument on the tripod. See above. Look through the optical plummet and align the reticle with the station point. To do this, turn the leveling screws until the center mark over the image of the station point. of the reticle is directly 3. While supporting the tripod head with one hand, loosen the tripod leg clamps and adjust the lengths of the legs until the air bubble is in the center of the circular level. 4. Tighten the tripod leg clamps. 5. Use the electronic level to level the instrument. See also Leveling the instrument, page 31. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 29 2 Setting up the Instrument 6. Look through the optical plummet to make sure that the image of the station point is still in the center of the reticle mark. 7. If the station point is off-center, do one of the following:

If the station point is slightly off-center, loosen the tripod mounting screw and then center the instrument on the tripod. Use only direct movement to center the instrument. Do not rotate it. When the instrument is centered, tighten the mounting screw. If there is major displacement of the station point, repeat this procedure starting with Step 2. Centering with the laser plummet C CAUTION Do not look at the laser directly. Note For high accuracy, check and adjust the laser plummet before you center the instrument. 1. 2. 3. Set up the instrument on the tripod. See page 29. Turn on the laser plummet. Align the laser pointer to the station point. To do this, turn the leveling screws until the laser pointer is over the station point. 4. While supporting the tripod head with one hand, loosen the tripod leg clamps and adjust the lengths or the legs until the air bubble is the center of the circular level. 5. Tighten the tripod leg clamps. 6. Use the electronic level to level the instrument. See Leveling the instrument, page 31. 7. 8. Check that the laser pointer is over the station point. If the station point is off-center, do one of the following:

If the station point is slightly off-center, loosen the tripod mounting screw and then center the instrument on the tripod. Use only direct movement to center the instrument. Do not rotate it. When the instrument is centered, tighten the mounting screw. If there is major displacement of the station point, repeat this procedure starting with Step 2. 30 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Setting up the Instrument 2 Centering with a plumb bob 1. Set up the instrument on the tripod. See page 29. 2. Hang the plumb line on the hook of the tripod mounting screw. 3. Adjust the length of the plumb line so that the tip of the plumb bob is at the height of the station point. 4. Loosen the tripod mounting screw slightly. 5. Using both hands to support the outer side of the tribrach, carefully slide the instrument about on the tripod head until the tip of the plumb bob is positioned over the exact center of the station point. Note To confirm that the instrument is precisely aligned, check its position from two directions at right-angles to each other. Leveling the instrument When you level the instrument, use the electronic level to you make the vertical axis of the instrument exactly vertical. During leveling, always set the instrument in the Face 1 direction. See Figure 3.1, page 38. To level the instrument:

1. Move the bubble into the circle on the circular level and then turn on the power. 2. Rotate the alidade until the bottom edge of the keyboard panel is parallel to the two of the leveling screws (B and C). 3. Use leveling screws B and C to move the bubble into the center of the electronic level. 4. Rotate the alidade approximately 90. 1 5. Use leveling screw A to move the bubble into the center of the electronic level. 6. 7. 8. Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 to center the bubble in both positions. Rotate the alidade 180. If the bubble in the electronic level remains centered, the instrument is level. If the bubble moves off center, adjust the electronic level. For detailed instructions, see Adjusting the electronic level, page 118. A A B B C C Bottom edge of the keyboard panel A B C 2 Bottom edge of the keyboard panel Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 31 2 Setting up the Instrument Focusing the telescope C WARNING Never look at the sun through the telescope. If you do, you may damage or lose your eyesight. When you sight the instrument, you aim the telescope at the target, bring the target image into focus, and align the image with the center cross-hairs of the reticle. Center crosshairs To sight the instrument:

1. Adjust the diopter:

a. b. Aim the telescope at a blank area, such as the sky or a piece of paper. Looking through the eyepiece, rotate the diopter ring until the reticle cross-hairs are in sharp focus. 2. Eliminate parallax:

Diopter ring Telescope focusing ring a. b. Aim the telescope at the target image. Rotate the focusing ring until the target image is in sharp focus on the reticle cross-hairs. c. Move your eye vertically and laterally to check whether the target image moves relative to the reticle cross-hairs. If the target image does not move, there is no parallax. If the target image does move, rotate the telescope focusing ring and repeat Step 2c. 3. Rotate the tangent screw. The final turn of the tangent screw should be in a clockwise direction, to align the target accurately on the center cross-hairs. 32 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Setting up the Instrument 2 Setting the measurement mode and preparing the target The Focus 4 total station has two measurement modes: Prism mode (Prism) and Reflectorless mode (N-Prism). To change the mode at any time from any observation screen, hold down [MSR1] or [MSR2]. Set the measurement mode depending on the target that you want to measure, as shown here. Target Prism, reflector sheet Other, reflective materials Target settings Prism mode Reflectorless mode In some cases, you can measure to another target that is not appropriate to the set measurement mode. Note The Focus 4 total station is Laser Class 1 in the measurement function, and Laser Class 2 in the Laser Pointer function. Do not sight the prism when the Laser Pointer is on. Measurement with a prism As the Focus 4 total station is extremely sensitive, multiple reflections on the prism surface can sometimes cause a significant loss in accuracy. To maintain the accuracy of your measurements:

Use a prism with thin edges. Thin edges Do not use a prism with scratches, a dirty surface, a chipped center, or thick edges. Chipped center Thick edges Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 33 2 Setting up the Instrument When measuring a short distance, incline the prism slightly so that the EDM can ignore unnecessary reflections on the prism surface, as shown below. Not completely square to the sighting axis Completely square to the sighting axis Hold the prism securely in place and do not move while taking measurements. In Prism mode, to avoid false measurements on objects other than the prism or reflector-sheet, targets that are less reflective than the prism or reflector sheet are not measured. Even if you start a measurement, measured values are not displayed. To measure less reflective objects, use the N-Prism (Reflectorless) mode. Measurement in reflectorless (N-Prism) mode The Focus 4 total station enables reflectorless measurements up to 300 m (984 feet). The intensity of the reflection from the target determines the distance the Focus 4 total station can measure in this mode. The color and condition of the target surface also affect the measurable distance, even if the targeted objects are the same. Some less-reflective targets may not be measured. The following table describes some examples of targets and approximate measuring distances:

Target Traffic signs, reflectors Paper (white), veneer (new) wall (brightly painted), brick You can measure approximately... 500 meters (1640 feet) 300 meters (990 feet) 100 to 200 meters (330 to 660 feet) Measurable distances may be shorter or measurement intervals may be longer if either of the following conditions apply:

the angle of the laser against the target is small the surface of the target is wet In direct sunlight, the measurable distance may be shorter. In this case, try to throw a shadow on the target. Targets with completely flat surfaces, such as mirrors, cannot be measured unless the beam and the target are perpendicular to each other. 34 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Setting up the Instrument 2 Make sure there are no obstacles between the instrument and the target when taking measurements. When you need to take measurements across a road or a place where vehicles or other objects are frequently moving, take several measurements to a target for the best result. Viewing and changing the measurement settings Hold down [MSR1] or [MSR2] for one second. To move the cursor between the fields, press [^]

or [v]. To change the value in the selected field, press [<]

or [>]. The available values are:

Field Target Constant (prism constant) Mode Track Values Prism mode N-Prism mode

-999 mm through 999 mm Precise Normal Track (continuous MSR) ON Track (continuous MSR) OFF Target field If the measurement is started with the Target field set to Prism mode, there is a dash in front of the prism constant, for example 18 mm. If the measurement is started with the Target field set to N-Prism (Reflectorless) mode, there is square bracket in front of the prism constant, for example ]18 mm. The displayed symbol will continuously move from left to right over the prism constant in the display. Prism constant The factory default of the prism constant value of the Focus 4 total station is -30 mm. Change the prism constant to match the constant value of the prism you are using. Once you have set up the instrument, you can turn on the Focus 4 total station, change the instrument settings, and start a job. See also page 37. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 35 2 Setting up the Instrument 36 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide

C H A P T E R 3 3 After you set up the instrument, see page 23, you can start using the Focus 4 total station. This chapter describes the basic features of the instrument, how to turn it on, change the instrument settings, and start a job. Getting Started In this chapter:

Parts of the instrument

Instrument keyboard and display

Turning on the instrument

Turning off the instrument

Regional configuration

List available jobs or data

Entering data

Creating or opening a job

Measuring distances Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 37 3 Getting Started Parts of the instrument Figure 3.1 and Figure 3.2 show the main parts of the Focus 4 total station. Carrying handle Optical sight

(finder) Horizontal axis indication mark Vertical tangent screw Battery box Battery box release knob Horizontal tangent screw The laser safety label shown below is attached to the underside of the keyboard. Complies with 21 CFR 1040 . 10 and 1040 . 11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No . 50 , dated June 24 , 2007 MADE IN JAPAN NIKON-TRIMBLE CO.,LTD. Technoport Mitsuiseimei Bldg. 16-2,Minamikamata 2-chome, Ota-ku, Tokyo 144-0035 Japan Telescope focusing ring Telescope eyepiece Diopter ring Reticle plate cover Face 1 display and keyboard The label shown below is attached to the underside of the keyboard. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules . Operation is subject to the following two conditions :

1 this device may not cause harmful interference , and 2 this device must accept any interference received , including interference that may cause undesired operation. Tribrach clamp knob Figure 3.1 Back view of the Focus 4 total station (Face 1) 38 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide The laser safety label shown below is attached to the side of the telescope. Laser Radiation Do not stare into beam Class 2 Laser Product Po1mW CW =630-690nm IEC60825-1:2001 Objective LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED FROM THIS PART Optical plummet

(shown here) or optional laser plummet ircular level C Leveling screw Tribrach Getting Started 3 The laser safety label shown below is attached to the telescope. Horizontal axis indication mark Battery box Battery box release knob Data output/

external power input connector

(input voltage 4.5-5.2 V DC) The laser safety label shown below will be attached here

(underneath) when the optional laser plummet is used. LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT Po<1.0mW CW =635nm I E C 6 0 8 2 5 - 1 , 2 0 0 1 Figure 3.2 Front view of the Focus 4 total station (Face 2) Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 39 3 Getting Started Instrument keyboard and display Instrument keyboard Use the buttons on the instrument keyboard to carry out the following functions:

Button Function Turns the instrument on or off. Illumination button. Turns the backlight on or off. Provides access to the switch window if held down for one second. Displays the MENU screen. Changes the button input mode between alphanumeric and numeric if pressed when you are in a PT or CD field. See ... page 48 page 43 page 91 page 46 Records measured data, moves on to the next screen, or confirms and accepts the entered data in input mode. page 89 Returns to the previous screen. In numeric or alphanumeric mode, deletes input. Starts distance measurement, using the measure mode settings for the [MSR1]

button. Displays measurement mode settings, if held down for one second. Starts distance measurement, using the measure mode settings for the [MSR2]

button. Displays measurement mode settings, if held down for one second. page 56 page 56 40 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Button Function Moves to the next available display screen. Changes the fields that appear on the DSP1, DSP2, and DSP3 screens, if held down for one second. Displays the Angle menu. Displays the Stakeout function menu. In numeric mode, enters 7. Displays the Station Setup menu. In numeric mode, enters 8. In alphanumeric mode, enters A, B, C, or 8. Displays the Programs menu. In numeric mode, enters 9. In alphanumeric mode, enters D, E, F, or 9. Displays the (HOT) menu, which includes Height of Target and Temp-Press settings. In numeric mode, enters (minus). In alphanumeric mode, enters. (period),

(minus), or + (plus). Displays the Bubble indicator. In numeric mode, enters 0. In alphanumeric mode, enters *, /, =, or 0. Getting Started 3 See ... page 44 page 60 page 60 page 60 page 75 page 46 page 47 Status bar The status bar appears on the right of every screen. It contains icons that indicate the status of various system functions. Status bar Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 41 3 Getting Started Laser-pointer indicator The icon appears as you turn on the laser pointer. When the icon appears on the screen, the emitting power is laser class 2. Laser pointer ON If there is no icon, the laser pointer is off. Input mode indicator The input mode indicator appears only when you are entering points or coordinates. It shows the data input mode:

Input mode is numeric. Press a button on the number pad to enter the number printed on the button. Input mode is alphabetic. Press a button on the number pad to enter the first letter printed beside the button. Press the button repeatedly to cycle through all the letters assigned to that button. For example, to enter the letter O in alphabetic mode, press [6] three times. Battery indicator Shows each voltage level of the right and left internal batteries individually. When the external battery is connected with the instrument, its voltage is shown. Top: left battery Internal batteries:

Bottom: right battery External battery Internal batteries External battery Battery level indication Battery low 42 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide If the battery level is critically low, a message appears. Getting Started 3 EDM measurement status When you are taking measurements, the EDM measurement status shows the mode that is being used. When you display observation data, the EDM measurement status shows the mode that was used when the data was collected:

Reflectorless mode If there is no icon, Prism mode is being used. LCD backlight, laser pointer, beep sound, and contrast adjustment Press the illumination key to open the the 4-switch window and then press:

[1] to turn the LCD backlight on/off

[2] to turn the laser pointer on /off

[3] to turn the beep sound on /off

[4] to open the contrast adjustment window.

[ENT] / [4]

[ESC]

Switch setup window Contrast adjustment window Do the following:

To turn on/off each function, press [ENT] when the option 1, 2, 3 or 4 is selected or directly press the [1], [2], [3], or [4] key. Holding down the illumination key for one second also turns on/off the LCD backlight. To move the cursor up and down, press [^] or [v]. To adjust the constrast, in the contrast adjustment window, press [>] or [<] . To close the window, press [ESC]. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 43 3 Getting Started Switch 1: Adjusting the LCD backlight LCD backlight is on LCD backlight is off Switch 2: Turning on/off the laser pointer Laser pointer is on Laser pointer is off The icon appears while turning on the laser pointer . When the icon is on the screen, the emitting power is Laser Class 2. Switch 3: Turning on/off the sound Sound is on Sound is off

[DSP] button Use the [DSP] button to change the current display screen or to change display settings. Switching between display screens When several display screens are available:

the DSP indicator appears at the top left of the screen the screen indicator ( for example, 1/4) appears at the top right To move to the next available screen, press [DSP]. For example, if you are currently in the second display screen, press [DSP] to move to the third display screen. The screen indicator changes from 2/4 to 3/4. When the secondary distance unit is set, an additional screen is available. It shows the HD, VD, and SD values. See also Other settings, page 101. The smallest unit of display for distances measured in feet-and-inches is 1/16 inch. Smaller units are impractical in the field. 44 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 When the actual value is greater than 99999'11"15/16, the > symbol appears. If the actual distance is less than 9999'11''15/16, the (solid triangle) symbol appears. This does not affect calculations. The precise value is used internally in all cases. Customizing items in the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) To customize the items that are displayed on the DSP1, DSP2, and DSP3 screens:

1. Hold down [DSP] for one second. 2. Use the arrow buttons [^], [v], [<], and [>] to highlight the item that you want to change:

3. Press the of items that can be displayed for this item. softkey to scroll through the list or The items that you can choose from are HA, AZ, HL, VA, V%, SD, VD, HD, Z, and (none). 4. To save your changes, press the Save softkey. Alternatively, highlight the last item for DSP3 and press [ENT]. The DSP screens show the items you have selected. Except for the (none) item, you cannot display the same item on more than one line of the same screen. The items displayed in the DSP1, DSP2, DSP3, and DSP4 screens are also used in the corresponding Layout screens (LO2, LO3, LO4, and LO5). You can also customize the displayed items in Layout. Header characters The following header characters appear in DSP screens:

Colon (:) indicates that tilt correction is applied to the value. Hash symbol (#) indicates that tilt correction is off. Underscore (_) under the tilt correction character indicates that Sea Level Correction or Scale factor is applied. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 45 3 Getting Started

[MODE] button The [MODE] button is on the top row of the Focus 4 keypad. Use it to change the keyboard mode for the current screen. Changing the input mode while entering points or codes When the cursor is in a point (PT) or code (CD) field, press [MODE] to change the input mode between alphanumeric (A) and numeric (1). The input mode indicator in the status bar changes to show the current input mode. When the cursor is in a height (HT) field, only numeric input mode is available. Pressing [MODE] has no effect when the cursor is in a HT field.

[HOT] key The HOT key menu is available from any observation screen. To display the HOT key menu, press [HOT]. Changing the height of the target 1. Press [HOT] to display the HOT menu. 2. Do one of the following:

Press [1]. Select HT. Press [ENT]. Enter the target height or select the height from the HT stack. 3. 4. Note To display the HT stack, press the Stack softkey. The HT stack stores the last 20 HT values entered. Setting the current temperature and pressure 1. Press [HOT] to display the HOT menu. 2. Do one of the following:

Press [2]. Select Temp-Press. Press [ENT]. Enter the ambient temperature and pressure. The ppm value is updated automatically. 3. 4. 46 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 Bubble indicator The bubble indicator appears if the instrument goes out of level while the compensator is turned on. It also appears directly after the start up screen. To display the bubble indicator in an observation screen at any other time, press

. The Focus 4 total station has a two-axis level compensation. To turn the leveling compensators on or off, press [<] or [>]. When the levelling compensators are turned off, the text OFF appears on the screen. If the instrument is more than 3'30" out of level, the text OVER appears on the screen. To return to the observation screen, press [ESC] or [ENT]. Laser plummet (option) Laser plummet on / off Do one of the following:

To turn the laser plummet switch on, press

. To close the bubble indicator window, press [ESC]. To turn the laser plummet switch off, press

. To open the luminance adjustment window, press [Lumi.]. To turn the laser plummet switch off and close the bubble indicator window, press [ESC]. Laser luminance adjustment Laser luminance can be set to 4 levels. To set the luminance brighter by one level, press

[Max.] once. To set the luminance darker by one level, press

[Min.] once To return to the bubble indicator window, press [ESC] or [ENT]. Note The current setting of leveling compensators is indicated by header characters (:, #,

:, and #) after field labels (such as HA, VA, SD, and HD) in observation screens. For more information, see Header characters, page 45. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 47 3 Getting Started Turning on the instrument Press the [PWR] button. The start-up screen appears. It shows the model name, current temperature, pressure, date, and time. The display automatically changes to the electronic level after two seconds. If you entered your name or your companys name in the Owners detail field, the text from this field appears on the start-up screen. To set the Owners detail field, press [MENU] and then select Settings / Other. See also Other settings, page 101. Turning off the instrument 1. Press [PWR] and [ENT]. 2. Do one of the following:

Press...

[ENT] again the Reset softkey the Sleep softkey

[ESC]

To... turn off the instrument reboot the software and re-start the instrument access the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) without an open job. put the instrument into power-saving mode cancel the power-off process and return to the previous screen Sleep mode To put the instrument into sleep mode, do one of the following:

In the Press [ENT] OFF screen, press the Sleep softkey. Enable the Power Save setting. See also Power saving, page 100. The instrument wakes up if any of the following events occur:

You press a button The instrument receives a remote control command You rotate the alidade You tilt the telescope 48 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Regional configuration Getting Started 3 To provide easier configuration for common regional settings, you can quickly configure the Focus 4 total station to a pre-set combination of default regional settings. The Regional Configuration screen appears only after the language configuration is complete and the instrument has rebooted. 1. Follow the steps in Other settings, page 101 to select the required language. 2. 3. Once the instrument has rebooted the Regional Configuration screen appears. Press [^] or [v] to highlight the required regional settings and then press [ENT]. If you do not want to change the current settings, press [ESC] and quit. The instrument continues to use the last settings that were configured. The settings affected by the Regional Configuration screen are:

Category Angle Distance Coordinates Power Save Communication Units Rec Others Setting VA zero Resolution Scale T-P Corr. Sea Level C&R corr. Order Label Main Unit EDM Unit Sleep Ext. Comm Baud Length Parity Stop bit Angle Distance Temp Press Rec Data CD Field Add Const XYZ disp 2nd Unit CD Input Europe Zenith 5"

1.000000 On Off 0.132 ENZ ENZ Off Off 5 minutes Nikon 4800 8 None 1 GON meters C mm Hg OFF OFF 1000 Fast None

<ABC>

International Zenith 5"

1.000000 On Off 0.132 ENZ ENZ Off Off 5 minutes Nikon 4800 8 None 1 DEG meters C mm Hg OFF OFF 1000 Fast None

<ABC>

United States Zenith 5"

1.000000 On Off 0.132 NEZ NEZ Off Off 5 minutes Nikon 4800 8 None 1 DEG US-ft F In Hg OFF OFF 1000 Fast None

<ABC>

Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 49 3 Getting Started The default regional configuration pre-set is Europe settings. See also Settings (basic job settings), page 96. List available jobs or data The Focus 4 total station lists available jobs or data when you do any of the following:

view or edit data (Press [MENU] then select Data) open the Job Manager (Press [MENU] then select Job) search for points or codes The current cursor position is shown in inverted colors

(it appears as white text on a black background). Press [^] to move the cursor one line up, or press [v] to move the cursor one line down. If the Page Up icon before the current page. Press [<] to move up one page. appears, there are more pages If the Page Down icon to move down one page. appears, there are more pages after the current page. Press [>]

To select an item from the list, move the cursor onto the item and press [ENT]. Entering data You can enter the following into the Focus 4 total station:

A point name or number, see page 50 A code, see page 53 Entering a point name or number You can use numeric or alphanumeric names up to 20 characters long to identify points. The default name for a new point is the last point name entered, with the last digit incremented. For example, if the last point name was A100, the default name for the next point is A101. If the last character of the previous point name is alphabetic, the default point name is identical to the last point name. When the cursor is in a PT (point) field, there are several ways to specify a point, or to enter coordinates. You can:

Enter an existing point, see page 51 Enter a new point, see page 51 50 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 Press [ENT] without a point name, see page 51 Specify a wildcard, see page 51 Enter a point by recording an instant measurement, see page 52 Enter a point from a point stack, see page 52 Enter a point from the point list, see page 53 Entering an existing point When you enter a known point name or number, the coordinates of that point are briefly displayed. A short beep sounds before the next screen appears or the next field is selected. To adjust the duration of the coordinate window display, press [MENU] then select Settings /

Others. To leave the window open until you press

[ENT], set the XYZ disp field to +ENT. See also page 101. Entering a new point When you enter a new point name or number, a coordinate input screen appears. Enter the coordinates for the point in NE, NEZ, or elevation-only (Z) format. To store the point in the current job, press [ENT] on the last line (the CD field). Pressing [ENT] without a point name To use a point without recording the coordinates, press

[ENT] in a PT field, without entering a point name. The input coordinates are used in the calculation but they are not saved in the database. The message This PT will not be recorded appears. Specifying a wildcard (*) If you include an asterisk ( for example, A100*) when you enter a point or code name, a list of points that match the entered text appears. Use [^] or [v] to move the cursor to the point that you want to use. Then press [ENT]. If the Page Up one page on the list. You can also use [<]. icon appears, you can use it to move up If the Page Down down one page. You can also use [>]. icon appears, you can use it to move When you select a point from the list, its coordinates are displayed and a beep sounds. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 51 3 Getting Started Entering a point by recording an instant measurement 1. Press the MsrPT softkey:

An observation screen appears. 2. 3. To start a measurement, press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. To change the height of the target, select the HT softkey. 4. When you have finished the measurement, press [ENT] to go to the point recording screen. 5. Enter the point or code name and then press [ENT]. When you move the cursor to a field, the current or default value appears in inverted colors. (It appears as white text on a black background). This is the default Replace All input mode. To change the input mode to Overwrite and highlight the first character, press [>]. To move the cursor to the end of the string, press [<]. Entering a point from the point stack The point stack is a list of the last 20 point names used, in chronological order from last used to first used. To enter a point from the point stack:

1. 2. 3. Select the Stack softkey when the cursor is in the PT field. The stack appears. Press [^] or [v] to move the cursor to the point that you want to use. Press [ENT]. When you return to the point input screen, the selected point name is entered in the PT field, incremented by one. For example, if you selected the A101 point, A102 appears in the PT field. 52 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 Entering a point from the point list 1. 2. Select the List softkey when the cursor is in the PT field. A list of existing points appears. Press [^] or [v] to move the cursor to the point that you want to use. 3. Press [ENT]. When you return to the point input screen, the selected point name is entered in the PT field. Add numeric or alphabetic characters if required. Entering a code The CD (Code) field defaults to the last code used. You can select a different code in the input point screen. Codenames can be numeric or alphanumeric, and up to 16 characters long. There are several ways to enter a code:

Enter a code directly, see page 53 Enter a code from the code stack, see page 53 Enter a code from the code list, see page 54 Entering a code directly 1. To change the input mode to alphanumeric or numeric, press [MODE]. 2. Use the keypad to enter the code. Entering a code from the code stack The code stack is a list of up to 20 recently used codes. When you reboot the Focus 4 total station, the code stack is cleared. To enter a code from the code stack:

1. 2. Select the Stack softkey when the cursor is in the CD field. The stack appears. To move the cursor to the code that you want to use, press [^] or [v]. 3. Press [ENT]. The selected code is copied to the CD field. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 53 3 Getting Started Entering a code from the code list 1. 2. Select the List softkey when the cursor is in the CD field. A list of existing codes appear. Press [^] or [v] to highlight the feature code that you want to use. 3. Press [ENT]. A layer has an arrow at the end of the code label. If you highlight a layer in the list and then press [ENT], the codes and layers in that layer are displayed. When you return to the input screen, the selected code is entered in the CD field. Advanced feature: Searching for a code using the first character Items are shown in alphabetic order. To find a code quickly when the code list appears, use the first-character search. For example, to see feature codes that begin with T, use the keypad to enter the letter T (press [1] twice). After each button press, the input mode field displays the selected letter. For example, if you press [1], S appears. If you quickly press [1] again, T appears. If you do not press the [1] button again, the letter T is selected. Once you select a letter, the cursor moves to the feature code beginning with that letter. If there is no code beginning with that letter, the cursor moves to the next available letter. Entering values in feet and inches If US Survey Feet (US-Ft) or International Feet (I-Ft) is selected as the distance unit, you can enter and display distances, HIs, HTs, and coordinate values in decimal feet or in feet and inches. See also Unit, page 99, and Other settings, page 101. To enter values in feet and inches in an input screen, enter the elements, separated by periods (.), in the following format:

<Feet> [.] <Inches> [.] <Numerator> [.] <Denominator> [ENT]

(011) (015) (099) The default denominator is 16. If the denominator is 16, you do not have to enter it, and it is not displayed on the screen. 54 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 For example, if you enter

[2] [.] [0] [8] [.] [5] [.] [ENT], it appears as 2'08" 5/ (2 feet, 8 and 5/16ths inches). The following examples show how to enter various values:

To enter... 65' 5 3/8"

65'

65' 5"

65' 5 3/8"

5 3/8"

Key in...

[6] [5] [.] [5] [.] [3] [.] [8] [ENT]

[6] [5] [ENT]

[6] [5] [.] [5] [ENT]

[6] [5] [.] [5] [.] [6] [ENT]

[0] [.] [5] [.] [3] [.] [8] [ENT] or [0] [.] [5] [.] [6] [ENT]

The numerator and denominator that you enter are automatically converted to the closest value from the following list: 0, 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 3/4, 7/8, 1/16, 3/16, 5/16, 7/16, 9/16, 11/16, 13/16, 15/16. If the denominator is 16, it is not shown on the screen. Creating or opening a job To record data on the Focus 4 total station, you must create or open a job. Note Before using the Focus 4 total station for the first time, check that you are using the required job settings. Creating a new job 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Press [MENU]. The MENU screen appears. Press [1]. The Job Manager appears. Select the Creat softkey. The Create Job screen appears. Enter the job name. To check the job settings, select the Sett softkey. You cannot change the settings for a job once you have created the job. Press [ENT] in the last field of the Job Sett screen. The new job is created. Note You can have a maximum of only 32 jobs. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 55 3 Getting Started Creating a control job A control job, or common file, stores coordinate data that is used by several field jobs. To create a control job in the office:

1. 2. Press [MENU]. The MENU screen appears. Press [1] or select Job. The Job Manager appears. 3. Move the cursor to the job to use as the control job. 4. 5. Select the Ctrl softkey. Select the Yes softkey. When you enter a point name or number, the system searches in the current job first. If the point is not found in the current job, the search is automatically extended to the control job. If the point is found in the control job, the selected point is copied to the current job as a UP record. Measuring distances C WARNING Never look at the sun through the telescope. If you do, you may damage or lose your eyesight. C WARNING Precautions should be taken to ensure that persons do not look directly, with or without an optical instrument, into the beam. C WARNING Laser beam path should be located well above or below eye level wherever practicable. Sighting a prism reflector Sight the telescope until you see cross-hairs at the center of the prism reflector. Sighting a single prism Sighting a tiltable single prism 56 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 Taking a distance measurement To take a distance measurement, press [MSR1] or [MSR2] in the Basic Measurement Screen

(BMS) or in any observation screen. While the instrument is taking a measurement, the prism constant appears in a smaller font. If tracking is set to ON, measurements are taken continuously until you press [MSR1], [MSR2], or [ESC]. Each time a measurement is taken, the distance is updated. To change the height of target (HT), temperature, or pressure, press [HOT]. See also [HOT] button, page 46. Settings that relate to corrections (T-P corr, Sea Level, C&R corr., and Map projection) are included in the job settings and are job-specific. To change any of these settings, you must create a new job. See also Job settings, page 93, and Settings (basic job settings), page 96. Viewing and changing the measurement settings 1. Hold down [MSR1] or [MSR2] for one second. 2. 3. To move the cursor between the fields, press [^] or

[v]. To change the value in the selected field, press [<]

or [>]. Field Target Const (prism constant) Mode Track Values Prism N-Prism 999 mm through 999 mm Precise Normal Track (continuous MSR) ON Track (continuous MSR) OFF Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 57 3 Getting Started Target field If the measurement is started with the Target field set to Prism, there is a dash in front of the prism constant. If the measurement is started with the Target field set to N-Prism, there is a right square bracket ] in front of the prism constant. The symbol then continuously moves from left to right over the prism constant in the display. The Target setting is used by the Focus 4 total station to apply better cyclic-error adjustment in distance measurement. The target setting efficiently eliminates multipath reflection. An incorrect Target setting may result in measurements outside the precision and intervals specified for the instrument. If a prism target is aimed in N-prism mode, the warning message Signal High!Try Prism Mode is displayed because of the excessive light reflection. A measurement made immediately after changing the target setting may take longer than usual. 58 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide C H A P T E R 4 4 Applications

HA reset and angle operations

Station setup

Stakeout menu

Programs menu

Recording measurement data

Switching between display screens This chapter describes the menu and display screens, and Focus 4 total station applications. Use the following keystrokes when working in the display screens and when you use the applications:

To switch between display screens To change HT To record points Press [DSP]. See also page 90. Press [HOT]

Press [ENT]

Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 59 4 Applications HA reset and angle operations To access the Angle menu, press [ANG] in the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS). To select a command from the Angle menu, press the corresponding number key. Alternatively, press [^] or [v] to highlight the command and then press [ENT]. Setting the horizontal angle to 0 Press [1] or select 0-Set in the Angle menu. The display returns to the BMS. Entering the horizontal angle 1. Press [2] or select Input in the Angle menu. The HA Input screen appears. 2. Use the numeric keys to enter the horizontal angle. 3. Press [ENT]. To enter 12345'50", key in [1] [2] [3] [.] [4] [5] [5] [0]. The displayed value is rounded to the minimum angle increment. Station setup To access the Stn Setup menu, press [STN] in the BMS. To select a command from the Stn Setup menu, press the corresponding number key. Alternatively, press [^] or

[v] to highlight the command and then press [ENT]. The last function used is highlighted. The station setup options are:

Baseline, page 61 Known, page 62 Resection, page 64 Base XYZ, page 67 Remote BM, page 68 BS Check, page 69 60 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Applications 4 Baseline Select this option for a two-point resection along a known line. 1. Press [1] or select BaseLine from the Stn Setup menu. 2. Enter a known point as P1. If you enter a new point name, a coordinate input screen appears. Sight P1 and press [MSR1] or [MSR2] to take a measurement. Press [ENT]. 3. Choose how you want to define a known line:

a. To define the line by entering P2 coordinates, press [1] or select By Coord. To define the line by entering the azimuth, press [2] or select By Angle. If you select By Angle, the azimuth input screen appears: Enter the angle value and press [ENT]. A measurement screen appears. b. Sight P2 and press [MSR1] or [MSR2] to take a measurement. Press [ENT]. After the measurement to P2 is completed, press [ENT]. The coordinates of the station are calculated. 4. 5. To record the station, press [ENT] or the REC softkey. To check the measurement, press the DSP softkey. If you defined the line by entering its azimuth, the HD and VD between P1 and P2 are displayed. If you defined the line by entering the P2 coordinates, the difference of HD (dHD) and VD

(dZ) between your measurement data and input coordinate data are displayed. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 61 4 Applications 6. 7. Enter the station name, the height of instrument

(HI), and a feature code (CD) if required. The station name defaults to the last recorded PT + 1. Backsight (BS) defaults to the first point (P1). To change the selected point, highlight the BS field and then select the Change softkey. 8. To finish the setup and record the station, press [ENT] in the BS field. Known Select this option to set up a station with known coordinates or azimuth. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press [2] or select Known in the Stn Setup menu. Enter a point name or number in the ST field. If the input point number or name is an existing point, its coordinates are displayed and the cursor moves to the HI (Height of instrument) field. If the point is new, a coordinate input screen appears. Enter the coordinates for the point. Press [ENT] after each field. When you press [ENT] in the CD field, the new point is stored. If the specified point has a code, the code appears in the CD field. Enter the instrument height in the HI field and then press [ENT]. In the Backsight screen that appears, select an input method for defining the backsight point:

To sight the backsight by entering coordinates, see the following section. To sight the backsight by entering the azimuth and angle, see page 64. 62 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Sighting the backsight by entering coordinates Applications 4 Z Xb X0 X i t h g e h t n e m u r t s n I Backsight point

(Xb, Yb, Zb) Station point

(Xi, Yi, Zi) Y0 Yb Y 1. 2. 3. To enter coordinates for the backsight point (BS), press [1] or select Coord from the Backsight screen. Enter the point name. If the point exists in the job, its coordinates are shown. If you intend to take a distance measurement to the BS, enter the height of target in the HT field. 4. Sight the BS, and then press [ENT] to complete the setup. HA Azimuth calculated by coordinates If measuring to a known coordinate BS, press

[DSP] to display a QA screen. The QA screen shows the dHD and dVD values, which indicate the difference between the measured distance and the distance calculated from the known coordinates. To record the station, press [ENT]. To finish the station setup after taking a distance measurement, press [ENT]. 5. 6. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 63 4 Applications Sighting the backsight by entering the azimuth angle i t h g e h t n e m u r t s n I X Azimuth Backsight point Y0 Station point

(Xi, Yi, Zi) Y 1. 2. To enter the azimuth angle to the backsight point, press [2] or select Angle from the Backsight screen. If there is no point name for the BS, press [ENT] on the BS field. 3. In the HA field, enter the azimuth angle to the BS point. If you press [ENT] without entering a value in the HA field, the azimuth is automatically set to 000'00". 4. Sight the BS point and press [ENT]. Resection A resection sets up the station using angle/distance measurements to known points. Z X0 X 1 t h g e H i X1 X2 Known point 1

(X1, Y1, Z1) 2 t h g e H i Known point 2

(X2, Y2, Z2) i t h g e h t n e m u r t s In Station point (Xi, Yi, Zi) Y Y1 Y0 Y2 64 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Applications 4 You can use a maximum of 10 points in a resection. Measurements can be distance and angle, or angle only. Calculation starts automatically when enough measurements are taken. You can delete poor observations and recalculate if necessary. You can also select the BS point. B Tip If the angle between known point 1 and known point 2 (measured from the station point) is extremely acute or extremely oblique, the resulting solution will be less reliable geometrically. For geometric reliability, select known point locations (or station point locations) that are widely spaced. 1. To start the resection, press [2] or select Resection in the Stn Setup menu. 2. Enter the point name for the first observation point (PT1). 3. Enter the target height and press [ENT]. 4. Sight PT1 and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. 5. To proceed to the next point, press [ENT]. 6. Enter the second point (PT2) and its height of target. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 65 4 Applications 7. Measure to PT2 and press [ENT]. When the instrument has enough data, it calculates the station (STN) coordinates. If more than the minimum required data is available, a standard deviation screen appears. To take measurements to strengthen geometry of the resection, press the Add softkey. For information about the View softkey, see Advanced feature: Viewing and deleting a measurement in resection, page 67. 8. When the results are satisfactory, record the station. To do this, press [ENT] or the REC softkey. 9. Enter the height of instrument, if required. Press

[ENT]. The ST field defaults to the last recorded PT + 1. 10. To change the station name, move to the ST field and edit or replace the text. B Tip If you have set Split ST to Yes, the ST field defaults to the last recorded ST value + 1. BS defaults to the first observed point. 11. To change the BS, press the Change softkey. 12. Select the BS point that you want to use and press [ENT]. 13. To finish the resection setup, move the cursor to the BS field and press [ENT]. 66 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Applications 4 B Tip The minimum data required for a resection is either three angle shots, or one angle shot and one distance shot. If you use a distance shot, the distance between the target points must be greater than the measured distance. Stn-Z is calculated from distance-measured data. If no distances are measured, then Stn-Z is calculated using angle-only measurements to points with 3D coordinates. Advanced feature: Viewing and deleting a measurement in resection To check the measurements to each known point, press the View softkey on the calculated STN (sigma or coordinate) screen. dHA dVD dHD Distributed HA errors in each direction VD errors between measured distance and calculated distance HD errors between measured distance and calculated distance To delete a measurement (because of large sigma values, for example), highlight the measurement data or display the detail screen for the measurement. Then press the DEL softkey. The STN coordinates are automatically recalculated. To continue resection observations, press the Add softkey. The input screen for the next PT appears. Base XYZ Select this option to change the instrument XYZ values. Base XYZ does not store an ST record in the job, so the BS Check cannot check the backsight if you enter a station using the Base XYZ option. You can use this function without an open job. 1. Press [3] or select Base XYZ from the Stn Setup menu. The current instrument XYZ values are shown as the default. 2. Enter the new instrument XYZ values and then press [ENT]. 3. Do one of the following:

Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 67 4 Applications To reset the horizontal angle, enter a value in the HA field and then press

[ENT]. If you do not need to reset the horizontal angle, leave the HA field blank and then press [ENT]. The Stn Setup menu appears. Remote BM Select this option to determine the station elevation. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press [4] or select Remote BM from the Stn Setup menu. Enter the BM point and press [ENT]. The point appears briefly. The cursor then moves to the HT field. Enter the HT and then press [ENT]. Sight the Bench Mark point and then press [MSR1]

or [MSR2]. The updated station coordinates are displayed. You can change the HI in this screen. 5. To record the updated STN, press [ENT]. When the HI setting is changed, the Z coordinate is updated before the station is recorded. You must complete a station setup before you use the Remote Benchmark function. 68 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Applications 4 BS Check Select these options to check and reset the backsight direction. Note Complete a station setup before using the BS check function. This function always refers to the backsight point from the last station (ST) record stored in the current open job. 1. Press [5] or select BS Check in the Stn Setup menu. The HA field refers to the current HA reading, and the BS field refers to the BS in the last station setup. Enter station coordinates for observations without recording data. 2. Do one of the following:

To reset the horizontal angle to the HA set in the last station setup, sight the BS and then select the Reset softkey or press [ENT]. To cancel the process and return to the BMS, select the Abrt softkey or press [ESC]. Stakeout menu To access the Layout menu, press [L-O] in the BMS. To select a command from the Layout menu, press the corresponding number key. Alternatively, press [^] or [v]

to highlight the command and then press [ENT]. The last function used is highlighted. There are four layout options:

S-O to Point, page 70 L-O from Line, page 71 L-O from Arc, page 72 XYZ, page 73 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 69 4 Applications S-O to Point Use this method to lay out a point based on the down, out, and dZ location to a specified line. 1. Press [1] or select S-O to Point from the Layout menu. 2. Enter the first point (P1) along the line. Alternatively, select the MSR softkey to measure a point. If you press [ENT] without entering a PT name, you can enter temporary coordinates. Temporary coordinates are not recorded in the job. Enter the second point (P2) along the line. Enter offsets to the line. To enter the value 0.0000, press [ENT] in a blank field. Sta O/S

(-) dZ Distance from P1 along the line Distance perpendicular to the line Right side of the P1P2 line Left side of the P1P2 line Difference in height from the line Rotate the instrument until the dHA is close to 000'00". Sight the target, and then press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. When a distance measurement is taken, the difference between the measured point and the design point appears. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. To record the point as an SO record, press [ENT]. Note Press [DSP] to switch between display screens. See also page 90. 70 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide The following figure shows the terminology used to guide you to the required point. Applications 4 Fill Out Cut L R In In Out R L Fill Cut L-O from Line Select this option to measure distance and offset values along a specified line. 1. Press [2] or select L-O from Line from the Layout menu. 2. Enter the first point for the reference line. Alternatively, select the MSR softkey to measure a point. 3. 4. If you press [ESC] in the Record PT screen, the measured point is used but not recorded in the job. Enter the second point for the reference line. Enter an asterisk ( for example, A*) in the PT field to perform a wildcard search. A list of matching points appears. Highlight a point in the list and then press

[ENT]. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 71 4 Applications The following figure shows how to determine or input a location relative to a line used for Layout. PT2 Dwn Out Prism PT2 dZ PT1 Plain view Prism PT1 Dwn Side view 5. Sight the prism or reflective sheet and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. Dwn Out dZ Horizontal distance from P1 to the measured point along the P1-P2 line Horizontal offset from the P1-P2 line to the measured point Vertical offset from the P1-P2 line to the measured point 6. Note Press [DSP] to switch between display screens. See also page 90. L-O from Arc Select this option to measure distance and offset values on the arc-curve. 1. 2. Press [3] or select L-O from Arc from the Layout menu. Enter the start of the curve point (P1) and the azimuth of its tangent line (HA1). Alternatively, to enter P1 by direct measurement, select the MSR softkey. 3. Choose a method to define the curve. P2 can be any point on the tangent line that is to exit the curve. 4. In the radius (Rad) field, enter a positive value for a clockwise curve. Enter a negative value for a counter-clockwise curve. 72 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide

Applications 4 Once you entered all factors, the Focus 4W calculates the curve. If the curve length (Len) is too large for a circle of the given radius, the curve is shortened. Note Press [DSP] to switch between display screens. See also page 90. XYZ Select this option to specify the stakeout point by coordinates. 1. Press [4] or select XYZ in the Layout menu. 2. Do one of the following:

Enter the point name that you want to establish and then press [ENT]. Specify the point by code or radius from the Focus 4W. If several points are found, they are displayed in a list. Press [^] or [v] to move up and down the list. Use [<] to move up one page, or [>] to move down one page. 3. Highlight a point in the list and then press [ENT]. The delta angle and the distance to the target are shown. 4. Rotate the instrument until the dHA is close to 000'00". Press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. dHA HD Difference in horizontal angle to the target point Distance to the target point Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 73 4 Applications 5. Ask the rod person to adjust the target position. When the target is on the intended position, the displayed errors become 0.000 m (0.000 ft). dHA R/L IN/OUT CUT/FIL Difference in horizontal angle to the target point Right/Left (Lateral error) In/Out (Longitudinal error) Cut/Fill Once a measurement is taken, the Cut/Fill value and Z coordinate are updated as the VA is changed. 6. To record the point, press [ENT]. The PT field defaults to the specified PT + 1000. Press [MENU] and then select Settings / Rec. Use the Add Constant field to specify an integer. The integer is added to the point number that is being laid out to generate a new number for recording the layout point. The default value is 1000. For example, when you stake out PT3 with an Add Constant of 1000, the default value in the SO field (layout record) is 1003. The display then returns to the observation screen. Press [ESC]. The display returns to the PT/CD/R input screen. If you entered the stakeout point using a single point name, the PT defaults to the last PT + 1. 7. If you selected a point from the list, the display returns to the list, unless all points have been selected. Press [ESC] to return to the point input screen. 74 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Advanced feature: Specifying a layout list by inputting points by range Applications 4 1. 2. Select the Fr/To softkey when the PT field is selected. Enter the start point (Fr) and the end point (To). The range between Fr and To must be less than 1001 points. If existing points are found between Fr and To, a point list appears. To highlight a point in the list, press [^] or [v]. To go to the layout observation screen, press

[ENT]. If you have assigned a control job, and additional points are found in the control job, the Ctrl softkey appears under the list. Programs menu To access the Programs menu, press [PRG] in the BMS. To select a command from the Programs menu, press the corresponding number key. Alternatively, press [^] or

[v] to highlight the command and then press [ENT]. The last function used is highlighted. The Programs menu has the following options:

RDM (Radial), page 77 RDM (Cont), page 77 REM, page 78 Cogo, page 78 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 75 4 Applications Remote distance measurement (RDM) - overview RDM or Remote distance measurement measures the horizontal distance, vertical distance, and slope distance between two points. First sighting point rSD rHD Second sighting point rVD Horizontal angle 0 direction Second sighting point rHA First sighting point Station point Slope distance between two points Vertical distance between two points Horizontal distance between two points Percentage of grade (rVD/rHD) 100%

Vertical grade (rHD/rVD):1 Azimuth from first point to second point rSD rVD rHD rV%

rGD rAZ Difference between RDM (Radial) and RDM (Cont) measurement methods RDM (Radial) calculations are made with reference to the first point. RDM (Cont) calculations are made with reference to the two preceding points. P3 P2 P1 P4 P1 P3 P4 P2 RDM(Radial) RDM(Cont) 76 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Applications 4 RDM (Radial) Choose this option to measure between the current point and the first point measured. 1. Press [1] or select RDM(Radial) in the Programs menu. 2. Sight the first point and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. The distance from the station point to the first point appears. 3. Sight the second point and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. The distances between the first and second point are displayed. rSD rVD rHD Slope distance between two points Vertical distance between two points Horizontal distance between two points 4. To change display screens, press [DSP]. rHA rV%

rGD Azimuth from first point to second point Percentage of grade (rVD/rHD) 100%

Vertical grade (rHD/rVD): 1 5. Press [ESC] to exit. RDM (Cont) Choose this option to measure between the current point and the immediately preceding point. 1. 2. Press [2] or select RDM(Cont.)from the Programs menu. Follow the procedure as for a radial RDM measurement. See also RDM (Radial), page 77. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 77 4 Applications REM Choose this option to measure a remote elevation. Note A prism is required only at the sighting (target) point. Arbitrary point Sighting point Station point 1. 2. 3. 4. Press [3] or select REM in the Programs menu. Enter the height of the target. Sight the target point and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. Loosen the vertical clamp and then turn the telescope to aim at an arbitrary point. The difference in elevation (Vh) appears. 5. Press [ESC] to exit. Cogo Choose the Cogo option to perform coordinate geometry (Cogo) calculations. To open the Cogo menu, press [5] on the Programs menu. There are five items in the Cogo menu:

Inverse, page 79 Input, page 81 Area & Perm, page 83 Down+Out, page 84 Intersection, page 85 78 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Applications 4 Inverse Choose this option from the Cogo menu to calculate angle and distance between two coordinates. Press [1] or select Inverse in the Cogo menu. The Inverse menu appears. PT-PT inverse PT-PT calculates the distance and the angle between two input points. To calculate a PTPT inverse:

1. Press [1] or select PT-PT in the Inverse menu. 2. Enter the first point number or name, and then press [ENT]. If you press [ENT] without entering a point name, a coordinate input screen appears, and you can enter coordinates. These coordinates are not stored to the database. If you want to store the point, specify a new point name. 3. Type the second point number/name, and then press [ENT]. If necessary select the MSR softkey to shoot the point on the spot so that you can use it in the calculation. The azimuth, horizontal distance, and vertical distance from the first point to the second point are displayed. 4. Do one of the following:

Gd V%

rSD To return to the PT input screen, press [ESC]. To return to the Cogo menu, press [ENT]. To change the contents of the result screen, press [DSP]. Grade (HD/VD) 100/Gd Slope distance PT1 to PT2 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 79 4 Applications 3Pt Angle If you choose 3Pt Angle, the Focus 4W calculates the angle between two lines defined by three points. To calculate a 3Pt angle:

1. 2. 3. Press [2] or select 3Pt Angle from the Inverse menu. P1 is the base point. Two lines are to be defined by P2 and P3, both from P1. Enter the P1 point name. Alternatively, use the MSR softkey to take a measurement to the point. Enter the second point (P2) to define the baseline, P1P2. The angle (dHA) is measured from the baseline. 4. Enter the third point (P3) to define the second line, P1P3. When you press the MSR softkey, a temporary measuring screen appears. Sight the target and press [MSR1] or [MSR2] to take a measurement. After the measurement, a recording point screen appears. To store the measured point, enter the PT, HT, and CD values and press [ENT]. To use the point without recording it, press [ESC]. When you have entered three points, the instrument calculates the angle and distances. 5. Do one of the following:

To return to the Inverse menu, press [ENT]. To return to the Input BasePt screen, press

[ESC]. 80 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Input Choose this option from the Cogo menu to calculate and manually input coordinates. Applications 4 To enter the Input menu, press [2] or select Input from the Cogo menu. There are three functions in this menu for recording new coordinate points. Azimuth+HD input To calculate a coordinate by an angle and distance input from the base point (P1), press [1] or select HA+HD from the Input menu. Enter the base point, P1. Type the point name and press

[ENT]. Enter the azimuth, horizontal distance, and vertical distance. Then press [ENT]. For example, to enter 12345'45", type 123.4545 and then press [ENT]. If you do not enter a value in the dVD field, the value 0.0000 is used. A recording point screen with the calculated coordinates appears. The PT field defaults to the last recorded point + 1. Press [ENT] to store the point. Traverse To calculate a new point based on two defined points and the angle, horizontal and vertical distances from the line defined by those two points, use the Traverse

(2Pt Angle) function. Press [2] or select Traverse in the Input menu. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 81 4 Applications To enter P1 and P2, enter point names or take measurements to targets. Enter the plus-minus angle, horizontal distance, and vertical distance from the baseline defined by P1P2. If you do not enter a value in the dVD field, the value 0.0000 is used. When you press [ENT] in the dVD field, a new point is calculated. The name in the PT field defaults to the last recorded point, + 1. To record the new point and return to the point input screen, press [ENT]. P1 (the base point) defaults to the previously recorded point value. P2 defaults to the previous P1 value. B Tip To continuously calculate a new point, enter +Ang, HD, and dVD from the previous bearing line. This is a convenient way to enter Traverse points. Entering coordinates To manually enter the XYZ coordinates, press [3] or select Input XYZ from the Input menu. The PT name defaults to the last recorded PT + 1. Enter the coordinates using the numeric keys. To move to the next field, press [ENT] or [v] in a field. To store the point as an MP record and return to the point input screen, press [ENT] in the Z field. The default PT is incremented to the next value. You can record NE, NEZ, or Z-only data. 82 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Applications 4 Area & Perm Choose this option from the Cogo menu to calculate area and perimeter. Press [3] or select Area & Perim in the Cogo menu. To take a measurement, enter the first point and press

[ENT], or select the MSR softkey. In the upper right corner of the screen, a counter indicates how many points you have entered. To input point numbers consecutively, use the Fr/To softkey. See also Advanced feature: Entering a range of points, page 83. If you enter a new point name, you can enter new coordinates and record the point. If you do not want to record the point, press [ENT] without entering a value in the PT field. An XY coordinate input screen appears. Continue to enter points until you have defined all the points in the lot. Then, press [v] to calculate the area and perimeter. The first and last points that you enter are joined to close the area. You must enter the points in the order in which they define the lot. You can enter up to 99 points. Press [ENT] to exit from the function, or press [ESC] to return to the previous screens one by one. Advanced feature: Entering a range of points To quickly enter a sequential range of points, use the range input function. To access this function, select the Fr/To softkey in the No. 01 or No. 02 input screens. Enter the start point name in the Fr field and the end point name in the To field. You can include letters and hyphens in the point names, but the last character must be numeric. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 83 4 Applications To start searching for matching points, press [ENT] in the To field. The counter shows the number of matching points found. When the search is complete, you are returned to the Input PT screen. Select the Calc softkey to calculate the area and perimeter, or enter point names in the PT field. Press [ESC] to return to the Input PT screen where the preceding point name appears. Note If you search for a point when a control job is specified, and the system cannot find the point in the current job, the control job is also searched. If the point is found in the control job, it is copied to the current job as a UP record. See also Setting the control job, page 95. Down+Out Choose this option from the Cogo menu to calculate coordinates from Down and Out. Press [4] or select Down & Out in the Cogo menu. Enter the base point (P1). Specify the azimuth bearing. To do this, enter a value in the HA or P2 field. P2 is a second point on the line. P2 HA P1 Enter the horizontal distance along the baseline (Dwn), the horizontal distance perpendicular to the line (Out), and the vertical distance (dVD). 84 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Applications 4 Out(+) Dwn(-) Dwn(+) Out(-) A negative value in the Dwn field means the opposite direction along the defined bearing line. A negative value in the Out field is for the left-hand side of the bearing line. To calculate the coordinates of the point (PM), press

[ENT] in the dVD field. You can change the Z coordinate here. To record the point, press [ENT] in the CD field. The coordinates are stored as a CC record. Intersection Choose this option from the Cogo menu to calculate coordinates using intersection functions. Press [5] or select Intersection in the Cogo menu. The Intersection menu appears. It has four functions for calculating coordinates. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 85 4 Applications Calculating a bearing-bearing intersection A bearing-bearing intersection is the intersection point of two lines. To calculate a bearing-bearing intersection:

1. 2. Press [1] or select Brng-Brng in the Intersection menu. Enter the first point name and press [ENT]. Alternatively, to measure directly to the point, select the MSR softkey. 3. Define the first line by azimuth. 4. To define the line by two points, select the Pts softkey. The Fr field defaults to the P1 point, but you can change the selected point. In the To field, enter or measure to the second point. See also Advanced feature: Entering angle and distance offsets, page 89. 5. Do one of the following:

To return to the previous screen, press [ENT]. The calculated value appears in the HA field. To go to the next screen, press [ENT]. 6. Define the second line by two points or by P2 and HA. 7. 8. 9. To calculate the coordinates of the intersection point, press [ENT] in the HA field. The calculated coordinates are displayed. You can input a Z coordinate if necessary. Enter a value in the PT field and in the CD field. To record the point, press [ENT]. 86 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Applications 4 Calculating a bearing-distance intersection 1. Press [2] or select Brng-Dist in the Intersection menu. Brng-Dist calculates the intersection point formed by one line and one distance (radius). 2. Enter a point on the line. The line can be defined by two points or by a point and an azimuth. 3. Enter the second point (P2) as the center of the circle. 4. Enter the distance from P2:

To define the distance (HD) by two points, select the Pts softkey. To calculate the coordinates of the intersection point, press [ENT] in the HD field. 5. 6. 7. 8. If there are two results, the first solution appears graphically relative to the P1P2 line. To display the second solution, press [<] or [>]. To record the point, press [ENT] when the required solution appears. Enter a Z coordinate if necessary. To move to the PT and CD fields, press [ENT]. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 87 4 Applications Calculating a distance-distance intersection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Press [3] or select Dist-Dist in the Intersection menu. Enter the first point name and press [ENT], or select the MSR softkey to measure directly to the point. Enter the distance from P1 and press [ENT]. To define the distance (HD) by two points, select the Pts softkey. Enter P2 and the distance from P2 (HD). To calculate the coordinates of the intersection point, press [ENT] in the HD field. Press [<] or [>] to display the second solution. To record the point, press [ENT] when the required solution appears. 9. Enter a Z coordinate if necessary. 10. Press [ENT] to move to the PT and CD fields. Calculating a point-line intersection 1. 2. 3. Press [4] or select Pt-Line in the Intersection menu. Enter the first point name and press [ENT], or select the MSR softkey to measure directly to the point. Enter the azimuth, or select the Pts softkey to enter another point name on the line. 88 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Applications 4 4. 5. Enter the perpendicular point to the line, or select the MSR softkey to take a measurement to the point. To calculate the coordinates of the intersection point, press [ENT]. If P1 and P2 are 3D points, the Z coordinate of the perpendicular point is calculated relative to the P1P2 slope. 6. Enter PT and CD then press [ENT] to record the point. Advanced feature: Entering angle and distance offsets To display the offset input screen, select the O/S softkey. In the Ang field, enter a positive value to rotate the line clockwise. Enter a negative value to rotate the line counter clockwise. In the O/S field, enter a positive value to specify an offset to the right. Enter a negative value to specify an offset to the left. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 89 4 Applications Recording measurement data To record points from any observation screen, press

[ENT]. PT defaults to the last recorded PT, + 1. You can enter the PT name from the point list or the point stack. See Entering a point from the point list, page 53, and Entering a point from the point stack, page 52. To record the point, press [ENT] on the last field. If HA or VA is moved after you take a measurement, but before you press [ENT], the recalculated coordinates will be stored. If the point name that you want to record already exists in the job, an error message appears. Depending on the type of existing record, you can overwrite the old record with the new data. See Recording data, page 139. If you do not need to record data, press [MENU] and set Settings / Rec to OFF. The default setting is OFF. Switching between display screens Press [DSP] to switch between display screens. See the [DSP] button, page 44. Each time you press [DSP], the next screen appears. When you press [DSP] in the final screen, the first screen appears. 90 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide C H A P T E R 5 5 Menu Screen In this chapter:

Job Settings (basic job settings) Use the MENU screen to access functions and settings. To display the MENU screen, press the [MENU] key. Data Communication 1sec-Key Calibration Time Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 91 5 Menu Screen Job Use the Job option to open, create, delete, and manage jobs. To open the Job Manager, press [1] or select Job from the MENU screen. If jobs are stored on the Focus 4 total station, the job list appears. It shows all the stored jobs with the newest job at the top of the list. See Opening an existing job, page 92. If no jobs are stored, the Create Job screen appears. See Creating a new job, page 92. Opening an existing job The job list shows all the jobs stored on the instrument, in descending date order. The following symbols provide extra information about jobs:

Symbol

Meaning Current job Control job Some of the job settings are different from the current job Press [^] to move up or [v] to move down the job list. Press [ENT] to open the highlighted job. When you open a job, all job settings are automatically changed to match those used in the open job. Creating a new job 1. Select the Creat softkey in the job list. 2. Enter a job name of up to eight characters. Select

[ENT]. 92 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 3. Do one of the following:

To check the job settings, select the Sett softkey. To create a new job using the current job settings, press [ENT] or select the OK softkey. Job settings Job settings are separate from other temporary settings. Job settings are established when a job is created, and cannot be changed. This ensures that the data in a job is correctly stored in the database, and that all necessary corrections are applied when you store each record. To move between fields, press [^] or [v]. Alternatively, to move to the next field, press [ENT]. To change the setting in the selected field, press [<] or [>]. To confirm the job settings and create the job, press [ENT] in the last field. Screen 1 Scale Factor T-P correction Sea Level C&R correction OFF / 0.132 / 0.200 0.999600 to 1.000400 ON / OFF ON / OFF Screen 2 Angle unit Distance unit Temp unit Press unit DEG / GON /MIL Metre / US-Ft / I-Ft C / F hPa / mmHg / inHg Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 93 5 Menu Screen Screen 3 If you select USFt or IFt, an additional settings screen appears. Use this screen to specify whether to display values in DecimalFt or FtInch. VA zero Order Zenith / Horizon NEZ / ENZ Deleting a job Note There is no undelete function in Job Manager. Before you press [ENT] or select DEL, make sure that the selected job is the one that you want to delete. 1. In the job list, highlight the job to delete. 2. Select the DEL softkey. A confirmation screen appears. 3. Do one of the following:

To delete the selected job, press [ENT] or select the DEL softkey. To cancel the deletion and return to the previous screen, press [ESC] or select the Abrt softkey. After you delete a job, the job list appears. 94 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Setting the control job A control job has the same format as a standard job. You can open and modify it like any other job, and you can use it to record any measured data. Menu Screen 5 To set the control job:

1. Highlight the job that you want to use as the control job. 2. Select the Ctrl softkey. A confirmation screen appears. 3. Do one of the following:

To set the selected job as the control job, press [ENT] or select the Yes softkey. To cancel the process, press [ESC] or select the No softkey. If a control job is already assigned, the newly assigned control job replaces it as the control job. To clear the selected control job, highlight the current control job in the job list and select the Ctrl softkey. Then press [ENT] or select the Yes softkey. Displaying job information To display job information, highlight the job name and then select the Info softkey. The Information screen shows the number of records in the job, the free space, and the date when the job was created. Free space indicates how many points can be stored in the job. To return to the job list, press any button. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 95 5 Menu Screen Settings (basic job settings) Use the Settings menu to configure the basic job settings. Press [2] or select Settings on the MENU screen. Some job settings, as identified in the following sections, cannot be changed once a job is created. If you attempt to change any of these settings while a job is open, a confirmation screen appears, asking you to create a new job with the new settings, or to work with the new settings without recording any data. See Settings, page 141. Angle To change the angles, press [1] or select Angle in the Settings menu. VA zero Resolution Zenith / Horizon 1" / 5" / 10"

0.2 / 1 / 2 mgon 0.005 / 0.02 / 0.05 mil The VA zero job setting cannot be changed once a job is created. Distance These settings cannot be changed once a job is created. To change the distance, press [2] or select Distance in the Settings menu. Scale T-P corr Sea Level C&R corr Numeric value between 0.999600 and 1.000400 ON / OFF ON / OFF OFF / 0.132 / 0.200 96 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Temperature and pressure corrections Menu Screen 5 K

275 10000.0

106 P 13.5951 980.665

273 T+

SD'

1

K

1000000 SD Slope dist. (before adj.) Slope dist. (after adj.) Compensation coefficient Pressure (hPa) Temperature (C) SD SD'

K P T Sea-level corrections HD'

HD Re

Re ZSTN

HD HD'

ZSTN Re Horizontal dist. (before adj.) Horizontal dist. (after adj.) Instrument-Z 6370 km Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 97 5 Menu Screen Curvature and refraction corrections Because the surface of the earth is curved, the vertical difference (VD and Z) at the measurement point, as referenced to the horizontal plane, inevitably includes some error. This error is called curvature error. Also, because the density of the air surrounding the earth decreases with altitude, light is refracted at different rates at different altitudes. The error caused by this change in refraction is called refraction error. Curvature error (A A') Refraction error (A A1') A' Horizontal direction P A O A1'

A1 A'

P HD'

HD SD2 2VA(

----------------------------------- 1 sin 2Re

k

2 VD'

VD HD2

----------- 1 2Re

) k

HD HD'

VD VD'

SD VA Re k Horizontal dist. (before adj.) Horizontal dist. (after adj.) Vertical dist. (before adj.) Vertical dist. (after adj.) Slope dist Vertical angle 6370 km C&R constant (0.132 or 0.200) 98 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 Coordinate Press [3] or select Coord. in the Settings menu. The Coordinate menu appears. Order Label NEZ / ENZ XYZ / YXZ / NEZ(ENZ) The Order cannot be changed once a job is created. Communications Press [4] or select Comm. in the Settings menu. The Communication menu appears. Ext.Comm Port Baud (bps) Length Parity Stop bit NIKON / SET Serial/Bluetooth Note This field appears only when the optional Bluetooth wireless technology is on-board. 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 /

38400 7 / 8 EVEN / ODD / NONE 1 / 2 See also Chapter 7, Transferring Coordinate Data. Unit Note The Angle, Distance, Temp, and Press job settings cannot be changed once a job is created. Press [5] or select Unit in the Settings menu. The Unit menu appears. Angle Distance Temp Pressure DEG (Degree) GON (GON) MIL (Mil6400) Meter US-Ft I-F C (Celsius) F (Fahrenheit) hPa mmHg inHg Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 99 5 Menu Screen If you select US-Ft or I-Ft, an additional settings screen appears. Use this screen to specify whether to display values in Decimal-Ft or Ft-Inch. Power saving To open the Power Save menu, press [6] or select PwrSave in the Settings menu. Main unit EDM unit Sleep OFF / 5 min / 10 min / 30 min OFF / At Once / 0.1 min / 0.5 min / 3 min /

10 min OFF / 1 min / 3 min / 5 min

. Recording Press [7] or select Rec in the Settings menu. The Rec Menu appears. Rec Data CD field Add const ON / OFF ON / OFF Integer between 1 and 999,999 If you need to record data from your observations, set the Rec Data field to ON. Both raw and coordinate data is stored. If you set the Rec Data field to OFF, no record is stored. If you would like to record a feature code when you record coordinate data, set the CD field to ON. The CD field appears in the Recording PT screen. This field sets the default point number for the observed coordinate data when you select Layout / XYZ. 100 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 Other settings Press [8] or select Other in the Settings menu. The Others menu appears.

<<Sorry, your instructions were not clear to me - do I need to replace the table below and the snap with the XYZ disp 2nd Unit CD input Language Owners Detail Up to 20 characters Fast / Normal / Slow / +ENT None / Meter / US-Ft / I-Ft 123 / ABC English / Russian XYZ disp defines the speed to move to the next screen after showing XYZ of the input point. When the secondary unit is set to a unit, an extra display screen is available in the BMS, layout observation screens, and LO from line screens. The extra screen shows the HD, VD, and SD in the secondary unit. If you select US-Ft or I-Ft, an additional settings screen appears. Use this screen to specify whether to display values in Decimal-Ft or Ft-Inch. The CD Input field sets the default input mode when a CD field appears. In the Language field, use [<] / [>] to open the language screen and [v] / [^] to select the required language. Press

[ENT] to confirm. In the Reboot confirmation screen, press [ENT] to restart the instrument. The instrument reboots and displays the start-up screen in the selected language. The Owners Detail field allows you to enter your name or the name of your company. If you enter a value in this field, it appears when you start the Focus 4 total station. To provide easier configuration for common regional settings, you can quickly configure the Focus 4 total station to a pre-set combination of default regional settings. See also Regional configuration, page 49. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 101 5 Menu Screen Data Use the Data menu to view or edit records. To display the Data menu, press [3] on the MENU screen. Raw and coordinate data is stored when the Data Rec setting is ON. If the Data Rec setting is OFF, no data is recorded in [MENU] / Data / Data Rec. Viewing records B Tip You can view data at any time, even in an observation screen. Viewing RAW data To show the raw data records in a list, press [1] in the Data menu. The newest record is at the bottom of the screen. To scroll through the records, press [^] or [v]. To move up or down one page, press [<] or [>]. To view more detailed information for a selected record, press [ENT]. To return to the record list, press

[ESC]. SS and F1 records Raw SS and F1 records contain PT, HT, CD, HA, VA, and SD fields. SS records are sideshots (topo shots). All shots taken from the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) are stored as SS records. F1 records are backsight shots that are taken when you set up a station. Coordinates are not available for an F1 record. When you take more than one measurement to the same point and choose to overwrite the XYZ data, the old raw record becomes raw data only. As a result, only one SS (RAW) record keeps its corresponding SS(XYZ) record. Other SS(RAW) records to the same point no longer have a record on their coordinates. 102 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 ST records ST (station) records contain ST, HI, BS, and AZ fields. Press [DISP] to switch between the screens:

The first screen shows ST, HI, BS, and AZ The second screen shows X, Y, Z, PT, and CD SO records SO records are layout (L-O) shots. There shots are recorded in stakeout functions. Press [DISP] to switch between the screens:

The first screen shows HA, VA, SD, PT, and HT The second screen shows X, Y, Z, PT, and CD The third screen shows dX, dY, dZ, PT, and CD The dX, dY, and dZ fields store the difference between the actual position and the planned position of the stakeout shot. These fields are downloaded as comment records in Nikon RAW format. CO records A CO record is a comment that is added to the job by the system. For example, the system writes a comment record when you use the Remote Benchmark function to change the Stn-Z, or when you use the BSCheck function to reset the horizontal angle. When you enter a Stn-XYZ by Base-XYZ function, the recorded station appears as a comment record. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 103 5 Menu Screen Viewing coordinate data To show the coordinate data records in a list, press [2] in the Data menu. The newest record is at the bottom of the screen. To scroll through the records, press [^] or [v]. To move up or down one page, press [<] or [>]. Press [ENT] to see more detailed information about the selected record. The header (XYZ, YXZ, NEZ, or ENZ) depends on the Coord. Label setting in

[MENU] / Settings / Coord. See also Coordinate, page 99. UP, MP, CC, and RE records All coordinate records contain PT, CD, X, Y, and Z fields. UP records are uploaded point coordinates. MP records are manually input point coordinates. CC records are points calculated in Cogo. RE records are points calculated in Base Line and Resection station setup. Deleting records Deleting raw records 1. In the RAW screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the record that you want to delete. Then select the DEL softkey. 2. A confirmation screen appears. a. b. To delete the selected record, press [ENT] or select the Yes softkey. To cancel the deletion of data, press [ESC] or select the No softkey. 104 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide The system also deletes the corresponding coordinate data when you delete an SS or SO record. Menu Screen 5 Deleting coordinate records 1. In the XYZ screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the record that you want to delete. Then select the DEL softkey. 2. A confirmation screen appears. a. b. To delete the selected record, press [ENT] or select the Yes softkey. To cancel the deletion of data, press [ESC] or select the No softkey. Alternatively, delete coordinate data by selecting the DEL softkey in the detailed display screen for the record. If the record that you want to delete is referred by any ST record, a warning message appears. Deleting station records C CAUTION There is no undelete function on the instrument. Before you confirm the deletion by pressing the DEL softkey, make sure that you have selected the correct station record. 1. In the Station screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the record that you want to delete. The select the DEL softkey. 2. A confirmation screen appears. a. b. To delete the selected record, press [ENT] or select the Yes softkey. To cancel the deletion of data, press [ESC] or select the No softkey. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 105 5 Menu Screen 3. If you select Yes, a warning screen appears. Select the DEL softkey to confirm the deletion. Note You cannot press [ENT] in this screen. All observations from the station that you selected are deleted. Editing raw records For any point record, you can edit the following:

Point name (PT) Feature code (CD) Height of target (HT) Height of instrument (HI) Backsight point (BS) Backsight azimuth (AZ) You cannot edit the following:

The CD field for SO and F1 records HA, VA, or SD values 1. Do one of the following:

In the RAW screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the record to edit. Then select the Edit softkey. In the detailed data screen, select the Edit softkey. 2. Use [^] or [v] to highlight a field. Then modify the value in the selected field. Note When you change the HT of an SS or SO measurement record, the Z coordinate is recalculated. 106 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 3. Press [ENT] in the last line of the edit screen. A confirmation screen appears. 4. Do one of the following:

To accept the changes and return to the data view screen, press [ENT] or select the Yes softkey. To return to the Edit screen, press [ESC] or select the No softkey. Editing coordinate records You can edit PT, CD, and coordinate values. You cannot edit:

The coordinate record for the current station SS and SO records Record referred by Station To edit coordinate records:

1. Do one of the following:

In the XYZ screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the record to edit. Then select the Edit softkey. In the detailed data screen, select the Edit softkey. 2. Use [^] or [v] to highlight a field. Then modify the value in the selected field. 3. To finish editing, press [ENT] in the CD field. A confirmation screen appears. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 107 5 Menu Screen 4. Do one of the following:

To accept the changes and return to the data view screen, press [ENT] or select the Yes softkey. To return to the Edit screen, press [ESC] or select the No softkey. Editing station records Note The system will not recalculate measurements if you change the station record. You will need to recalculate all coordinate and raw data that was collected from an edited station record in your postprocessing software. 1. In the RAW screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the station record to edit. Then select the Edit softkey. 2. Use [^] or [v] to highlight a field. Then modify the value in the selected field. You can edit any field in the ST record, but the instrument does not recalculate the measurements from this station. 3. To finish editing, press [ENT] in the AZ field. If you change the ST and HI values, the coordinates of observation points are not recalculated. A comment record is stored to record the change. The following is a comment record for a changed HI value: CO, HI changed at ST:9012 Old HI = 1.3456m If you change the BS or AZ values, raw records are not recalculated. A comment record is stored to record the change. 108 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide

Searching records You can search for records by their type, point name, code, or by any combination of these values. Menu Screen 5 Searching raw records In the RAW screen, select the Srch softkey to access the raw data search function. To find a point by name, enter the name in the PT field and press [ENT] twice. You can use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard. For example, when you enter 30* in the PT field, the search matches the points named 300, 301, 302, 3000A2, and 3010. To find a record by point type, move to the Type field and use [<] or [>] to change the selected point type. The options are ALL, ST, SS, SO, and CO. You can then enter a value in the Code field. If you select ST or SO in the Type field, you do not have to enter a value in the CD field. Press [ENT] in the PT field to start the search. If you select CO in the Type field, you cannot enter a value in the PT or CD fields. Press [ENT] in the Type field to start the search. If more than one point matches the specified criteria, the matching points are displayed in a list. Use [^] or [v] to highlight the point that you want to use and then press

[ENT] to select it. Detailed data for the selected record appears. Do one of the following:

To change the fields, select the DSP softkey. To return to the list, press [ENT]. If no point matches the specified criteria, an error screen appears. Press any button to return to the data screen. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 109 5 Menu Screen Searching coordinate records In the XYZ screen, select the Srch softkey to access the XYZ data search function. To find a coordinate by name, enter the point name in the PT field and press [ENT] twice. You can use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard. For example, when you enter 500* in the PT field, the search matches the points named 500, 500-1, 500-A, and 5000. To search for a record by point type, move to the Type field and use [<] or [>] to change the selected point type. The options are ALL, SS, SO, MP, UP, and CC. If more than one point matches the search criteria, the matching points are displayed in a list. Use [^] or [v] to highlight the point you want to use and then press [ENT] to select it. If no point matches the specified criteria, an error screen appears. Press any button to return to the data screen. 110 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 Entering coordinates 1. In the XYZ screen, select the Input softkey. A new input point screen appears. The PT field defaults to the last recorded PT + 1, but you can change the value shown. 2. Use the numeric keys to enter the coordinates. Press [ENT] or [v] in each field to move to the next field. When you press [ENT] in the CD field, the point is stored as an MP record. After you have recording a point, the next point input screen is shown with the updated default PT. You can record NE, NEZ, or Z-only data in the database. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 111 5 Menu Screen Communication Use the Communication menu to download or upload data. To access it, press [4] or select Comm. on the MENU screen. Downloading coordinate data To change the download settings, press [1] or select Download in the Communication menu. Format Data NIKON (Fixed) RAW Coordinate To display the total number of records that will be downloaded, press [ENT] in the Data field. As each record in the current job is output from the Focus 4 total station, the current line number is updated. Once transferring is completed, you can choose whether to delete the current job:

To delete the current job, press [4]. To return to the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) without deleting the current job, press [ESC] or select the Abrt softkey. 112 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 Optional Bluetooth function When the optional Bluetooth wireless technology function is installed, a Port selection screen appears when you press the Comm softkey. Uploading coordinate data To upload coordinate data from a computer, press [2] or select Upload XYZ in the Communication menu. The default data format appears. To change the order of data fields, select the Edit softkey. See also Advanced feature: Editing the data order for upload, page 114. Otherwise, press [ENT]. Select the Job softkey to go to the Job Manager screen. See also Job, page 92. To change the communication settings, select the Comm softkey. The serial port settings must match the settings used by the terminal software on the computer. Use an RS-232C cable to connect the Focus 4 total station to the computer. In the terminal program, set flow control to Xon/Xoff. The Free space field shows the number of points that can still be stored on the Focus 4 total station. Press [ENT] to put the Focus 4 total station in receive mode. On the computer, choose the Send Text File command in the terminal program to start sending data. As each point is received by the instrument, the value in the Records field is incremented. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 113 5 Menu Screen If you press [ESC] during data upload, the upload is canceled and the display returns to the Communication menu. Records that were received before you pressed [ESC] are stored in the job. During upload, the system will truncate any code that is longer than 16 characters. If the existing point is a UP, CC, or MP record, and it is not referred to by any station or backsight, it is automatically overwritten by the uploaded point. No error message appears. Advanced feature: Editing the data order for upload 1. 2. 3. Select the Edit softkey. The Data Fields screen appears. To move between the fields, press [<] or [>]. To change the selected item in a field, use the and or blank. softkeys. The options are PT, N, E, Z, CD, 4. To save your changes and return to the previous screen, select the Save softkey. For example, if your original data is as follows:

1, 30.000, 20.000, L1 and you set the data fields to PT N E CD, then the uploaded data is:

PT=1, N=30.000, E=20.000, CD=L1 For more information about coordinate data, see Transferring coordinate data to the total station, page 124. Uploading coordinates without points You can upload data without points. If you do not include a point in the format definition, each line of data is automatically assigned the next available point number. To help you to select points in the field, make sure that you store an identifier in the CD field. The data format cannot include duplicate items. Use PT, N, E, Z, and CD once each in the data format. To skip an item in your original file, set the corresponding field to blank. 114 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 1sec-Key Use the 1sec-Key menu to configure the settings for the one-second buttons, [MSR1],

[MSR2], and [DSP]. To access it, press [5] or select 1sec-Keys in the MENU screen.

[MSR] button settings There are two [MSR] buttons:

To change the settings for the [MSR1] button, press [1] or select MSR1. To change the settings for the [MSR2] button, press [2] or select MSR2. Each [MSR] button has four settings. In the Const and Track field, use the numeric keys to enter values. In the other fields, use [<] or [>] to change the settings. B Tip To quickly access the settings screen, hold down [MSR1] or [MSR2] for one second.

[DSP] button settings To change the display items in the BMS and in Layout observation screens, press [2] or select [DSP] in the 1sec-Keys menu. To move the cursor, use [<], [>], [^] or [v]. To change the display item, press either the softkey or the softkey. To save the changes, press [ENT] from the last line of

<DSP3> or select the Save softkey. B Tip To quickly access the DSP settings screen, hold down [DSP] for one second. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 115 5 Menu Screen Calibration Use the Calibration screen to calibrate the instrument if required. To access the Calibration screen, press [6] or select Calibrat from the MENU screen. See also Adjusting the calibration, page 120. Time Use the Date & Time screen to set the current date and time. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press [7] or select Time on the MENU screen. The Date & Time screen appears. The current date and time settings are displayed. Enter the date in Year-Month-Day format. For example, to change the date to August 15, 2006 press [2] [0] [0] [6] [ENT] [8] [ENT] [1] [5] [ENT]. If the highlighted part of the field ( for example, the year) is already correct, press

[ENT] to use the current value. For example, if the date is already set to August 20, 2006, and you want to change the date to August 25, 2006, press [ENT] [ENT] [2] [5]

[ENT]. To move to the Time field, press [ENT] from the Date field:

Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, to set the time to 4:35 PM, press [1] [6] [ENT] [3] [5] [ENT]. 5. Do one of the following:

To finish setting the date and time, press [ENT] in the Minutes field. To cancel the changes, press [ESC]. 116 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide C H A P T E R 6 Checking and Adjusting 6 This chapter describes how to check the accuracy of the Focus 4 total station, and if necessary, adjust the required settings. In this chapter:

Adjusting the electronic level Checking and adjusting the circular level Checking and adjusting the optical/laser plummet Zero point errors of vertical scale and horizontal angle corrections The instrument constant Checking the laser pointer Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 117 6 Checking and Adjusting Adjusting the electronic level To adjust the electronic level, Zero point errors of vertical scale and horizontal angle corrections are used. See page 119. Checking and adjusting the circular level Once you have checked and adjusted the electronic level, check the circular level. If the bubble is not in the center of the level, use the adjusting pin to rotate the three adjustment screws of either circular level on the instrument main body or tribrach until the bubble is centered. Checking and adjusting the optical/laser plummet The optical axis of the plummet must be aligned with the vertical axis of the instrument. To check and adjust the optical/laser plummet:

1. 2. Place the instrument on the tripod. You do not have to level the instrument. Place a thick sheet of paper marked with an X on the ground below the instrument. 3. Do the following:

Look through the optical plummet and then adjust the leveling screws until the image of the X is in the center of the reticle mark . For the laser plummet, adjust the laser pointer to the X. 4. Rotate the alidade by 180. If the marked image is in the same position in the center of the reticle mark, no adjustment is required. For the laser plummet, if the laser pointer is on the X, no adjustment is required. 118 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Checking and Adjusting 6 5. If the image or laser pointer is not in the same position, adjust the optical or laser plummet:

a. Use the supplied hexagonal wrench to turn the adjustment screws until the image of the X is in Position P. Position P is the center point of the line connecting the X and the center of the reticle mark

. b. Repeat from Step 2. For laser plummet adjustment, you must remove a cap. Zero point errors of vertical scale and horizontal angle corrections Checking the calibration 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Set up the instrument on the tripod. Follow the leveling procedures described in Leveling the instrument, page 31. Flip the telescope to the Face-1 position. The display and tangent screws are facing towards you. Sight a target that is within 45 of the horizontal plane. Read the vertical angle from the VA1 field in the Basic Measurement Screen

(BMS). Rotate the instrument 180 and flip the telescope to the Face-2 position. The display and tangent screws are turned away from you. Read the vertical angle from the VA2 field. Add the two vertical angles together, VA1 + VA2. No adjustment is required if the zero reference for vertical angles (VA zero setting) is set to Zenith, and VA1 + VA2 equals 360. No adjustment is required if the zero reference for vertical angles (VA zero setting) is set to Horizon, and VA1 + VA2 is either 180 or 540. An adjustment is required if VA1 + VA2 is not one of the values listed above. Note The difference between the vertical angle reading the relevant angle (either 360 for Zenith, or 180 or 540 for Horizon) is called the altitude constant. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 119 6 Checking and Adjusting Adjusting the calibration 1. 2. Press [MENU] and [7]. The calibration screen appears. The Focus 4 total station has two-axis level compensation. Take an F1 measurement to a target on the horizon. Press [ENT]. The calibration fields for F1 are:

VA1 HA1 X1 Y1 Face-1 vertical angle (tilt-off value) Face-1 horizontal angle (tilt-off value) Face-1 X-axis tilt value Face-1 Y-axis tilt value The vertical angle is shown in the V0 dir= Horiz setting. When you have taken the measurement, the message on the bottom line changes from DO NOT TOUCH! to Turn to F2. 3. Take an F2 measurement to the same target. Press [ENT]. The calibration values for F2 are:

VA2 HA2 X2 Y2 Face-2 vertical angle (tilt-off value) Face-2 horizontal angle (tilt-off value) Face-2 X-axis tilt value Face-2 Y-axis tilt value When the observation on F2 is completed, four parameters are displayed. 4. Do one of the following:

To return to the first observation screen, press [ESC] or select the Redo softkey. To set parameters on the instrument, press

[ENT] or select the OK softkey. 5. If ACV, ACH, or Tilt is out of range, OVER appears. Press any key to return to the first observation screen. 120 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Checking and Adjusting 6 The instrument constant The instrument constant is a numerical value used to automatically correct for the displacement between the mechanical and electrical centers when measuring distances. The instrument constant is set at the factory. However, to ensure the highest operational accuracy, we recommend that you check the instrument constant several times a year. The following figure shows the setup to check the instrument constant. P P About 100 m Q R Q To check the instrument constant:

1. 2. Set up the instrument at Point P, in as flat an area as possible. Set up a reflector prism at Point Q, 100 m away from Point P. Make sure that you take the prism constant into account. 3. Measure the distance between Point P and Point Q (PQ). 4. 5. 6. Install a reflector prism on the tripod at Point P. Set up another tripod at Point R, on the line between Point P and Point Q. Transfer the Focus 4 total station to the tripod at Point R. 7. Measure the distance from Point R to Point P (RP), and the distance from Point R to Point Q (RQ). 8. Calculate the difference between the value of PQ and the value of RP + RQ. 9. Move the Focus 4 total station to other points on the line between Point P and Point Q. 10. Repeat Step 5 through Step 9 several times (about ten times). 11. Calculate the average of all the differences. The error range is within 3 mm. If the error is out of range, contact your dealer. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 121 6 Checking and Adjusting Checking the laser pointer The Focus 4 total station uses a red laser beam to a laser pointer. The laser pointer is coaxial with the line of sight of the telescope. If the instrument is well adjusted, the red laser pointer coincides with the line of sight. External influences such as shock or large temperature fluctuations can displace the red laser pointer relative to the line of sight. 122 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide C H A P T E R 7 Transferring Coordinate Data 7 Transferring coordinate data to the total station Transferring coordinate data from the total station The Focus 4 uses lists of coordinate data. This chapter describes how to transfer data between the Focus 4 total station and the office computer. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 123 7 Transferring Coordinate Data Transferring coordinate data to the total station Settings To configure the transmission speed and other settings, press [MENU] and then select Settings / Comm. See also Communications, page 99. Record format You can transfer coordinate records to the Focus 4 total station in the following formats:

PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT

, X X X X X X X X

, CD CD

, Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Z Z Z Z

, CD

, CD

, CD

, Z Z 124 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Transferring Coordinate Data 7 The formats use the following codes:

Code PT X Y Z CD Description Point number Actual X coordinate Actual Y coordinate Actual Z coordinate Feature code Length Up to 20 digits Variable length Variable length Variable length Up to 16 characters Data example 20100,6606.165,1639.383,30.762,RKBSS 20104,1165611.6800,116401.4200,00032.8080 20105 5967.677 1102.343 34.353 MANHOLE 20106 4567.889 2340.665 33.444 PT1 20107 5967.677 1102.343 34.353 20109,4657.778,2335.667,,PT2 20111,4657.778,2335.667 20113 4657.778 2335.667 20115,,,34.353,MANHOLE 20117,,,33.444 Transferring coordinate data from the total station Settings To configure the transmission speed and other settings, press [MENU] and then select Settings / Comm. See also Communications, page 99. Data examples Nikon coordinate data format 1,100.0000,200.0000,10.0000, 2,200.0000,300.0000,20.0000, 3,116.9239,216.9140,11.8425,TRAIN PLATFORM 4,126.6967,206.2596,11.2539,RAMP 11,100.0045,199.9958,10,0000, 13,116.9203,216.9113,11.7157, 14,126.6955,206.2579,10.9908, 21,100.0103,199.9958,10.0000, 31,100.0013,200.0005,10.0000, 41,100.0224,200.0331,9.9000, 43,116.9263,216,9165,11.8016,CURB 44,126.7042,206.2871,10.8193,DITCH 45,116.9266,216.9160,11.8028, 46,126.7046,206.2845,10.8213,CP POINT Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 125 7 Transferring Coordinate Data 126 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide A P P E N D I X A A This appendix details the specifications and standard components of the Focus 4 total station. It also describes the connector that is used to connect the instrument to an external power source or to communicate with an external device. Specifications In this chapter:

Main body Standard components External device connector Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 127 A Specifications Main body Telescope Tube length Magnification Effective diameter of objective Image Field of view Resolving power Focusing distance 125 mm (4.91 inch) 30 45 mm (1.77 inch) EDM 50 mm (1.97 inch) Erect 120'

2.3 m at 100 m (2.3 ft at 100 ft) 3.0"

1.5 m to infinity (59 inch to infinity) Measurement range Distances shorter than 1.5 m (4.92 ft) cannot be measured with this EDM. Measurement range with no haze, visibility over 40 km (25 miles) Prism mode Reflector sheet (5 cm x 5 cm) Standard prism (1P) 300 m (984 ft) 5,000 m (16,400 ft) Reflectorless mode Reference target 300 m (984 ft) Notes The target should not receive direct sunlight. Reference target refers to a white, highly reflective material (KGC 90%). In reflectorless mode, the maximum measurement range is 500 m (1,640 feet). 128 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Specifications A Distance measurement precision Precise mode Prism mode Reflectorless mode

(3 + 2 ppm D) mm 10 C through +40 C (+14 F through +104 F)

(3 + 3 ppm D) mm 20 C through 10 C, +40 C through +50 C

(4 F through +14 F, +104 F through +122 F)

(3 + 2 ppm D) mm 10 C through +40 C (+14 F through +104 F)

(3 + 3 ppm D) mm 20 C to 10 C, +40 C through +50 C

(4 F through +14 F), (+104 F through +122 F) Normal mode Prism mode Reflectorless mode

(10 + 5 ppm D) mm

(10 + 5 ppm D) mm Measurement intervals Measurement intervals may vary with the measuring distance or weather conditions;

At the initial measurement, it may take a few more seconds. Precise mode Prism mode Reflectorless mode Normal mode Prism mode Reflectorless mode Prism offset correction Angle measurement Reading system 1.5 sec. 1.8 sec. 0.8 sec. 1.0 sec. 999 mm to +999 mm (1 mm step) Absolute encoder Diameterial reading on HA Single reading on VA Minimum display increment 360 400G MIL6400 DIN18723 accuracy 1"/5"/10"

0.2 mgon / 1 mgon / 2 mgon 0.005 mil / 0.02 mil / 0.05 mil 5"/ 1.5 mgon Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 129 A Specifications Tilt sensor Method Compensation range Liquid-electric detection (dual axis) 3 Tangent screws Type Friction clutch endless fine motion Tribrach Type Level Detachable Electronic level Circular level vial Displayed on the LCD Sensitivity 10' / 2 mm Optical plummet Image Magnification Field of view Focussing range Erect 3x 5 0.5 m (1.6 ft) to infinity Optical laser plummet (option) Wave length Laser class Focusing range Laser diameter 635 nm Class 2 8 Approximately 2 mm Display and keypad Display type Resolution Display illumination Keys Graphical LCD 128 64 Backlight 25 130 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Specifications A Connections in the base of instrument Communications Type Maximum baud rate External power supply input voltage Battery pack RS-232C 38400 bps asynchronous 4.5 V through 5.2 V DC Output voltage Continuous operation time Continuous distance/angle measurement Distance/angle measurement every 30 seconds Continuous angle measurement 3.8 V DC rechargeable 10 hours 16 hours 30 hours Note Tested at 25 C (77 F) (normal temperature). Operation times may vary depending on the condition and deterioration of the battery. Environmental performance Operating temperature range Storage temperature range 20 C through +50 C

(4 F through +122 F) 25 C through +60 C

(13 F through +140 F) Dimensions Main unit Carry case Weight 149 mm W x 145 mm D x 306 mm H

(5.87 inch W x 5.7 inch D x 12.0 inch H) 435 mm W x 206 mm D x 297 mm

(17.1 inch W x 8.1 inch D x 11.7 inch H) Main unit (without battery) Battery Carry case Charger and AC adaptor Approximately 3.5 kg (7.7 lbs) Approximately 0.1 kg (0.22 lbs) Approximately 2.4 kg (5.3 lbs) Approximately 0.4 kg (0.88 lbs) Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 131 A Specifications Environmental protection Watertight/dust-proof protection IP66 Standard components Instrument main body Battery pack (x 2) Universal Charger, power cord, and adaptors Adjustment pin, Allen wrench Vinyl cover The Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide (this document) Carry case External device connector This connector can be used to connect to an external power source or to communicate with an external device. Before using the external device connector, make sure that the external device meets the specifications below. Input voltage System Signal level Maximum baud rate Compatible male connector 4.5 V DC to 5.2 V DC RS-232C 9 V standard 38400 bps asynchronous Hirose HR10A-7P-6P or HR10-7P-6P C CAUTION Except when connected as shown in the System diagram, page 18, use of the Hirose HR10A-7P-6P or HR10-7P-6P is at your own risk. C CAUTION Use only the male connectors specified above. Using other connectors will damage the instrument. 132 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide The external device connector is a Hirose HR 10A-7R-6S female connector. The pinouts for connecting the Focus 4 to an external device connector are shown below:

Specifications A Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal RxD TxD NC V GND NC Description Receive data (Input) Send data (Output) No connection Power Ground No connection 6 4 5 HRS 1 3 2 C CAUTION Only use the pin connections shown above. Using other connections will damage the instrument. C CAUTION The Focus 4 total station has different pin assignments from other Spectra Precision total stations. To connect to an external power source, supply power to Pin 4 (power terminal) and Pin 5 (ground terminal) on the instrument. The instrument will use the external power source even if the internal battery packs is attached. C CAUTION Make sure that the power supplied is within the rated input range (4.5 V to 5.2 V, 1 A maximum). Power supplied outside this range will damage the instrument. To communicate with an external device, connect the RS-232C signal from the external device to Pin 1 (input terminal) and to Pin 2 (output terminal) on the Focus 4. Cap the data output/external power input connector securely when the Focus 4 is not in use. The instrument is not watertight if the cap is detached or not attached securely, or when the data output/external power input connector is in use. The Focus 4 can be damaged by static electricity from the human body discharged through the data output/external power input connector. Before handling the instrument, touch any other conductive material once to remove static electricity. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 133 A Specifications 134 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide A P P E N D I X B B The appendix describes the error messages that may appear when you use the Focus 4 total station. Error Messages In this chapter:

Cogo Communications Data Job manager Stakeout Programs Recording data Searching Settings Station setup System error Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 135 B Error Messages Cogo NO Result The system was unable to calculate an area because points were not entered in the correct order. Press any key to return to the Cogo menu. Then enter the points in the correct order. Same Coordinate The point or coordinate that you entered is identical to the previous input point. Press any key to return to the point input screen. Then use a different point. XY-coordinate is required The input point does not have XY (NE) coordinates. Press any key to return to the point input screen. Then enter a point that has X and Y coordinates. Communications If an error is detected while data is being transferred to the Focus 4 total station, the Focus 4 total station stops the transfer and displays one of the following messages:

Check Data There are errors in the data that is being transferred to the Focus 4 total station, such as an alphabetic character in a coordinate field. Press any key. Then check the specified line in the data. DUPLICATE PT C CAUTION If the existing point is a UP, CC, or MP record, and the point is not referred to by ST or BS, the existing point will be overwritten by the uploaded record. No error message appears. The uploaded data contains a duplicate PT. Press any button. Then check the specified point in the data. PT MAX20 chars The uploaded data contains a PT with a name or number that is longer than 20 digits. Press any button. Then check the specified line in the data. XYZ OVERRANGE The uploaded data contains a coordinate that is longer than 13 digits. Press any button. Then check the specified line in the data. 136 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Error Messages B Data Can't Edit Current ST You have tried to edit the current ST. You cannot edit the current ST. Note Old ST records can be edited, but no recalculation can be performed on the instrument. Press any key to return to the code/layer name input screen. Can't Edit ST/BS refer to this PT You have tried to edit a coordinate that the current ST or BS refers to. You cannot change a coordinate if the current ST or BS refers to it. Press any key to return to the Data view screen. Can't Edit XYZ from measurement You have tried to change the coordinates of an SO, SS, or CP record. You cannot change the coordinates of these records. Press any button to return to the previous screen. DELETE Stn-XYZ You have tried to delete a coordinate record that the current ST or BS refers to. You must confirm that you want to delete this record. To... delete XYZ return to the previous screen without deleting XYZ Press... the DEL softkey

[ESC] or the Abrt softkey Job manager Cannot Assign You have tried to set the current job as the control file. Press any button to return to the previous screen. Then select a different job. Can't Create There is no space available to create a job or record a point. Press any button to return to the Job Manager. Then select the DEL softkey to delete old jobs. Existing Job You have entered an existing job name for a new job. Press any button and then change the name for the new job. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 137 B Error Messages MAX 32Jobs You are trying to create a new job when the maximum number of jobs (32) is already stored. Press any button to return to the Job Manager. Then select the DEL softkey to delete old jobs. Stakeout Input Error The point name style used in the Fr field is not the same as the style used in the To field. For example, the Fr field style is 1, and the To field style is A200. Press any button to return to the Fr/To input screen. Then re-enter the point name, using the same naming style in both fields. NO Stn Setup You did not perform a station setup or BS check before entering the Stakeout function. To... go to the Stn Setup menu return to the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) go to the Stakeout menu Press...

[2] or select Stn Setup

[ESC]

[1] or select Continue C CAUTION Selecting Continue does not resume the last ST record. You should only use the Continue option if you are sure that the previous ST coordinates and the current HA orientation are correct. Otherwise, records in the Stakeout function may not be correct. 138 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Error Messages B Programs NO Stn Setup C CAUTION Selecting Continue does not resume the last ST record. You should only use the Continue option if you are sure that the previous ST coordinates and the current HA orientation are correct. Otherwise, records in the Programs function may not be correct. You did not perform a station setup or BS check before entering the Programs function. To... go to the Stn Setup menu return to the BMS go to the Programs menu Press...

[2] or select Stn Setup

[ESC]

[1] or select Continue Recording data DATA FULL The data storage is full. Press any button to return to the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS). Then:

To... delete unnecessary data delete jobs DUPLICATE PT Press...

[MENU] and select Data

[MENU] and select Job The input PT you are trying to record already exists in the current job. An existing coordinate record cannot be overwritten by measured data. Press any button to return to the point input screen. Change the setting in the PT field. Duplicate PT The input PT you are trying to record already exists in the current job as an SS, SO, or CP record. An existing SS, SO, or CP record can be overwritten by measured data. To... return to the PT input screen record RAW data and update XYZ data record RAW data only Press...

[ESC] or the Abrt softkey the XYZ softkey the RAW softkey Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 139 B Error Messages No Open Job No job is open. To... open the job list, if there are existing jobs create a new job return to the previous screen Press...

[1] or select Select job

[2] or select Create job

[ESC]

NO Stn Setup There is no station record in the current job, or a station setup or BS check has not been done since the program was rebooted. To... continue recording go to the Stn Setup menu return to the previous screen OVER RANGE Press...

[1] or select Continue. If there is already an ST record in the job, the message CO, Use current orientation appears.

[2] or select STN Setup

[ESC]

You are trying to record a coordinate with more than 13 digits. Press any button to return to the previous screen. Then check the setting for the current ST coordinate. Searching PT Not Found There is no point that matches the criteria entered. Press any button to return to the point input screen. This message may appear in any function where the PT/CD is input, such as Station Setup or Stakeout. 140 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Settings Error Messages B Job Settings will be changed You have changed one or more of the following job settings:

VA zero or HA in the Angle screen (see Angle, page 96) Scale, T-P, Sea Lvl, or C&R in the Distance screen (see Distance, page 96) Coord or Az Zero in the Coordinates screen (see Coordinate, page 99) Angle, Dist, Temp, or Press in the Unit screen (see Unit, page 99) To... discard the changes to the job settings close the current job and save the changes to the job settings Press...

[ESC] or the Abrt softkey. The current job remains open.

[ENT] or the OK softkey. Note To record a point using the new settings, create a new job using the new settings. Station setup Same Coordinate The input PT or coordinate is identical to the current station in STN/2:Known, or the same coordinate or point name/number is found in Resection. Press any button to return to the PT input screen. Then use a different PT. Space LOW There is not enough space to record a station when you start any of the Station Setup functions. To... return to the BMS continue Press... press [ESC] or select the Abrt softkey. Select the DEL softkey in Job Manager to delete old jobs. press [ENT] or select the OK softkey. You may not be able to record the whole process. XY-coordinate is required The input point for ST/BS does not have N/E coordinates. Press any button to return to the PT input screen. Then use a PT that has N/E coordinates. Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide 141 B Error Messages Z-coordinate is required The input point for Benchmark does not have a Z coordinate. Press any button to return to the PT input screen. Then use a PT that has a Z coordinate. See page 68. System error

=SYSTEM ERROR=

The system has detected an internal error that is related to the lower-level system. Press any key to turn the instrument off. The system will reboot when this error is reported. If you still have more points to shoot in the site, turn the instrument on and repeat the open a job and station setup procedures. Data stored before this error will be kept safely in the Job file. If the error appears frequently, please contact your dealer or Trimble Support and report the message that appears below the =SYSTEM ERROR= line. 142 Spectra Precision Focus 4 Total Station User Guide Spectra preciSion 10355 Westmoor Drive, Suite #100 Westminster, CO 80021 USA

+1-720-587-4700 Phone 888-477-7516 (Toll Free in USA) www.spectraprecision.com

Total Station Nivo Series Nivo3.M and Nivo5.M Instruction Manual Version A 1.0.0 Part Number C231E February 2009 www.trimble.com Contact Information Trimble Navigation Limited Engineering and Construction Division 5475 Kellenburger Road Dayton, Ohio 45424-1099 USA 800-538-7800 (toll free in USA)

+1-937-245-5600 Phone

+1-937-233-9004 Fax www.trimble.com Legal Notices Copyright and Trademarks 2007-2008, Nikon-Trimble Co. Limited. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. It is prohibited to alter this manual in part or whole without express permission. The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice. Although every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this manual, please contact your dealer if you find anything in it that is incorrect or unclear. Release Notice This is the February 2009 (Revision A) release of the Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual. It applies to software release version 1.0.0 for the Total Station Nivo series. Manufacturer Nikon-Trimble Co., Ltd. Technoport Mituiseimei Bldg. 16-2, Minamikamata 2-chome, Ota-ku Tokyo 144-0035 Japan Notices USA FCC 15B Class B satisfied. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. C Warning This equipment has been certified to comply with the limits for a Class B personal computer and peripherals, pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. Only peripherals (computer input/output devices, terminals, printers, etc.) certified to comply with the Class B limits may be attached to this equipment. Operation with non-certified personal computer and/or peripherals is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception. The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC Certification of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits established by the FCC for this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. European Union EU EMC Directive satisfied. Authorized Representative in Europe Trimble GmbH Am Prime Parc 11 65479 Raunheim, Germany Canada This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numrique de la Class B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Taiwan Battery Recycling Requirements The product contains a removable battery. Taiwanese regulations require that waste batteries are recycled. Notice to Our European Union Customers For product recycling instructions and more information, please go to:

www.trimble.com/environment/summary.html Recycling in Europe To recycle Trimble WEEE, call: +31 497 53 2430, and ask for the WEEE associate, or mail a request for recycling instructions to:

Trimble Europe BV c/o Menlo Worldwide Logistics Meerheide 45 5521 DZ Eersel, NL For optional Bluetooth unit USA FCC Part 15 Subpart/RSS-210, OET bulletin 65 supplement C satisfied C Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canada RSS-210 Low Power Device Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. European Union countries, Iceland, Norway, Liechtenstein, Turkey, Swiss EN300 328v1.7.1, EN50360 satisfied Hereby, Nikon-Trimble Co., Ltd., declares that this instrument is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Declaration of Conformity available at http://www.nikon-trimble.com/

RF exposure compliance 1) To comply with FCC/IC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. 2) This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Safety In this chapter:

Introduction

Warnings and Cautions

Laser Safety 1 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual iii Safety Introduction For your safety, read this instruction manual carefully and thoroughly before using the Total Station Nivo series. Although Nikon products are designed for maximum safety, using them incorrectly or disregarding the instructions can cause personal injury or property damage. You should also read the documentation for any other equipment that you use with a Nivo series instrument. Note Always keep the manual near the instrument for easy reference. Warnings and Cautions The following conventions are used to indicate safety instructions:

C WARNING Warnings alert you to situations that could cause death or serious injury. C CAUTION Cautions alert you to situations that could cause injury or property damage. Always read and follow the instructions carefully. Warnings Before using the instrument, read the following warnings and follow the instructions that they provide:

C WARNING Never look at the sun through the telescope. If you do, you may damage or lose your eyesight. C WARNING Nivo series instruments are not designed to be explosion-proof. Do not use the instrument in coal mines, in areas contaminated with coal dust, or near other flammable substances. C WARNING Never disassemble, modify, or repair the instrument yourself. If you do, you may receive electric shocks or burns, or the instrument may catch fire. You may also impair the accuracy of the instrument. C WARNING Use only the battery charger and AC adapter that are supplied with the instrument. Do not use any other charger or you may cause the battery pack to catch fire or rupture. iv Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Safety C WARNING Do not cover the battery charger and AC adapter while the battery pack is being recharged. The charger must be able to dissipate heat adequately. Coverings such as blankets or clothing can cause the charger to overheat. C WARNING Avoid recharging the battery pack in humid or dusty places, in direct sunlight, or near heat sources. Do not recharge the battery pack when it is wet. If you do, you may receive electric shocks or burns, or the battery pack may overheat or catch fire. C WARNING Although the battery pack has an auto-reset circuit breaker, you should take care not to short circuit the contacts. Short circuits can cause the battery pack to catch fire or burn you. C WARNING Never burn or heat the battery. Doing so may cause the battery to leak or rupture. A leaking or ruptured battery can cause serious injury. C WARNING Before storing the battery pack or battery charger, cover the contact points with insulation tape. If you do not cover the contact points, the battery pack or charger may short circuit, causing fire, burns, or damage to the instrument. C WARNING The battery is not itself waterproof. Do not get the battery wet when it is removed from the instrument. If water seeps into the battery, it may cause a fire or burns. Cautions Before using the instrument, read the following cautions and follow the instructions that they provide:

C CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. C CAUTION The tops of the tripod ferrules are very sharp. When handling or carrying the tripod, take care to avoid injuring yourself on the ferrules. C CAUTION Before carrying the tripod or the instrument in the carrying case, check the shoulder strap and its clasp. If the strap is damaged or the clasp is not securely fastened, the carrying case may fall, causing personal injury or instrument damage. C CAUTION Before setting up the tripod, make sure that no-ones hands or feet are underneath it. When the legs of the tripod are being driven into the ground, they could pierce hands or feet. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual v Safety C CAUTION After mounting the instrument on the tripod, securely fasten the thumb screws on the tripod legs. If the thumb screws are not securely fastened, the tripod may collapse, causing personal injury or instrument damage. C CAUTION After mounting the instrument on the tripod, securely fasten the clamp screw on the tripod. If the clamp screw is not securely fastened, the instrument may fall off the tripod, causing personal injury or instrument damage. C CAUTION Securely fasten the tribrach clamp knob. If the knob is not securely fastened, the tribrach may come loose or fall off when you lift the instrument, causing personal injury or instrument damage. C CAUTION Do not stack objects on the plastic carrying case, or use it as a stool. The plastic carrying case is unstable and its surface is slippery. Stacking or sitting on the plastic carrying case may cause personal injury or instrument damage. C CAUTION The system in the instrument may stop functioning in order to avoid any errors in measurement when the instrument detects strong electromagnetic wave(s). If this is the case, turn off the instrument and remove the source of the electromagnetic wave(s). Then turn on the instrument to resume the work. Rechargeable Lithium-ion (Li-ion) batteries C WARNING Do not damage the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery. A damaged battery can cause an explosion or fire, and can result in personal injury and/or property damage. To prevent injury or damage:

Do not use or charge the battery if it appears to be damaged. Signs of damage include, but are not limited to, discoloration, warping, and leaking battery fluid. Do not expose the battery to fire, high temperature, or direct sunlight. Do not immerse the battery in water. Do not use or store the battery inside a vehicle during hot weather. Do not drop or puncture the battery. Do not open the battery or short-circuit its contacts. C WARNING Avoid contact with the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery if it appears to be leaking. Battery fluid is corrosive, and contact with it can result in personal injury and/or property damage. To prevent injury or damage:

If the battery leaks, avoid contact with the battery fluid. If battery fluid gets into your eyes, immediately rinse your eyes with clean water and seek medical attention. Do not rub your eyes!

If battery fluid gets onto your skin or clothing, immediately use clean water to wash off the battery fluid. vi Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Safety C WARNING Charge and use the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery only in strict accordance with the instructions. Charging or using the battery in unauthorized equipment can cause an explosion or fire, and can result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. To prevent injury or damage:

Do not charge or use the battery if it appears to be damaged or leaking. Charge the Lithium-ion battery only in a product that is specified to charge it. Be sure to follow all instructions that are provided with the battery charger. Discontinue charging a battery that gives off extreme heat or a burning odor. Use the battery only in equipment that is specified to use it. Use the battery only for its intended use and according to the instructions in the product documentation. Laser Safety The Nivo series is a Class 2 laser instrument. Nivo Series is a Class 2 Laser Product in accordance with: IEC60825-1, Am2 (2001):

Safety of Laser Products Precautions: To counteract hazards, it is essential for all users to pay careful attention to the safety precautions and control measures specified in the standard IEC60825-1

(2001-08) resp. EN60825-1:1994 + A11:1996 + A2:2001, within the hazard distance *); particularly on to Users Guide. C WARNING Only qualified and trained persons should be assigned to install, adjust and operate the laser equipment. C WARNING Precautions should be taken to ensure that persons do not look directly, with or without an optical instrument, into the beam. C WARNING Laser beam path should be located well above or below eye level wherever practicable. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual vii Safety Specifications for laser emission Table 1.1 Laser pointer Wave length Output power Disatance meter 630-680 nm CW Po 1 mW Wave length Output power Pulse width 850-890 nm Pulse Po 6.4 W

< 5 ns Laser plummet (Option) Wave length Output power 635 nm CW Po < 1.0 mW Table 1.2 E.U. USA Conforming standards EN60825-1/Am.2 : 2001 (IEC60825-1/Am.2 : 2001) Laser Pointer: Class 2 Distance Meter: Class 1 Laser plummet: Class 2 (Option) FDA21CFR Part 1040 Sec.1040.10 and 1040.11

(except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No.50, dated June 24, 2007) Laser pointer Laser plummet (Option) viii Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Contents 1 2 3 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Rechargeable Lithium-ion (Li-ion) batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Laser Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Parts of the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Unpacking and Packing the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Charging the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Detaching and Re-Attaching the Battery Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Setting Up the Tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Centering using the optical plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Centering using the laser plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Centering using a plumb bob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Sighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Setting the Measurement Mode and Preparing the Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Measurement with a prism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Measurement in Reflectorless mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Preparing the Reflector Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting Up the Prism Reflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Adjusting the height of the tribrach adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Changing the direction of the prism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Setting the prism constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Setting the position of the target plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Turning the Instrument On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Turning on the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Turning off the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Changing Regional Configuration Pre-sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Display and Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 LCD backlight, Laser pointer, Beep sound and Contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 30

[DSP] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

[MODE] key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

[COD] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

[HOT] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual ix Contents 4 Bubble indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Laser plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

[USR] keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

[DAT] key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 List Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Inputting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Entering a point name or number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Entering a code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Advanced feature: Searching for a code by using the first character . . . . .44 Entering values in feet and inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Creating a new job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Measuring Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Sighting a prism reflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Measuring distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Measurement settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 HA Reset and Angle Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Setting the horizontal angle to 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Entering the horizontal angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Recording a foresight point after repeat angle measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Horizontal angle hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Station Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Setting up a station with known coordinates or azimuth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Setting up a station using multiple point resection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Advanced feature: Viewing and deleting a measurement in resection . . . . .59 Setting up the station quickly without coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Determining station elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Checking and resetting the backsight direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Two-point resection along a known line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Stakeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Specifying the stakeout point by angle and distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Specifying the stakeout point by coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Advanced feature: Specifying a stakeout list by range input . . . . . . . . 68 DivLine S-O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 RefLine S-O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Program Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Measuring distance and offset values along a specified line . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Measuring distance and offset values on the arc-curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Remote distance measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Measuring remote elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Measuring distance and offset values on the vertical plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Measuring distance and offset values on the slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Recording Measurement Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Recording data from any observation screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Outputting data to the COM port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Measuring Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 x Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 5 Contents Measuring taped offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Measuring angle offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Two-prism pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Extending a line by horizontal angle offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Entering a horizontal distance after an angle-only shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Calculating a corner point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Measuring circle offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Extending the slope distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Menu Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Job Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Opening an existing job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Creating a new job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Deleting a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Setting the control job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Displaying job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Cogo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Calculating angle and distance between two coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Calculating and manually inputting coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Calculating area and perimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Advanced feature: Entering a range of points . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Calculating coordinates from line and offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Calculating coordinates using intersection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Advanced feature: Entering angle and distance offsets . . . . . . . . . 107 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Power saving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Stakeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Others settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Viewing records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Deleting records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Editing records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Searching records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Entering coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Point name list and code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Downloading data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Uploading coordinate data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Advanced feature: Editing the data order for upload . . . . . . . . . . 130 Uploading a point name list or code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 1sec-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual xi Contents

[MSR] key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

[DSP] key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

[USR] key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

[S-O] key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

[DAT] key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Checking and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Adjusting the Electronic Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Checking and Adjusting the Circular Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Checking and Adjusting the Optical/Laser Plummet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Zero Point Errors of Vertical Scale and Horizontal Angle Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Checking the Instrument Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Checking the Laser Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Main Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Measurement range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Distance precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Measurement intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Angle measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Tilt sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Tangent screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Tribrach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Optical plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Optional laser plummet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Display and keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Connections in the base of instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Environmental performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Standard Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 External Device Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 System Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Uploading Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Record format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Uploading Point Lists and Code Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 6 7 8 9 xii Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Contents 10 File format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Data example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Downloading Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Nikon raw record formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 SDR2x and SDR33 record formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Data examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Cogo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Job Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Recording Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Stakeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Station Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 System Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual xiii Contents xiv Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual C H A P T E R1 1 Introduction In this chapter:

Welcome

Parts of the Instrument

Maintenance Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 1 1 Introduction Welcome Thank you for purchasing this Nikon product. This instruction manual was written for the users of Total Station Nivo series instruments. Before you operate a Nivo series instrument, read this manual carefully. In particular, pay attention to the warnings and cautions that appear in the Safety section at the front of the manual. Before you begin, you should also read the maintenance instructions. For more information, see Maintenance, page 5. 2 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Parts of the Instrument Figure 1.1 and Figure 1.2 show the main parts of the Nivo series instrument. Introduction 1 Carrying handle Optical sight

(Finder) Telescope focusing ring Telescope eyepiece Diopter ring Reticle plate cover Face-1 display /

keyboard The label shown below is attached to the underside of the keyboard. Horizontal axis indication mark Vertical tangent screw Battery box Battery box release knob Upper plate tangent screw The Laser Safety Label shown below is attached to the underside of the keyboard Tribrach clamp knob Figure 1.1 Total Station Nivo series Face-1 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 3 1 Introduction The Laser Safety label shown below is attached to the telescope. Objective LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED FROM THIS PART. Optical or optional laser plummet

(This picture shows the optical plummet.) Circular level Leveling screw Tribrach Figure 1.2 Total Station Nivo series Face-2 4 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual The Laser Safety label shown below is attached to the telescope. Horizontal axis indication mark Battery box Battery box release knob Data output /

external power input connector Input voltage shall be 4.5-5.2 V DC The Laser Safety label shown below will be attached here (underside) when the optional laser plummet is used. Maintenance Introduction 1 Before using the instrument, read and follow the following maintenance instructions:

Do not leave the instrument in direct sunlight or in a closed vehicle for prolonged periods. Overheating the instrument may reduce its efficiency. If the Nivo series instrument has been used in wet conditions, immediately wipe off any moisture and dry the instrument completely before returning the instrument to the carrying case. The instrument contains sensitive electronic assemblies which have been well protected against dust and moisture. However, if dust or moisture gets into the instrument, severe damage could result. Sudden changes in temperature may cloud the lenses and drastically reduce the measurable distance, or cause an electrical system failure. If there has been a sudden change in temperature, leave the instrument in a closed carrying case in a warm location until the temperature of the instrument returns to room temperature. Do not store the Nivo series instrument in hot or humid locations. In particular, you must store the battery pack in a dry location at a temperature of less than 30 C (86 F). High temperature or excessive humidity can cause mold to grow on the lenses. It can also cause the electronic assemblies to deteriorate, and so lead to instrument failure. Store the battery pack with the battery discharged. When storing the instrument in areas subject to extremely low temperatures, leave the carrying case open. When adjusting the leveling screws, stay as close as possible to the center of each screws range. The center is indicated by a line on the screw. If the tribrach will not be used for an extended period, lock down the tribrach clamp knob and tighten its safety screw. Do not use organic solvents (such as ether or paint thinner) to clean the non-metallic parts of the instrument (such as the keyboard) or the painted or printed surfaces. Doing so could result in discoloration of the surface, or in peeling of printed characters. Clean these parts only with a soft cloth or a tissue, lightly moistened with water or a mild detergent. To clean the optical lenses, lightly wipe them with a soft cloth or a lens tissue that is moistened with alcohol. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 5 1 Introduction Reticle plate cover The reticle plate cover has been correctly mounted. Do not release it or subject it to excessive force to make it watertight. Before attaching the battery pack, check that the contact surfaces on the battery and instrument are clean. Securely press the cap that covers the data output/external power input connector terminal. The instrument is not watertight if the cap is not attached securely, or when the data output/external power input connector is used. The carrying case is designed to be watertight, but you should not leave it exposed to rain for an extended period. If exposure to rain is unavoidable, make sure that the carrying case is placed with the Nikon nameplate facing upward. The battery pack contains a Lithium-ion battery. When disposing of the battery pack, follow the laws or rules of your municipal waste system. The instrument can be damaged by static electricity from the human body discharged through the data output/external power input connector. Before handling the instrument, touch any other conductive material once to remove static electricity. Be careful not to pinch your finger between the telescope and trunnion of the instrument. 6 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual

C H A P T E R2 2 Preparation In this chapter:

Unpacking and Packing the Instrument

Charging the Battery Pack

Detaching and Re-Attaching the Battery Pack

Setting Up the Tripod

Centering

Leveling

Sighting

Setting the Measurement Mode and Preparing the Target

Measurement in Reflectorless mode

Preparing the Reflector Sheet

Setting Up the Prism Reflector Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 7 2 Preparation Unpacking and Packing the Instrument Note Handle the Nivo series instrument gently to protect it from shocks and excessive vibration. Unpacking To unpack the instrument, grip the carrying handle and gently remove the instrument from the carrying case. Packing To pack the instrument back into the carrying case, please refer to the figure on the right. Charging the Battery Pack Before charging the battery pack, read the warnings (also listed in the Safety section at the front of this manual) and the following notes. C WARNING Do not damage the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery. A damaged battery can cause an explosion or fire, and can result in personal injury and/or property damage. To prevent injury or damage:

Do not use or charge the battery if it appears to be damaged. Signs of damage include, but are not limited to, discoloration, warping, and leaking battery fluid. Do not expose the battery to fire, high temperature, or direct sunlight. Do not immerse the battery in water. Do not use or store the battery inside a vehicle during hot weather. Do not drop or puncture the battery. Do not open the battery or short-circuit its contacts. C WARNING Avoid contact with the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery if it appears to be leaking. Battery fluid is corrosive, and contact with it can result in personal injury and/or property damage. To prevent injury or damage:

If the battery leaks, avoid contact with the battery fluid. If battery fluid gets into your eyes, immediately rinse your eyes with clean water and seek medical attention. Do not rub your eyes!

If battery fluid gets onto your skin or clothing, immediately use clean water to wash off the battery fluid. 8 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Preparation 2 C WARNING Charge and use the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery only in strict accordance with the instructions. Charging or using the battery in unauthorized equipment can cause an explosion or fire, and can result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. To prevent injury or damage:

Do not charge or use the battery if it appears to be damaged or leaking. Charge the Lithium-ion battery only in a product that is specified to charge it. Be sure to follow all instructions that are provided with the battery charger. Discontinue charging a battery that gives off extreme heat or a burning odor. Use the battery only in equipment that is specified to use it. Use the battery only for its intended use and according to the instructions in the product documentation. C WARNING To charge the battery pack, use only the battery charger and AC adapter that are supplied with the instrument. Do NOT use any other charger or you may cause the battery pack to catch fire or rupture. The enclosed battery pack cannot be used with other chargers. C WARNING Do not cover the battery charger and AC adapter while the battery pack is being recharged. The charger must be able to dissipate heat adequately. Coverings such as blankets or clothing can cause the charger to overheat. C WARNING Avoid recharging the battery pack in humid or dusty places, in direct sunlight, or near heat sources. Do not recharge the battery pack when it is wet. If you do, you may receive electric shocks or burns, or the battery pack may overheat or catch fire. C WARNING Although the battery pack has an auto-reset circuit breaker, you should take care not to short circuit the contacts. Short circuits can cause the battery pack to catch fire or burn you. C WARNING Never burn or heat the battery. Doing so may cause the battery to leak or rupture. A leaking or ruptured battery can cause serious injury. C WARNING Before storing the battery pack or battery charger, cover the contact points with insulation tape. If you do not cover the contact points, the battery pack or charger may short circuit, causing fire, burns, or damage to the instrument. C WARNING The battery is not itself waterproof. Do not get the battery wet when it is removed from the instrument. If water seeps into the battery, it may cause a fire or burns. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 9 2 Preparation Power jack This will read 5V, 4A Case Top edge Charge indicator 0 Calibration indicator 0 Calibration button Calibration indicator 1 Charge indicator 1 Battery Slot 0 Battery Slot 1 Applying Power Plug in the charger to the supplied AC adapter to turn the unit on. The power input must be 5 V with at least 4 A of current capability. Each battery may take up to 2 A while charging. Charging a battery Simply slide a battery into either battery slot to begin charging. The adjacent charge indicator will illuminate yellow when charging is in progress. The charge indicator will change to green when charging is complete. Charger slots are completely independent so a battery may be inserted regardless of the state of the other battery slot. Charging may take 2-4 hours if the battery was normally discharged. Charging may take up to 5 hours with a completely drained battery which has been stored for several months without use. 10 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Preparation 2 Conditioning / calibrating a battery Battery calibration is necessary about once every 6 months or more often if desired. Calibration insures the reported battery charge remaining is accurate. Hold down the calibration button on the unit and then insert a battery while holding the calibration button to begin a battery calibration. Only the battery which was inserted while the button was depressed will begin calibration. During a battery calibration the battery will be charged, discharged completely, and then recharged before finishing. Calibration should complete in roughly 17 hours and the charger vents should not be covered during a calibration cycle. The blue calibration indicator light(s) will blink slowly (on 1.5 sec, off 2 sec) while a calibration is in progress and the charge light(s) may be on or off during the calibration cycle. When a calibration cycle is completed, the calibration light will stop blinking remain on until the corresponding battery is removed. If the case temperature begins to get too warm while discharging a battery, the calibration light blink will blink on for 0.5 sec then off for 3 seconds and the battery load will be cut in half to prevent further overheating. Battery calibration will take longer to finish if this occurs. When the case temperature drops to a safer level battery discharging will return to normal. If the case temperature continues to get too hot internally, blinking will become more rapid and eventually the calibration will be aborted. If an abort occurs, the calibration light(s) will blink rapidly and battery charging will be re-

enabled. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 11 2 Preparation Detaching and Re-Attaching the Battery Pack Detaching the battery pack C CAUTION Avoid touching the contacts on the battery pack. If the instrument is turned on, press [PWR] to turn it off. 1. 2. Turn the battery box release knob counterclockwise, open the battery box cover and remove the battery pack from the battery box. Inserting the battery pack Before inserting the battery pack, clear any dust or other foreign particles from the battery contacts. 2 1 3 1. Turn the battery box release knob counterclockwise and open the battery box 2. cover. Put the battery pack into the battery box. Insert the battery pack with the connectors bottom first, facing inside. 3. Close the battery box cover and turn the knob clockwise until the secure click sound is heard. C CAUTION If the battery box cover is not closed, this could adversely affect the watertightness of the instrument. 12 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Setting Up the Tripod C CAUTION The tops of the tripod ferrules are very sharp. When handling or carrying the tripod, take care to avoid injuring yourself on the ferrules. Preparation 2 1. Open the tripod legs enough to for the instrument to be stable. 2. Locate the tripod directly over the station point. To check the tripods position, look through the center hole in the tripod head. Firmly press the tripod ferrules into the ground. 3. 4. Level the top surface of the tripod head. 5. 6. 7. Securely fasten the thumb screws on the tripod legs. Place the instrument on the tripod head. Insert the tripod mounting screw into the center hole of the base plate of the instrument. 8. Tighten the tripod mounting screw. Note Do not carry the instrument while it is attached to a tripod. Centering When you center the instrument, you align its central axis precisely over the station point. To center the instrument, you can either use the optical plummet or a plumb bob. Centering using the optical plummet Note If you require high accuracy, check and adjust the optical plummet before you center the instrument. For detailed instructions, see Checking and Adjusting the Optical/Laser Plummet, page 136. To center the instrument using the optical plummet:

1. Set up the instrument on the tripod. For detailed instructions, see Setting Up the Tripod, page 13. 2. While looking through the optical plummet, align the reticle with the station point. To do this, turn the leveling screws until the center mark of the reticle is directly over the image of the station point. 3. While supporting the tripod head with one hand, loosen the tripod leg clamps and adjust the lengths of the legs until the air bubble is in the center of the circular level. 4. Tighten the tripod leg clamps. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 13 2 Preparation 5. Use the electronic level to level the instrument. For detailed instructions, see Leveling, page 15. 6. Look through the optical plummet to check that the image of the station point is 7. still in the center of the reticle mark. If the station point is off center, do one of the following:

If the station point is slightly off center, loosen the tripod mounting screw and then center the instrument on the tripod. Use only direct movement to center the instrument. Do not rotate it. When the instrument is centered, tighten the mounting screw. If the displacement of the station point is major, repeat this procedure from Step 2. Centering using the laser plummet Note Do NOT look into the laser directly. Note If you require high accuracy, check and adjust the laser plummet before you center the instrument. For detailed instructions, see Checking and Adjusting the Optical/Laser Plummet, page 136. 1. Set up the instrument on the tripod. For detailed instructions, see Setting Up the Tripod, page 13. 2. Turn on the laser plummet. See Laser plummet ON/OFF, page 36. 3. Align the laser pointer to the station point. To do this, turn the leveling screws until the laser pointer is over the station point. 4. While supporting the tripod head with one hand, loosen the tripod leg clamps and adjust the lengths or the legs until the air bubble is the center of the circular level. 5. Tighten the tripod leg clamps. 6. Use the electronic level to level the instrument. For detailed instructions, see Leveling, page 15. 7. Check the laser pointer is over the station point. 8. If the station point is off center, do one of the following:

If the station point is slightly off center, loosen the tripod mounting screw and then center the instrument on the tripod. Use only direct movement to center the instrument. Do not rotate it. When the instrument is centered, tighten the mounting screw. If the displacement of the station point is major, repeat this procedure from Step 2 14 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Preparation 2 Centering using a plumb bob 1. Set up the instrument on the tripod. For detailed instructions, see Setting Up the Tripod, page 13. 2. Hang the plumb line on the hook of the tripod mounting screw. 3. Adjust the length of the plumb line so that the tip of the plumb bob is at the height of the station point. 4. Loosen the tripod mounting screw slightly. 5. Using both hands to support the outer side of the tribrach, carefully slide the instrument about on the tripod head until the tip of the plumb bob is positioned over the exact center of the station point. Note To confirm that the instrument is precisely aligned, check its position from two directions at right angles to each other. Leveling When you level the instrument, you make the vertical axis of the instrument exactly vertical. To level the instrument, use the electronic level. In the leveling work, always set the instrument in face 1 direction (please refer to the Fig.1.1 in page 3). To level the instrument:

1. Move the bubble into the circle drawn on the circular level and then turn on the power. 2. Rotate the alidade until the bottom edge of the keyboard panel is parallel to the two of the leveling screws (B and C). 3. Use leveling screws B and C to move the bubble into the center of the electronic level. 4. Rotate the alidade approximately 90. 5. Use leveling screw A to move the bubble into the center of the electronic level. 6. Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 to center the bubble in both positions. 7. Rotate the alidade 180. 8. If the bubble in the electronic level remains centered, the instrument is level. If the bubble moves off center, adjust the electronic level. For detailed instructions, see Adjusting the Electronic Level, page 136. A B C Bottom edge of the keyboard panel A B C Bottom edge of the keyboard panel 1 2 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 15 2 Preparation Sighting When you sight the instrument, you aim the telescope at the target, bring the target image into focus, and align the image with the center crosshairs of the reticle. To sight the instrument:

1. Adjust the diopter:

a. Aim the telescope at a blank area, such as the sky or a piece of paper. Center crosshairs C WARNING Never look at the sun through the telescope. If you do, you may damage or lose your eyesight. b. Looking through the eyepiece, rotate the diopter ring until the reticle crosshairs are in sharp focus. 2. Eliminate parallax:

a. Aim the telescope at the target image. b. Rotate the focusing ring until the target image is in sharp focus on the reticle crosshairs. c. Move your eye vertically and laterally to Diopter ring Telescope focusing ring check whether the target image moves relative to the reticle crosshairs. If the target image does not move, there is no parallax. If the target image does move, rotate the telescope focusing ring. Then repeat from Step c. 3. Rotate the tangent screw:

d. The final turn of the tangent screw should be in a clockwise directions, to align the target accurately on the center crosshairs. 16 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Preparation 2 Setting the Measurement Mode and Preparing the Target The Nivo series has two measurement modes: Prism mode (Prism) and Reflectorless mode (N-Prism). These modes can be changed at any time by holding down the [MSR1] or [MSR2] key for one second. For more information, see Measurement settings, page 48. To set the measurement mode depending on the target you want to measure, see the following table. Target Prism, reflector sheet Other (reflective materials) Target setting Prism (Prism mode) N-Prism (Reflectorless mode) In some cases, you can measure another target that is not appropriate to the set measurement mode. Note The Nivo series is Laser Class 1 in the measurement function, and Laser Class 2 in the Laser pointer function. Dont sight the Prism when the Laser Pointer is on. Measurement with a prism Do not use a prism with scratches, a dirty surface, or a chipped center. Prisms with thin edges are recommended. thin edges chipped center thick edges As the Nivo series is extremely sensitive, multiple reflections on the prism surface can sometimes cause a significant loss in accuracy. To maintain the accuracy of your measurements:

Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 17 2 Preparation When measuring a short distance, incline the prism slightly so that the EDM can ignore unnecessary reflections on the prism surface, as shown below. Hold the prism securely in place and do not move while taking measurements. In Prism mode, in order to avoid false measurements on objects other than the prism or reflector-sheet, targets that are less reflective than the prism or reflector sheet are not measured. Even if you start a measurement, measured values are not displayed. To measure less reflective objects, use the N-prism (reflectorless) mode Measurement in Reflectorless mode The intensity of the reflection from the target determines the distance the Nivo series can measure in this mode. The color and condition of the target surface also affect the measurable distance, even if the targeted objects are the same. Some less-reflective targets may not be measured. The following table describes some examples of targets and approximate measureable distances. Target Traffic signs, reflectors Paper (white), veneer (new) wall (brightly painted), brick You can measure approximately... 500 meters (1640 feet) 300 meters (990 feet) 100 to 200 meters (330 to 660 feet) Measurable distances may be shorter or measurement intervals may be longer in the following cases:

the angle of the laser against the target is small the surface of the target is wet In direct sunlight, the measurable distance may be shorter. In this case, try to throw a shadow on the target. Targets with completely flat surfaces, such as mirrors, cannot be measured unless the beam and the target are perpendicular to each other. Make sure there are no obstacles between the instrument and the target when taking measurents. When you need to take measurements across a road or a place where vehicles or other objects are frequently moving, take several measurements to a target for the best result. 18 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Preparing the Reflector Sheet The reflector sheet can be used for measurements in Prism mode. Assemble the reflector sheet as shown below. Preparation 2 Reflector sheet Mini prism adapter Telescopic prism pole Prism pole tripod type PPS Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 19 2 Preparation Setting Up the Prism Reflector 1. Assemble the prism reflector as shown below. Target plate for single prism Target pole Height adjust-

ment adapter is not used. Tribrach adapter 15 Tribrach W30/W30b Tripod Prism C Tiltable single prism holder Triple prism holder 2. Adjust the height of the tribrach adaptor (see page 21). 3. 4. 5. If necessary, change the direction of the prism (see page 21). Set the prism constant (see page 21). If you are using a single prism holder, set the position of the target plate (see page 22). Detailed instructions for Step 2 through Step 5 are provided on the following pages. Note Nivo series must be used with the Tribrach W30 or W30b. 20 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Preparation 2 Adjusting the height of the tribrach adapter The tribrach adapter has a height adjustment adapter. To use the prism reflector with a Nivo series instrument, remove the height adjustment adapter as shown in the Figure below. The height adjustment adapter will be used with other Nikon Total Stations. Height adjustment adapter Height adjustment adapter clamp screw Changing the direction of the prism The prism mounted on the tribrach adapter can be rotated to face in any direction. To change the direction of the prism:

1. Release the rotation clamp. To do this, turn the clamp lever counterclockwise. 2. Turn the upper plate of the tribrach adapter until the prism is facing in the required direction. Fasten the rotation clamp. To do this, turn the clamp lever clockwise. 3. Clamp Clamp lever Unclamp Setting the prism constant 1. Attach the prism to the single prism holder or triple prism holder. B Tip To use a triple prism holder as a single prism holder, attach the prism to the center thread of the prism holder. 2. Set the prism constant. To do this, hold down

[MSR1] or [MSR2] for one second. For more information, see Measurement settings, page 48. Note The prism constant of a Nikon prism is always 0, whether it is attached to a single prism holder or a triple prism holder. If your prism constant is not 0 mm, then directly enter the prism constant value in the Const field. For example, if your prism constant is 30 mm, enter 30mm in the Const field on the instrument. B Tip When you use the prism at a short distance, set the prism at a slight angle to the sighting axis, rather than completely square. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 21 2 Preparation Setting the position of the target plate If using a single prism, make sure that the target plate is aligned with the tribrach adapter and the prism. To set the position of the target plate:

1. Use the two set screws supplied to attach the Center on axis target plate to the single prism holder. 2. Move the target plate within the screw holes until the apex of the wedge pattern is aligned with the vertical axis of the prism and the tribrach adapter. 22 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual C H A P T E R3 3 Getting Started In this chapter:

Turning the Instrument On and Off

Changing Regional Configuration Pre-sets

Display and Key Functions

List Display

Inputting Data

Jobs

Measuring Distances Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 23 3 Getting Started Turning the Instrument On and Off Turning on the instrument 1. To turn on the instrument, press [PWR]. The start-

up screen appears. It shows the model name, current temperature, pressure, date, and time. The display automatically changes to the electronic level after 2 seconds. If you have entered your name or your companys name in the Owners detail field, the text from this field appears on the start-up screen. To set the Owners detail field, go to MENU > Settings > Others. For more information, see page 113. Turning off the instrument To enter the power-off process, press [PWR] and [ENT]. Then do one of the following:

Press ...

[ENT] again the Reset softkey the Sleep softkey

[ESC]

To ... turn off the instrument reboot the program and re-start the instrument put the instrument into power-saving mode cancel the power-off process and return to the previous screen If you press the Reset softkey, the software is rebooted and the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) appears without an open job. Sleep mode If you press the Sleep softkey in the Press [ENT]

OFF screen, or enable the Power Save setting (see Power saving, page 110), the instrument goes into sleep mode. When the instrument is in sleep mode, it wakes up if any of the following occurs:

You press a key The instrument receives a remote control command 24 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 You rotate the alidade You tilt the telescope Changing Regional Configuration Pre-sets To provide easier configuration for common regional settings, you can quickly configure the Nikon total station to a pre-set combination of default regional settings. The Regional Configuration screen appears only after the language configuration is complete, the instrument has rebooted. 1. Follow the steps in Language, page 113. Once the instrument rebooted, the Regional Configuration screen appears. Press [^] or [v] to highlight the required regional settings and then press [ENT]. If you do not want to change the current settings, press [ESC] and quit. The instrument will continue to use the last configured settings that were configured. 2. 3. The settings affected by the Regional Configuration screen are:

Category Angle Distance Coordinates Power Save Communication Stakeout Units Setting VA zero Resolution HA Scale T-P corr. Sea Level C&R corr. Order Label AZ zero Main Unit EDM Unit Sleep Ext. Comm Baud Length Parity Stop bit Add PT Angle Distance Europe Zenith International Zenith United States Zenith 1"(See note) Azimuth 1.000000 On Off 0.132 ENZ ENZ North Off Off 5 minutes Nikon 4800 8 None 1 1000 GON meters 1"(See note) Azimuth 1.000000 On Off 0.132 ENZ ENZ North Off Off 5 minutes Nikon 4800 8 None 1 1000 DEG meters 1"(See note) Azimuth 1.000000 On Off 0.132 NEZ NEZ North Off Off 5 minutes Nikon 4800 8 None 1 1000 DEG US-ft Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 25 3 Getting Started Category Rec Others Setting Temp Press Store DB Data Rec XYZ disp 2nd Unit Split ST CD Input Owners Detail Europe C mm Hg RAW&XYZ Internal Fast None No

<ABC>

Blank International C mm Hg RAW&XYZ Internal Fast None No

<ABC>

Blank United States F In Hg RAW&XYZ Internal Fast None No

<ABC>

Blank The default regional configuration pre-set is United States settings. For more information, see Settings, page 108. Display and Key Functions The following figure shows the keys on the Nivo series instrument keyboard and the LCD display. The functions of the Nivo keys are as follows. Key Function Turns the instrument on or off.

(Illumination key) Provides access to the switch window. Turns on/off the LCD backlight if held down for one second. Displays the MENU screen. Changes the key input mode between alphanumeric and numeric if pressed when you are in a PT or CD field. Activates Qcode mode if pressed when you are In the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS). Details page 24 page 30 page 91 page 32 26 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Key Getting Started 3 Details page 81 page 47 page 47 page 49 page 52 page 53 page 64 page 83 page 71 Function Records measured data, moves on to the next screen, or confirms and accepts the entered data in input mode. You have the option to record the measurement as a CP record instead of an SS record, if you hold this key down for one second in the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS). The instrument outputs the current measurement data (PT, HA, VA, and SD) on the COM port if you press this key in the BMS or in a Stakeout observation screen. (The Data Rec settings must be set to COM.) Returns to the previous screen. In numeric or alphanumeric mode, deletes input. Starts distance measurement, using the measure mode settings for the [MSR1] key. Displays measurement mode settings, if held down for one second. Starts distance measurement, using the measure mode settings for the [MSR2] key. Displays measurement mode settings, if held down for one second. Moves to the next available display screen. Changes the fields that appear on the DSP1, DSP2, and DSP3 screens, if held down for one second. Displays the Angle menu. Displays the Station Setup menu. In numeric mode, enters 7. In alphanumeric mode, enters 7. Displays the Stakeout menu. Shows stakeout settings, if held down for one second. In numeric mode, enters 8. In alphanumeric mode, enters A, B, C, or 8. Displays the Offset Point Measurement menu. In numeric mode, enters 9. In alphanumeric mode, enters D, E, F, or 9. Displays the Programs menu, which contains additional measuring programs. In numeric mode, enters 4. In alphanumeric mode, enters G, H, I, or 4. In numeric mode, enters 5. In alphanumeric mode, enters J, K, L, or 5. Displays RAW, XYZ, or STN data, depending on your setting. In numeric mode, enters 6. In alphanumeric mode, enters M, N, O, or 6. page 38 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 27 3 Getting Started Key Function Executes the function that is assigned to the [USR1] key. In numeric mode, enters 1. In alphanumeric mode, enters P, Q, R, S, or 1. Executes the function that is assigned to the [USR2] key. In numeric mode, enters 2. In alphanumeric mode, enters T, U, V, or 2. Opens a window where you can enter a code. The default code value is the last code entered. In numeric mode, enters 3. In alphanumeric mode, enters W, X, Y, Z, or 3. Displays the (HOT) menu, which includes Height of Target, Temp-Press, Target, Note recording, and Default PT settings. In numeric mode, enters (minus). In alphanumeric mode, enters . (period), (minus), or + (plus). Displays the Bubble indicator. In numeric mode, enters 0. In alphanumeric mode, enters *,

/, =, (a space), or 0. Details page 37 page 33 page 34 page 36 Status bar The status bar appears on the right side of every screen. It contains icons that indicate the status of various system functions. Status bar Input mode indicator The Input mode indicator only appears when you are entering points or coordinates. It shows the data input mode:

Input mode is numeric. Press a key on the number pad to enter the number printed on the key. Input mode is alphabetic. Press a key on the number pad to enter the first letter printed beside the key. Press the key repeatedly to cycle through all the letters assigned to that key. For example, to enter the letter O in alphabetic mode, press [5] three times. Laser pointer indicator The icon appears while turning on the laser pointer. When the icon is displayed on the screen, the emitting power is laser class 2. Laser pointer ON.

(None) Laser pointer OFF. 28 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 EDM measurement status When you are taking measurements, the EDM measurement status shows the mode that is being used. When you display observation data, the EDM measurement status shows the mode that was used when the data was collected. Reflectorless mode Communication port status

(This is only available when the optional Bluetooth is installed. See Optional Bluetooth function, page 129.) Bluetooth enabled Battery indicator Shows each voltage level of the right and left internal batteries individually. When the external battery is connected with the instrument, its voltage is shown. Internal batteries (above: Left battery, below: Right battery) External battery Internal battery External battery Battery level indication

: Battery low If the battery level becomes critically low, the message on the right appears:

Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 29 3 Getting Started LCD backlight, Laser pointer, Beep sound and Contrast adjustment

[ENT] / [4]

[ESC]

<Switch set up window >

<Contrast adjustment window>

To turn on/off the 1. LCD backlight, 2. laser pointer or 3. beep sound, and to do the 4. contrast adjustment, press the illumination key and open the switch set up window shown above. Holding down the illumination key for one second also turns on/off the LCD backlight. To turn on/off each function, press [ENT] when the option 1, 2, 3 or 4 is selected or directly press [1], [2], [3] or [4] numeric key. Press [^] or [v] to move the cursor up and down. In the contrast adjustment window, use [^] or [v] to adjust the contrast. To close the window, press [ESC]. 1. LCD backlight LCD backlight is OFF LCD backlight is ON 2. Laser pointer Laser pointer is OFF Laser pointer is ON 3. Sound Sound is OFF Sound is ON 30 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual

[DSP] key Use the key to change the current display screen or to change display settings. Getting Started 3 Switching between display screens When several display screens are available, the DSP indicator appears at the top left of the screen, and the screen indicator (for example, 1/4) appears at the top right. To move to the next available screen, press [DSP]. For example, if the DSP2 screen is currently displayed, press [DSP] to move to the DSP3 screen. The screen indicator changes from 2/4 to 3/4. When the secondary distance unit is set, an additional screen is available. It shows the HD, VD, and SD values. For information on setting the secondary distance unit, see page 112. The smallest unit of display for distances measured in feet-and-inches is 1/16 in. Smaller units are impractical in the field. When the actual value is greater than 99999'11''15/16, the > symbol is shown. If the actual distance is less than -9999'11''15/16, the (solid triangle) symbol is shown. This does not affect calculations. The precise value is used internally in all cases. Customizing items in the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) To customize the items that are displayed on the DSP1, DSP2, and DSP3 screens:

1. Hold down [DSP] for one second. 2. Use the arrow keys [^], [v], [<], and [>] to highlight the item that you want to change. 3. Use the and softkeys to scroll through the list of items that can be displayed for this item. The items that you can choose from are HA, AZ, HL, VA, V%, SD, VD, HD, Z, and (none). Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 31 3 Getting Started 4. To save your changes, press the Save softkey. Alternatively, highlight the last item for DSP3 and press [ENT]. The DSP screens show the items you have selected. Except for the (none) item, you cannot display the same item on more than one line of the same screen. The items displayed in the DSP1, DSP2, DSP3, and DSP4 screens are also used in the corresponding Stakeout screens (SO2, SO3, SO4, and SO5). You can also customize the displayed items in Stakeout. Header characters The following header characters can be used in DSP screens:

A colon (:) indicates that tilt correction is applied to the value. A hash symbol (#) indicates that tilt correction is off. An underscore (_) under the tilt correction character indicates that Sea Level Correction or Scale factor is applied.

[MODE] key Use the [MODE] key to change the keyboard mode for the current screen. Changing input mode while entering points or codes When the cursor is in a point (PT) or code (CD) field, press [MODE] to change the input mode between alphanumeric (A) and numeric (1). The input mode indicator in the status bar changes to show the current input mode. When the cursor is in a height (HT) field, only numeric input mode is available. Pressing [MODE] has no effect when the cursor is in a HT field. 32 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 Quick code measurement mode 1. To activate Quick code measurement mode, press [MODE] in the BMS. 2. 3. The PT field shows the default point name. Press any numeric key ([0] through [9]) to start measuring and recording points. A list of the numeric keys and their assigned feature codes appears on the right side of the screen. For example, when you press [6], the code assigned to 6 is selected, and the instrument starts a measurement. If you have set the record mode to Confirm (see Measurement settings, page 48), the Record PT screen appears after each measurement. Do one of the following:

To record the point, press [ENT]. To return to the BMS, press [ESC]. To assign a new feature code to a numeric key, press [^] or [v] to highlight the code that you want to change. Then press the Edit softkey. You can use the DSP softkey to change the values shown in the measurement box, in the same way as you use the [DSP] key in the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS). 4. To return to the BMS from the Qcode screen, press [MODE] or [ESC].

[COD] key In the BMS, press [COD] to change the default feature code that will appear in the CD field when you record a point. Setting the default code When you press [COD] in the BMS, a window for entering the feature code appears. You can use the List and Stack softkeys to enter the code. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 33 3 Getting Started Qcode observations To enter the Quick code observation routine, press the Qcode softkey. In this function, you can use the ten numeric keys to both select a feature code and shoot a point. To change the measurement mode for the Quick code observation, press the Sett softkey. In Quick code measurement, the Rec mode can only be set to Confirm or ALL.

[HOT] key The HOT key menu is available on any observation screen. To display the HOT key menu, press [HOT]. Changing the height of the target To change the height of the target, press [HOT] to display the HOT menu. Then either press [1] or select HT and press [ENT]. Enter the height of the target, or press the Stack softkey to display the HT stack. The HT stack stores the last 20 HT values entered. Setting the temperature and pressure To set the current temperature and pressure, press [HOT]

to display the HOT menu. Then either press [2] or select Temp-Press and press [ENT]. Enter the ambient temperature and pressure. The ppm value is updated automatically. 34 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 Selecting the target set A target set specifies settings for the target type, the prism constant, and height of target. When you change the selected target set, all three settings are changed. You can use this function to quickly switch between two types of target, such as a reflector sheet and a prism. You can prepare up to five target sets. Press [HOT] to display the HOT menu. Then either press [3], or select Target and press

[ENT]. A list of the five target sets appears. To select a target set, either press the corresponding numeric key ([1] through [5]), or use [^] or [v] to highlight the target set in the list and press [ENT]. To change the settings defined in a target set, highlight the target set in the list. Then press the Edit softkey. Type Const HT Prism/N-Prism 999 to 999 mm 9.990 to 99.990 m HT can be left blank in the target set. If you leave it blank, the current HT value is always applied to the measurement. When a target set is selected, the Type and Const values are copied to both [MSR1] and [MSR2] settings, and to the measurements in Qcode. If you have specified a value for HT, this value is also copied to the current HT. Entering a field note To enter a field note, press [HOT] to display the HOT menu. Then either press [4], or select Note and press

[ENT]. This function can be used at any time on any observation screen. Each note can be up to 50 characters. The note is stored as a CO record in the raw data. To display a list of previously used notes, press the Stack softkey. The stack stores the last 20 notes. Use [^] or [v] to highlight a note in the list. Then press

[ENT] to select the note. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 35 3 Getting Started Setting the default point name To change the default point name, press [HOT] to display the HOT menu. Then press [5], or select Default PT and press [ENT]. This function is available from any observation screen. Modify the default point name for the next record. Press [ENT] to confirm the new default point name. The new point name is appears as the default PT name on the input screen. Bubble indicator The bubble indicator is automatically displayed if the instrument goes out of level while the compensators are turned on, and also appears after the start up screen. To display the bubble indicator in an observation screen, press The Nivo series has two-axis level compensation. To turn the leveling compensators on or off, press [<] or [>]. When the leveling compensators are turned off, the text OFF appears on the screen. If the instrument is more than 3'30" out of level, the text OVER appears on the screen. To return to the observation screen, press [ESC] or [ENT]. Laser plummet Laser plummet ON/OFF Press [ ON] to enable the laser plummet. Press [ESC] to close the bubble indicator window. Press [ OFF] to disable the laser plummet. Press [Lumi.] to open the luminance adjustment window. Press [ESC] to disable the laser plummet and close the bubble indicator window.

(Laser plummet is on.) 36 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 Laser luminance adjustment Laser luminance can be set to 4 levels. Press [Max.] to increase the luminance of the laser plummet. Press [Min.] to decrease the luminance of the laser plummet. Press[ESC] / [ENT] to return to the bubble indicator window. The current setting of leveling compensators is indicated by header characters (:, #, :, and #) after field labels

(such as HA, VA, SD, and HD) in observation screens. For more information, see Header characters, page 32.

[USR] keys If you use a function frequently in the field, you can assign it to the [USR1] or [USR2] key. Whenever you press a [USR] key, the function that is assigned to that key is activated directly. The following functions can be assigned to the [USR] keys:

Input HT BS Check Base XYZ Default PT Select Target Input Temp-Press Input Note The following menus, or a single function from one of these menus:

Cogo O/S PRG By default, Input HT is assigned to [USR1], and no function is assigned to [USR2]. Hold down the [USR] key for one second to display the list of functions that can be assigned to the key. The currently assigned function is indicated by an asterisk

(*) beside the function name. To change the function that assigned to the key, press [^]

or [v] to highlight the function. Then press [ENT]. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 37 3 Getting Started If an item on the list has an arrow (->) beside it, this item is a menu. If you highlight a menu item and then press [ENT], a sub-menu appears. The first item on the sub-menu ends with the text

[MENU]. If you select this item, the whole menu is assigned to the [USR] key. To assign a specific function from the sub-menu, press

[^] or [v] to highlight the function. Then press [ENT]. Once you have assigned a function to a [USR] key, it is called directly whenever you press that [USR] key in the BMS. To change the type of data that is assigned to the [USR] keys in MENU >

1sec-Keys > [USR]. For more information, see [USR] key settings, page 132.

[DAT] key Use the [DAT] key to quickly access data in the current job from observation screens. When you press [DAT] in the BMS or in observation screens in functions such as Stakeout, 2Pt RefLine, and Arc RefLine, the assigned data in the current job appears. Hold down [DAT] for one second in the BMS or an observation screen to display the Select Format screen. Use this screen to change the type of data that is assigned to [DAT]. Press [1] or select DAT [MENU] to display the Data menu whenever you press [DAT]. 38 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 When you select an option from this screen, the change is applied immediately, and the selected data type appears. Press [ESC] to return to the previous observation screen. To change the type of data that is assigned to [DAT], go to MENU >

1sec-Keys > [DAT]. For more information, see [DAT] key settings, page 133. List Display Available jobs or data appear in a list display when you do any of the following:

view or edit data (MENU > Data) open the code list, point list, or Job Manager (MENU > Job) search for points or codes In the list, the current cursor position is shown in reverse video (it appears as white text on a black background). Press [^] or [v] move the cursor one line up or down. If the Page Up icon before the current page. Press [<] to move up one page. If the Page Down icon appears, there are more pages after the current page. Press [>]

to move down one page. To select an item from the list, move the cursor onto the item and press [ENT]. appears, there are more pages Inputting Data Entering a point name or number You can use numeric or alphanumeric names up to 16 characters long to identify points. The default name for a new point is the last point name entered, with the last digit incremented. For example, if the last point name was A100, the default name for the next point is A101. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 39 3 Getting Started If the last character of the previous point name is alphabetic, the default point name is the last point name. When the cursor is in a PT (point) field, there are several ways to specify a point, or input coordinates. Entering an existing point When you enter a known point name or number, the coordinates of that point are displayed briefly. A short beep sounds before the next screen appears or the next field is selected. To adjust the duration of the coordinate window display, go to MENU >

Settings > Others. To leave the window open until you press [ENT], set the XYZ disp field to +ENT. For more information, see page 112. Entering a new point When you input a new point name or number, a coordinate input screen appears. Enter the points coordinates in NE, NEZ, or elevation-only (Z) format. Press [ENT] on the last line (the CD field) to store the point in the current job. Pressing [ENT] without a point name To use a point without recording the coordinates, press

[ENT] in a PT field, without entering a point name. 40 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual The input coordinates are used in the calculation. They are not saved in the database. Getting Started 3 Specifying a wildcard (*) If you include an asterisk (*) when you enter a point or code name, a list of points that match the entered text appears. Use [^] or [v] to move the cursor to the point that you want to use. Then press [ENT]. If the Page Up use [<] or [>] to page up or page down the list. or Page Down icons are displayed, When you select a point from the list, its coordinates are displayed and a beep sounds. Recording an instant measurement You can also input a point by recording an instant measurement. To do this, press the MSR softkey. An observation screen appears. Press [MSR1] or [MSR2] to start a measurement. To change the height of the target, press the HT softkey. To go to the point recording screen when you have finished the measurement, press [ENT]. Enter the point or code name. Press [ENT]. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 41 3 Getting Started When you move the cursor to a field, the current or default value appears in inverted text (this is the default Replace All input mode). Press [>] to change the input mode to Overwrite mode and highlight the first character. Press [<] to move the cursor the end of the string. Entering a point from the stack The point stack is a list of recently used points. To display the stack, press the Stack softkey when the cursor is in the PT field. Use [^] or [v] to move the cursor to the point that you want to use. Then press [ENT]. When you return to the point input screen, the selected point name is entered in the PT field, incremented by one. For example, if you selected the A101 point, A102 appears in the PT field. The stack shows the last 20 point names used, in chronological order from last used to first used. Entering a point from the point list To display a list of existing points, press the List softkey when the cursor is in the PT field. Use [^] or [v] to move the cursor to the point that you want to use. Then press [ENT]. When you return to the point input screen, the selected point name is entered in the PT field. You can add digits or alphabetic characters if required. 42 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 Entering a code The CD (Code) field always defaults to the last code used. You can change the selected code on the input point screen, or you can press [COD] in the BMS. For more information, see [COD] key, page 33. You can use numeric or alphanumeric names up to 16 characters long to identify codes. Entering a code directly To enter a code directly, press [MODE] to change the input mode to alphanumeric or numeric mode. Then use the keypad to enter the code. Entering a code from the stack The code stack is a list of recently used codes. The stack may contain up to 20 codes. To display the stack, press the Stack softkey when the cursor is in the CD field. Use [^] or [v] to move the cursor to the code that you want to use. Then press [ENT]. The selected code is copied to the CD field. When the instrument is rebooted, the code stack is cleared. Entering a code from the code list To display a list of existing codes, press the List softkey when the cursor is in the CD field. To edit the code list, go to MENU > Data > Code List. For more information, see Editing an item in the point list or code list, page 126. Use [^] or [v] to highlight the feature code that you want to use. Then press [ENT]. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 43 3 Getting Started A layer has an arrow at the end of the code label. If you highlight a layer in the list and then press [ENT], the codes and layers in that layer are displayed. When you return to the input screen, the selected code is entered in the CD field. Items are shown in alphabetic order. You can also use the first character search to quickly find a code. For more information, see Advanced feature:

Searching for a code by using the first character, page 44. Advanced feature: Searching for a code by using the first character To find a code quickly when the code list appears, use the first-character search. For example, to see feature codes that begin with T, use the keypad to enter the letter T. To do this, press [1]

twice. After each press of the key, the input mode field displays the selected letter. For example, if you press

[1], S appears. If you quickly press [1] again, T appears. If you do not press the [1] key again, the letter T is selected. Once you have selected a letter, the cursor moves to the feature code beginning with that letter. If there is no code beginning with that letter, the cursor moves to the next available letter. Qcodes Quick codes (Qcodes) let you shoot and record many points with feature codes in the field. You can register up to ten Quick codes. To register Qcodes, press the Edit softkey. For more information, see Quick code measurement mode, page 33. Press [MODE] to switch Qcodes on or off. Press the Edit softkey to change the Qcode. You can edit the entire code, or just the number at the end of the code. You can still use [DSP] to change the background displays. 44 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 Entering values in feet and inches When either US Survey Feet (US-Ft) or International Feet (I-Ft) is selected as the distance unit, you can enter and display distances, HIs, HTs, and coordinate values either in decimal feet, or in feet and inches For more information, see Unit, page 111, and Others settings, page 112. To enter values in feet and inches in an input screen, enter the elements, separated by periods (.), in the following format:

<Feet> [.] <Inches> [.] <Numerator> [.] <Denominator> [ENT]

(011) (015) (099) The default denominator is 16. If the denominator is 16, you do not have to enter it, and it is not displayed on the screen. For example, if you enter

[2] [.] [0] [8] [.] [5] [.] [ENT], it appears as 2'08" 5/ (2 feet, 8 and 5/16ths inches). The following examples show how various values are entered:

To enter ... 65' 5 3/8"

65'

65' 5"

65' 5 3/8"

5 3/8"

Type ...

[6] [5] [.] [5] [.] [3] [.] [8] [ENT]

[6] [5] [ENT]

[6] [5] [.] [5] [ENT]

[6] [5] [.] [5] [.] [6] [ENT]

[0] [.] [5] [.] [3] [.] [8] [ENT] or [0] [.] [5] [.] [6] [ENT]

The numerator and denominator that you enter are automatically converted to the closest value from the following list: 0, 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 3/4, 7/8, 1/16, 3/16, 5/16, 7/16, 9/16, 11/16, 13/16, 15/16. If the denominator is 16, it is not shown on the screen. Jobs To record data on the instrument, you must create or open a job. B Tip Before you use the instrument for the first time, check the job settings. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 45 3 Getting Started Creating a new job 1. 2. 3. Press [MENU] to open the MENU screen. Press [1] to open the Job Manager. Press the Creat softkey to open the Create Job screen. 4. Enter the job name. 5. 6. Press the Sett softkey to check the job settings. You cannot change a jobs settings once you have created the job. Press [ENT] in the last field of the Job Sett screen to create the new job. If either of the messages MAX 32JOBs or Data Full appears, delete at least one existing job to free space. You cannot free space by deleting records in an existing job. Creating a control job A control job, or common file, stores coordinate data that is used by several field jobs. You can create a control job in the office. Press [MENU] to open the MENU screen. 1. Press [1] or select Job to open the Job Manager. 2. 3. Move the cursor to the job that you want to use as the control job. Press the Ctrl softkey. Press the Yes softkey. 4. 5. For more information, see Creating a control job, page 46. When you enter a point name or number, the system searches in the current job first. If the point is not found in the current job, the search is automatically extended to the control job. If the point is found in the control job, the selected point is copied to the current job as a UP record. 46 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 Measuring Distances Sighting a prism reflector C WARNING Never look at the sun through the telescope. If you do, you may damage or lose your eyesight. C WARNING Precautions should be taken to ensure that persons do not look directly, with or without an optical instrument, into the beam. C WARNING Laser beam path should be located well above or below eye level wherever practicable. For information on how to assemble the prism reflector, see Setting Up the Prism Reflector, page 20. Sight the telescope to see crosshairs at the center of the prism reflector. Sighting a single prism Sighting a tiltable single prism Measuring distances To take a distance measurement, press [MSR1] or [MSR2] in the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) or in any observation screen. While the instrument is taking a measurement, the prism constant appears in a small font. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 47 3 Getting Started If the average count is set to 0, measurements are taken continuously until you press [MSR1], [MSR2], or [ESC]. Each time a measurement is taken, the distance is updated. If the average count is set to a value from 1 to 99, the averaged distance appears after the last shot. The field name SD changes to SDx to indicate the averaged data. To change the height of target (HT), temperature, or pressure, press [HOT]. For more information, see [HOT] key, page 34. Settings that relate to corrections

(T-P corr, Sea Level, C&R corr., and Map projection) are included in the job settings. These settings are job-specific. If you need to change any of these settings, you must create a new job. For more information, see Job settings, page 93, and Settings, page 108. Measurement settings To view the measurement settings,hold down [MSR1] or

[MSR2] for one second. Use [^] or [v] to move the cursor between the fields. Use

[<] or [>] to change the value in the selected field. Field Target Const (prism constant) Mode AVE (Average count) Rec mode Prism Values N-prism 999 mm through 999 mm Precise Normal 0 (Continuous) through 99 One of the following:

MSR only Confirm ALL Target field If the measurement is started with the Target field set to Prism, there is a dash in front of the prism constant. If the measurement is started with the Target field set to N-prism, there is a square bracket ] in front of the prism constant. 48 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Getting Started 3 The symbol then constantly runs from left to right over the prism constant in the display. When an N-prism measurement is taken, the appears in the status bar (above the battery icon). icon Incorrect Target settings may result in measurements outside the precision and intervals specified for the instrument. If a prism target is aimed in the N-prism mode, the warning message "Signal High! Try Prism Mode" will be displayed because of the excessive light reflection. A measurement made immediately after changing the target setting may take a longer time than usual.The Target setting is used to apply better cyclic-error adjustment in distance measurement. It efficiently eliminates multipath reflection. Rec mode field The Rec mode setting controls how the [MSR1] and [MSR2] keys operate in the BMS. The MSR only setting is the default measurement mode. After a measurement, the instrument stops in the BMS and waits for you to press [ENT] before recording the point. The Confirm setting displays the Record PT screen before data is recorded. The ALL setting is a quick shooting and recording mode. The instrument automatically records the point using the default PT/CD. The instrument then returns to the BMS for the next measurement. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 49 3 Getting Started 50 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual C H A P T E R4 4 Applications In this chapter:

HA Reset and Angle Operations

Station Setup

Stakeout

Program Key

Recording Measurement Data

Measuring Offsets Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 51 4 Applications HA Reset and Angle Operations To open the Angle menu, press [ANG] in the BMS. To select a command from this menu, either press the corresponding number key, or press [<] or [>] to highlight the command and then press [ENT]. Setting the horizontal angle to 0 To reset the horizontal angle to 0, press [1] or select 0-Set in the Angle menu. The display returns to the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS). Entering the horizontal angle To display the HA Input screen, press [2] or select Input in the Angle menu. Use the numeric keys to enter the horizontal angle. Then press [ENT]. To enter 12345'50", type [1] [2] [3] [.] [4] [5] [5] [0]. The displayed value is rounded to the minimum angle increment. Recording a foresight point after repeat angle measurement 1. To activate repeat angle measurement, press [3]

2. 3. or select Rept. in the Angle menu. HR=0 appears. Sight the backsight and press [ENT]. Sight the foresight and press [ENT]. The horizontal angle is accumulated and the value is held again. 4. To end repeat angle measurement, press [ESC]. 5. When you have accumulated enough horizontal angle between the backsight and the foresight, press [MSR1] or [MSR2] to take a measurement to the foresight. 52 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Applications 4 The averaged horizontal angle appears. This value is fixed until the process is finished or cancelled. HRx = HR N HA = BSAz + HRx (normalized) 6. HRx is not updated even if the instrument is moved. Press [ENT] to store the foresight as a CP record. Check the PT, HT, and CD values. Then press

[ENT] to record. In repeat angle measurement, the HA is replaced by HR. The number of repeat angles appears at the top of the screen (for example, N= 5). Horizontal angles can be measured up to 199959'59". This function stores both raw and XYZ data as CP records, regardless of the Store DB setting. Horizontal angle hold To hold the horizontal angle to the current value, press

[5] or select Hold in the Angle menu. To set the horizontal angle to the displayed value, press

[ENT] or the Set softkey. To cancel the process and return to the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS), press [ESC] or the Abrt softkey. Station Setup To open the Stn Setup menu, press [STN] in the BMS. To select a command from this menu, press the corresponding number key. Alternatively, press [<] or [>]

to highlight the command and then press [ENT]. Press [^]

or [v] to move up or down one page. The last function used is highlighted. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 53 4 Applications Setting up a station with known coordinates or azimuth Press [1] or select Known in the Stn Setup menu. 1. 2. Enter a point name or number in the ST field. If the input point number or name is an existing point, its coordinates are displayed and the cursor moves to the HI (Height of instrument) field. If the point is new, a coordinate input screen appears. Enter the coordinates for the point. Press [ENT] after each field. When you press [ENT] in the CD field, the new point is stored. If the specified point has a code, the code appears in the CD field. 3. Enter the instrument height in the HI field and then press [ENT]. 4. The Backsight screen appears. Select an input method for defining the backsight point. To sight the backsight by entering coordinates, see below. To sight the backsight by entering the azimuth and angle, see page 56. 54 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 3. 4. Sighting the backsight by entering coordinates X Z Xb X0 t h g e h i t n e m u r t s n I Y0 Station point

(Xi, Yi, Zi) Yb Applications 4 Backsight point

(Xb, Yb, Zb) Y 1. To enter coordinates for the backsight point

(BS), press [1] or select Coord in the Backsight screen. 2. Enter the point name. If the point exists in the job, its coordinates are shown. If you intend to take a distance measurement to the BS, enter the height of target in the HT field. Sight the BS. Press [ENT] to complete the setup. To record a full shot (with HA, VA, and SD values) to the BS, press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. AZ Azimuth calculated by coordinates If you are measuring to a known coordinate BS, press [DSP] to display a QA screen. The QA screen shows the dHD and dVD values, which indicate the difference between the measured distance and the distance calculated from the known coordinates. 5. To record the station, press [ENT]. 6. To finish the station setup after taking a distance measurement, press [ENT]. ST and F1 records are stored to the current job. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 55 4 Applications Sighting the backsight by entering the azimuth angle Z X0 X t i h g e h t n e m u r t s n I Y0 Backsight point Azimuth Station point

(Xi, Yi, Zi) Y 1. To enter the azimuth angle to the backsight point, press [2] or select Angle in the Backsight screen. 2. If there is no point name for the BS, press [ENT]

on the BS field. 3. In the AZ field, enter the azimuth angle to the BS point. If you press [ENT] without entering a value in the AZ field, the azimuth is automatically set to 000'00". Sight the BS point and press [ENT]. ST and F1 records are stored in the job. 4. 56 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Setting up a station using multiple point resection A resection sets up the station using angle/distance measurements to known points. Applications 4 Z X0 X1 X2 Y1 X 1 t i h g e H Known point 1

(X1, Y1, Z1) 2 t i h g e H Known point 2

(X2, Y2, Z2) t h g e h i t n e m u r t s n I Y0 Station point (Xi, Yi, Zi) Y Y2 You can use a maximum of 10 points in a resection. Measurements can be distance and angle, or angle only. Calculation starts automatically when enough measurements are taken. You can delete poor observations and recalculate if necessary. You can also select the BS point. If the angle between known point 1 and known point 2 (measured from the station point) is extremely acute or extremely oblique, the resulting solution will be less reliable geometrically. For geometric reliability, select known point locations (or station point locations) that are widely spaced. 1. To start the resection, press [2] or select Resection in the Stn Setup menu. 2. Enter the point name for the first observation point (PT1). 3. Enter the target height and press [ENT]. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 57 4 Applications 4. Sight PT1 and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. 5. To proceed to the next point, press [ENT]. 6. Enter the second point (PT2) and its height of target. 7. Measure to PT2 and press [ENT]. When the instrument has enough data, it calculates the station (STN) coordinates. If more than the minimum required data is available, a standard deviation screen appears. To take measurements to strengthen geometry of the resection, press the Add softkey. For information about the View softkey, see Advanced feature: Viewing and deleting a measurement in resection, page 59. 8. When the results are satisfactory, record the station. To do this, press [ENT] or the REC softkey. 9. Enter the height of instrument, if required. Press

[ENT]. The ST field defaults to the last recorded PT + 1. 10. To change the station name, move to the ST field and edit or replace the text. If you have set Split ST to Yes, the ST field defaults to the last recorded ST value + 1. For more information, see Others settings, page 112. 58 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Applications 4 BS defaults to the first observed point. 11. To change the BS, press the Change softkey. 12. Select the BS point that you want to use and press [ENT]. 13. To finish the resection setup, move the cursor to the BS field and press [ENT]. The minimum data required for a resection is either three angle shots, or one angle shot and one distance shot. If you use a distance shot, the distance between the target points must be greater than the measured distance. Stn-Z is calculated from distance-measured data. If no distances are measured, then Stn-Z is calculated using angle-only measurements to points with 3D coordinates. Advanced feature: Viewing and deleting a measurement in resection To check the measurements to each known point, press the View softkey on the calculated STN (sigma or coordinate) screen. dHA dVD dHD Distributed HA errors in each direction VD errors between measured distance and calculated distance HD errors between measured distance and calculated distance To delete a measurement (because of large sigma values, for example), highlight the measurement data or display the detail screen for the measurement. Then press the DEL softkey. The STN coordinates are automatically recalculated. To continue resection observations, press the Add softkey. The input screen for the next PT appears. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 59 4 Applications Setting up the station quickly without coordinates The station point (ST) in this function defaults to a new point number. For the new point, MP (0, 0, 0) is stored as the coordinates. When the ST is manually changed to a known point name, the station is set up on the coordinates of the known point. 1. To enter Quick Station setup, press [3] or select Quick in the Stn Setup menu. ST HI BS AZ Station point (defaults to the last recorded PT + 1, or ST + 1, depending on the Split ST setting) Height of instrument Backsight point (blank) Backsight azimuth (defaults to zero) 2. No default PT is assigned to the BS. Leave this field blank, or enter a BS point name. 3. The backsight azimuth (AZ) defaults to zero, but you can change this. 4. To complete the station setup, sight the BS and press [ENT]. When you press [ENT] in the AZ field, both HA and AZ are reset to the value you have entered. Even if both ST and BS are known points, this function does not calculate the backsight angle (AZ) automatically. To calculate the AZ between two known points (ST and BS), use Station Setup >

Known. For more information, see Setting up a station with known coordinates or azimuth, page 54. Determining station elevation 1. Press [4] or select Remote BM in the Stn Setup menu. 2. Enter the BM point and press [ENT]. When the point is found, it appears briefly. The cursor then moves to the HT field. 3. Enter the HT and press [ENT]. 60 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 4. Sight the BM point and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. Applications 4 The updated station coordinates are displayed. You can change the HI in this screen. 5. To record the updated STN, press [ENT]. When the HI is changed, the Z coordinate is updated before the station is recorded. You must complete a station setup before you use the Remote Benchmark function. Checking and resetting the backsight direction You must complete a station setup before you use the BS check function. This function always refers to the backsight point from the last ST record stored in the current open job. 1. To enter the backsight (BS) check function, press [5] or select BS Check in the Stn Setup menu. HA BS Current HA reading The HA to the BS in the last station setup. Enter station coordinates for observations without recording data. 2. Do one of the following:

To reset the horizontal angle to the HA set in the last station setup sight the BS and press the Reset softkey or press [ENT]. To cancel the process and return to the BMS, press the Abrt softkey or press [ESC]. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 61 4 Applications Base XYZ function:

Base XYZ does not store a ST record, so the BS Check cannot check the backsight when you enter a station using Base XYZ. To store raw data, use one of the other functions in the Stn Setup menu. This function does not store an ST record in the job. You can use this function without an open job. If there is an open job when you use this function, a CO record is stored to indicate that the instruments base coordinates have changed. 1. To enter the Base XYZ function, press [6] or select Base XYZ in the Stn Setup menu. The current instrument XYZ values are shown as the default. 2. Enter the new instrument XYZ values and press

[ENT]. 3. Do one of the following:

To reset the horizontal angle, enter a value in the HA field and press [ENT]. If you do not need to reset the HA, leave the HA field blank and press [ENT]. The display returns to the BMS. Two-point resection along a known line 1. To enter the Known Line function, press [7] or select Known Line in the Stn Setup menu. 2. Enter a known point as P1. If you enter a new point name, a coordinate input screen appears. Sight P1 and press [MSR1] or [MSR2] to take a measurement. Press [ENT]. 62 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Applications 4 3. Choose how you want to define a known line:

To define the line by entering P2 coordinates, press [1] or select By Coord. To define the line by entering the azimuth, press [2] or select By Angle. If you select By Angle, the azimuth input screen appears. Enter the angle value and press

[ENT]. A measurement screen appears. Sight P2 and press [MSR1] or [MSR2] to take a measurement. Press [ENT]. 4. 5. After the measurement to P2 is completed, the coordinates of the station are calculated. 6. To record the station, press [ENT] or the REC softkey. 7. To check your measurement, press the DSP softkey. If you defined the line by entering its azimuth, HD and VD between P1 and P2 are displayed. If you defined the line by entering the P2 coordinates, the difference of HD (dHD) and VD (dZ) between your measurement data and input coordinate data are displayed. 8. Enter the station name, the height of instrument

(HI), and a feature code (CD) if required. The station name defaults to the last recorded PT + 1, or last recorded ST + 1, depending on the Split ST setting. 9. Backsight (BS) defaults to the first point (P1). To change it, highlight the BS field and then press the Change softkey. 10. To finish the setup and record the station, press

[ENT] in the BS field. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 63 4 Applications Sample records CO, Temperature:20C Pressure:1013hPa Prism:0 ST,9005, ,265, ,1.2350,150.40300,150.40300 F1,265,1.6040,79.0010,90.30150,89.35260, F1,200,1.4590,50.2300,269.4035,93.50110, CO, P1-P2 HD=122.0350 VD=0.5600 Stakeout FiLL OUT CUT L R IN To display the Stakeout menu, press [S-O]. IN OUT Height of target R L FILL CUT 64 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Specifying the stakeout point by angle and distance 1. To display the input screen for the distance and angle to the target, press [1] or select HA-HD in the Stakeout menu. Applications 4 2. Enter the values and press [ENT]. HD Horizontal distance from station point to stakeout point Vertical distance from station point to stakeout point Horizontal angle to stakeout point dVD HA If you press [ENT] without entering HA, the current HA is used. 4. 3. Rotate the instrument until the dHA is close to 000'00". Sight the target and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. When the measurement is completed, the differences between the target position and the stakeout point are displayed. dHA R/L IN/OUT CUT/FILL Difference in horizontal angle to the target point Right/Left (Lateral error) In/Out (Longitudinal error) Cut/FilL Once a measurement is taken, the Cut/Fill value and Z coordinate are updated as the VA is changed. If you press [HOT] in any observation screen, the HOT key menu appears. You can use this menu at any time to change HT and T-P. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 65 4 Applications Using [DSP] to switch between display screens Press [DSP] to switch between the Stakeout display screens. The following screens are available:

S-O1 S-O3 S-O2 S-O4 dHA R OUT CUT S-O5 X Y Z HA VA SD S-O6 dX dY dZ HA VD HD S-O7 rSD rVD rHD HL V%

HD S-O8 HD VD SD The S-O8 screen is only available if the secondary distance unit is set. For more information, see Others settings, page 112. Every time you press [DSP], the next screen appears. If you press [DSP] in the last screen

(S-O7, or S-O8 if the secondary distance unit is set), the S-O1 screen appears. To customize the S-O2, S-O3, and S-O4 screens, hold down [DSP] for one second. For more information, see Customizing items in the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS), page 31. To record the stakeout point, press [ENT]. PT defaults to the last recorded PT+1. Press [ENT] to record the point. After recording the point, it returns to the observation screen. You can continue observation, or press [ESC] to input another angle and distance for stakeout. Specifying the stakeout point by coordinates 1. To start a stakeout by coordinates, press [2] or select XYZ in the Stakeout menu. 2. Enter the point name that you want to stake and press [ENT]. You can also specify the point by code or radius from the instrument. 66 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Applications 4 If several points are found, they are displayed in a list. Use [^] or [v] to move up and down the list. Use [<] or [>] to move up or down one page. 3. Highlight a point in the list and press [ENT]. The delta angle and the distance to the target are shown. 4. Rotate the instrument until the dHA is close to 000'00". Press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. Difference in horizontal angle to the target point Distance to the target point dHA HD 5. Ask the rodman to adjust the target position. When the target is on the intended position, the displayed errors become 0.000 m (or 0.000 ft). Difference in horizontal angle to the target point Right/Left (Lateral error) In/Out (Longitudinal error) Cut/FilL dHA R/L IN/OUT CUT/FILL To switch between display screens, press [DSP]. This function works as in the angle-distance stakeout, except that the screen counter (for example, S-O1/8) is not displayed. For more information, see Using [DSP] to switch between display screens, page 66. Once a measurement is taken, the Cut/Fill value and Z coordinate are updated as the VA is changed. 6. To record the point, press [ENT]. PT defaults to the specified PT + 1000. Use the Add Constant field in MENU > Settings > Stakeout to specify an integer that is added to the point number being staked to generate a new number for recording the staked point. The default value is 1000. For example, when you stake out PT3 with an Add Constant of 1000, the default number for SO record is 1003. For more information, see Stakeout, page 111. After recording the point, the display returns to the observation screen. When you press [ESC], the display returns to the PT/CD/R input screen. If you entered the stakeout point using a single point name, the PT defaults to the last PT + 1. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 67 4 Applications If you selected a point from the list, the display returns to the list, unless all points have been selected. Press

[ESC] to return to the point input screen. Advanced feature: Specifying a stakeout list by range input 1. To input points by range, press the Fr/To softkey in the PT field. 2. Enter the start point (Fr) and the end point (To). The range between Fr and To must be less than 1001 points. If existing points are found between Fr and To, a point list appears. To highlight a point, press [^] or [v]. To go to the stakeout observation screen, press [ENT]. If you have assigned a control job, and additional points are found in the control job, the Ctrl softkey appears under the list. DivLine S-O This function divides the line between the instrument and the first target by an input span number. It then guides you to stake out the points, one by one. 1. Press [3] or select DivLine S-O in the Stakeout menu. 2. Set up the baseline. To do this, sight the target on the line (the end point) and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. 68 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Applications 4 3. Enter the total stake number in the Span total field. The observation screen for the first stake (from the instrument) appears. Sight the prism and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. 4. 5. Use [^] or [v] to change the guide point. You can calculate and guide up to double the number of the stakes. 6. To record the point as an SO record, press [ENT]. For example, if you measure to the end point at 100 m from the instrument and set the span total to 2, the following four points are calculated and can be staked:

<1/2>

<2/2>

<3/2>

<4/2>

HD 50 m 100 m 150 m 200 m RefLine S-O This function allows you to stake out a point based on the Sta, O/S, and dZ to a specified line. 1. Press [4] or select RefLine S-O in the Stakeout menu. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 69 4 Applications 2. Enter the first point (P1) of the line. If you press [ENT] without entering a PT name, you can enter temporary coordinates which are not recorded in the job. Alternatively, press the MSR softkey to measure a point. 3. Enter the second point (P2) of the line. 4. Enter offsets to the line. Press [ENT] in a blank field to enter the value 0.0000. Distance from P1 along the line Distance perpendicular to the line Right side of the P1-P2 line Left side of the P1-P2 line Difference in height from the line Sta O/S

(-) dZ 5. Rotate the instrument until the dHA is close to 000'00". Sight the target and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. 6. When a distance measurement is taken, the difference from the design point appears. 7. To record the point as an SO record, press [ENT]. Using [DSP] to switch between display screens You can use [DSP] to switch between display screens. This function works as in the angle-distance stakeout. For more information, see Using [DSP] to switch between display screens, page 66. 70 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Applications 4 Program Key To display the Programs menu, press [PRG]. Measuring distance and offset values along a specified line 1. Press [1] or select 2Pt RefLine in the Programs menu. 2. Enter the first point for the reference line. Alternatively (to enter the point by measuring), press the MsrPT softkey. Direct Measurement screen Press the MsrPT softkey to display a direct measurement screen. Sight the target and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. The Record PT screen appears. If you press [ESC] in the Record PT screen, the measured point is used but not recorded in the job. 3. Enter the second point for the reference line. 4. Enter an asterisk (*) in the PT field to perform a wildcard search. A list of matching points appears. Highlight a point in the list and then press [ENT]. PT2 Sta O/S Prism PT2 dZ PT1 Plain view Prism PT1 Sta Side view Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 71 4 Applications 5. Sta O/S dZ Sight the prism or reflective sheet and press

[MSR1] or [MSR2]. Horizontal distance from P1 to the measure point along the P1-P2 line Horizontal offset from the P1-P2 line to the measured point Vertical offset from the P1-P2 line to the measured poin Using [DSP] to switch between display screens Press [DSP] to switch between the Stakeout display screens. The following screens are available:

REF1 REF3 REF2 REF4 X Y Z HA VA SD HA VD HD Sta O/S dZ REF5 HD VD SD The REF5 screen is only available if the secondary distance unit is set. For more information, see Others settings, page 112. Every time you press [DSP], the next screen appears. If you press [DSP] in the last screen

(REF4 or REF5), the REF1 screen appears. To store the point and its offset distance information, press [ENT]. Enter the point name and feature code. You can also use this screen to change the HT value. Sample records CO, 2pt-Ref Pt:16 & Pt:13 Az:311.2932 CO, Sta= -12.6876 Offset= 1.3721 dZ= 0.0971 SS,17,1.0000,6.9202,18.4700,80.3120,15:48:48,2REF-LINE 72 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Measuring distance and offset values on the arc-curve 1. Press [2] or select Arc RefLine in the Programs menu. Applications 4 2. Enter the start of the curve point (P1) and the azimuth of its tangent line (AZ1). 3. To enter P1 by direct measurement, press the MSR softkey. 4. Choose a method to define the arc. P2 can be any point on the tangent line that is to exit the curve. 5. In the radius (Rad) field, enter a positive value for a clockwise curve. Enter a negative value for a counterclockwise curve. When all factors have been entered, the instrument calculates the curve. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 73 4 Applications If the curve length (Len) is too large for a circle of the given radius, it is shortened. To ... switch between display screens change HT record points Press ...

[DSP]

[HOT]

[ENT]

Using [DSP] to switch between display screens Press [DSP] to switch between the Stakeout display screens. The following screens are available:

ARC1 ARC3 ARC4 ARC2 X Y Z HA VA SD HA VD HD Sta O/S dZ ARC5 HD VD SD The ARC5 screen is only available if the secondary distance unit is set. For more information, see Others settings, page 112. Every time you press [DSP], the next screen appears. If you press [DSP] in the last screen

(ARC4 or ARC5), the ARC1 screen appears. To record the point, press [ENT] on any observation screen. The arc is stored in comment records. Sample records CO,Arc P1:583 AZ1=0.0000 P2:102 CO, AZ2=311.2932 Radius=50.0000 Length=125.6637 CO, Sta= -12.6876 Offset= 1.3721 dZ= 0.0971 SS,17,1.0000,6.9202,18.4700,80.3120,15:48:48,2REF-LINE 74 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Remote distance measurement This function measures the horizontal distance, vertical distance, and slope distance between two points. Applications 4 2nd sighting point rVD 1st sighting point rSD rHD Horizontal angle 0 direction 2nd sighting point rHA 1st sighting point Station point rSD rHD rVD rV%

rGD rAZ Slope distance between two points Horizontal distance between two points Vertical distance between two points Percentage of grade (rVD/rHD) 100%

Vertical grade (rHD/rVD) :1 Azimuth from first point to second point Measuring between the current and the first point measured 1. To enter the RDM (Radial) function, press [3] or select RDM(Radial) in the Programs menu. 2. Sight the first point and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. The distance from the station point to the first point appears. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 75 4 Applications 3. Sight the second point and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. The distances between the first and second point are displayed. Slope distance between two points Vertical distance between two points Horizontal distance between two points rSD rVD rHD 4. To change display screens, press [DSP]. rAZ rV%

rGD Azimuth from first point to second point Percentage of grade (rVD/rHD) 100%

Vertical grade (rHD/rVD) :1 5. To record the distance and angle information as a comment record, press [ENT] in the 1/2 or 2/2 observation screen. Default point numbers are displayed. You can change these point numbers. To record a note, press [ENT] in the To field. Data that you save in RDM functions is stored in RM records. For more information, see RM records, page 116. When you download data in Nikon RAW format, they are output as comment (CO) records. Measuring between the current point and the immediately preceding point 1. To enter the RDM (Continuous) function, press

[4] or select RDM(Cont.)in the Programs menu. Follow the procedure as for a radial RDM measurement. For more information, see Measuring between the current and the first point measured, page 75. 2. 76 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Applications 4 Difference between 1:Cont. and 2:Radial P3 P4 P3 P4 P2 P1 P2 P1 1:Cont.

(The preceding two points are subject to calculation.) 2:Radial.

(Calculations are made with reference to the first point.) Measuring remote elevation Arbitrary point Sighting point A prism is required only at the sighting

(target) point Station point 1. To enter the Remote Elevation Measurement function, press [5] or select REM in the Programs menu. 2. Enter the height of target. 3. Sight the target point and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 77 4 Applications 4. Loosen the vertical clamp, and turn the telescope to aim at an arbitrary point. The difference in elevation (Vh) appears. You can use an REM measurement to update the height of target. Take a measurement to the prism, sight the bottom of the prism pole, and press [ENT]. Measuring distance and offset values on the vertical plane Baseline 1. To enter the 2-Pt Reference Plane function, press

[6] or select V-Plane in the Programs menu. 2. Enter two points to define the plane. To enter the point by direct measurement, press the MsrPT softkey. When you press the MSR softkey, a temporary observation screen appears. Press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. The Record PT screen appears. 3. 4. Enter a value in the PT and CD fields. Press [ENT]. 78 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 5. Enter the second point on the vertical plane. Press [ENT]. Applications 4 Once the plane is defined, the calculated Sta and dZ values are updated as you move the telescope. No distance measurement is required. Sta Horizontal distance from P1 to the target point along the baseline Vertical distance from P1 to the target point dZ Using [DSP] to switch between display screens Press [DSP] to switch between the plane display screens. The following screens are available:

PLN1 PLN2 PLN3 Sta dZ X Y Z HA VA Every time you press [DSP], the next screen appears. If you press [DSP] in the last screen

(PLN3), the PLN1 screen appears. To record the point, press [ENT] on any screen (V-

PLN1/3 to V-PLN3/3). Enter PT and CD. Then press [ENT]. Sample records CO,Vertical Ref Plane Pt1:516-A1 Pt2:530 CO,Sta=68.021 dz=17.459 SS,30123-A48,1.5480,16.4020,40.4720,89.0730,14:22:47, Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 79 4 Applications Measuring distance and offset values on the slope P2

(X2,Y2,Z2) Stn b a Target

(X,Y,Z) P3

(X3,Y3,Z3) P1

(X1,Y1,Z1) 1. To enter the 3-Pt Reference Plane function, press

[7] or select S-Plane in the Programs menu. 2. Enter three points to define the slope plane. To enter the point by direct measurement, press the MSR softkey. If you press [ENT] in a blank field, an input screen for temporary coordinates appears. These coordinates will not be stored. When you have entered the temporary coordinates, <Keyed-in XYZ> appears instead of the PT name. If the plane is defined by two points (by selecting 2Pt), the vertical plane is the same as the plane used in the V-Pln function, but the indicating factors are Sta and dZ, not a and b. For more information, see Measuring distance and offset values on the vertical plane, page 78. 80 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Applications 4 Once the plane is defined, the calculated a and b values are updated as you move the telescope. No distance measurement is required. Distance between P1 and the point that is perpendicular to the target point along the P1-

P2 line Length of the perpendicular line from the target point to the P1-P2 line a b Using [DSP] to switch between display screens Press [DSP] to switch between the plane display screens. The following screens are available:

PLN1 PLN2 PLN3 a b X Y Z HA VA Every time you press [DSP], the next screen appears. If you press [DSP] in the last screen

(PLN3), the PLN1 screen appears. To record the point, press [ENT] on any screen

(S-PLN1/3 to S-PLN3/3). Enter PT and CD. Then press [ENT]. Sample records CO,3ptPlane P1:1062 P2:2902 P3:1547 CO,a=31.497 b=14.239 SS,30123-A49,1.6110,0.0000,234.3210,86.0955,16:07:18, Recording Measurement Data Recording data from any observation screen To record points on observation screens, press [ENT]. PT defaults to the last recorded PT + 1. You can enter the PT name from the point list or the point stack. For more information, see Entering a point from the point list, page 42, and Entering a point from the stack, page 42. You can also use the code list or the code stack. For more information, see Entering a code from the code list, page 43, and Entering a code from the stack, page 43. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 81 4 Applications To record the point, press [ENT] on the last field. When recording sideshots, stakeout records and control shots from the Rept function, you can choose to store raw data only, XYZ data only, or both. For more information, see Recording, page 112. If HA or VA is moved after you take a measurement but before you press [ENT], the angle recorded is the angle shown when [ENT] is pressed. In an angle-only record, SD is always recorded as 0.0000. If the point name that you want to record already exists in the job, an error message appears. Depending on the type of existing record, you can overwrite the old record with the new data. For more information, see Recording Data, page 173. Hold down [ENT] for one second to record the measurement as a CP record. Outputting data to the COM port If you press [ENT] while the [COM] icon appears in an observation screen, a line of data is output to the COM port. Note If [COM] appears, data is not stored to the job when you press [ENT]. The format of the output data is defined by the setting of the Ext.Comm field in MENU > Settings >

Comm. For more information, see Communications, page 111. To output data on the COM port when you press [ENT], set the Data Rec field in MENU > Settings > Rec to COM. For more information, see Recording, page 112. 82 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Sample output records through COM port When the Ext.Comm field is set to NIKON:

TR PN: PT8 SD:000066626 HA:003856010 VA:008048500 HT:0000061757

(TR PN: point name SD HA VA HT; when ACK is returned, PN is incremented.) Applications 4 When the Ext.Comm field is set to SET:

0006662 0804806 0394324 97

(SD VA HA Chk-SUM) Measuring Offsets Measuring taped offsets 1. To enter the taped offset function, press [1] or select Tape in the Offset menu. If you have not taken a distance measurement before entering this function, a temporary measurement screen appears. Sight the target and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. 2. 3. Enter offset distances from the measured point. Use [^] or [v] to move to the appropriate offset field. Left (-) Up (+) Out (+) Down (-) Right (+) In (-) Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 83 4 Applications You can enter any combination of taped offset distances to specify the point. 4. To go to the recording PT screen, press [ENT] in the last field. The calculated coordinates are shown. 5. Enter a PT (and CD) value. 6. Press [ENT] to record the point. Raw data is also recalculated, based on the taped offset value. Measuring angle offsets 1. To enter the angle offset function, press [2] or select Angle in the Offset menu. If you have not taken a distance measurement before entering this function, a temporary measurement screen appears. Sight the target and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. 2. 3. To take the angle offset, rotate the alidade and telescope. The measured distance (HD) remains unchanged. 4. To record the offset point, press [ENT] or the OK softkey. The XYZ data is also recalculated, based on the new angle. You can record an angle offset in the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS). After taking a distance measurement, rotate the alidade and/or telescope. Then press [ENT] to record the measured distance with the updated angle value. If you use this method, the dimension of the angle offset is not stored as a CO record. To store the CO record, use the O/S function. 84 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Applications 4 Two-prism pole 1. To enter the two-prism pole function, press [3] or select 2Prism Pole in the Offset menu. 2. Sight the first prism and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. 3. Sight the second prism and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. 4. Enter the distance between the second prism and the target point. Alternatively, if you do not need QA information, you can leave the distance between the first and the second prism blank. 5. If you do enter a P1-P2 distance, the QA screen appears. Compare the entered value and the measured distance to check the accuracy of the observation. 6. To record the point, press [ENT] or the OK softkey. Sample records SS,14,0.0000,38.9200,271.0350,89.2630,11:04:15,DITCH CO,2Prism O/S: P1-P2= 0.5090( 0.5060) P2-Tgt= 0.5020 Note In this sample data, 0.5090 is the measured value. 0.5060 is the entered value. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 85 4 Applications Extending a line by horizontal angle offset 1. To enter the line extension (by HA) function, press [4] or select +Line by HA in the Offset menu. 2. Sight the first prism (or target) and press [MSR1]

or [MSR2]. The display moves to the next screen. 3. Sight the second prism (or target) and press

[MSR1] or [MSR2]. 4. Sight the alternative place on the same vertical line as the required target point. 5. To calculate the coordinates and the raw data of the target point, press [ENT]. 6. To record the point, enter a PT (and CD) value and press [ENT]. The height of target is fixed to 0.0000 for the offset point. Sample records SS, 40, 0.0000, 48.3304, 169.20370, 82.02470, 10:52:37 CO, PT1, 0.0000, 48.3020,169.19165, 83.58565 CO, PT2, 0.0000, 48.3155,168.54250, 85.42440 CO, O/S MSR:40 0.0000 0.0000 169.20370 87.02340 86 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Applications 4 The calculated point (TGT) is stored as a SS record. Measurements to the first and second target (P1 and P2) are stored as comment records (PT1 and PT2). The last record records the angle measurement to the ALT (vertically offset point from the actual target point). Entering a horizontal distance after an angle-only shot This function is useful when the instrument is very close to the point and it is difficult to take a measurement using the EDM. 1. To enter the Input HD function, press [5] or select Input HD in the Offset menu. 2. Turn the telescope in the direction of the point that you want to store. 3. Enter the HD. Usually this is the taped distance from the instrument point. 4. Enter a PT (and CD) value and press [ENT]. The target point is calculated and recorded as an SS record. Sample records SS,158,0.0000,77.0518,62.08380,108.06510,11:51:48, CO, Input HD:76.1243 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 87 4 Applications Calculating a corner point 1. To enter the corner point function, press [6] or select Corner in the Offset menu. 2. Take a distance measurement to the first prism

(or target) on the wall. Press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. 3. Sight a second point on the same wall with the first point measurement. Press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. 4. Sight the first point on the second wall. Press

[MSR1] or [MSR2]. 5. 6. If the two walls are at right angles, press the Calc softkey to calculate the corner point by three points. If you take a measurement to a fourth point, the corner point can be calculated as the intersection of two walls (P1-P2 and P3-P4). The default elevation is given by P4. 7. Enter a PT (and CD) value. The height of target

(HT) defaults to the value used in the last measurement. To record the corner point, press [ENT]. 8. 88 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Applications 4 Sample records SS, 58, 0.0000, 48.3304, 169.19165, 82.02470, 10:52:37, FLOOR2 CO, PT1, 1.0080, 48.3020,169.19165, 83.58565 CO, PT2, 1.0080, 48.3155,128.54250, 85.42440 CO, O/S MSR:40 0.0000 0.0000 169.20370 87.02340 The calculated corner point is stored as an SS record. The next three or four comment records are measured points. For example:

CO, Point name (fixed to PT1, PT2 etc.), HT, SD, HA, VA. Measuring circle offsets 1. To enter the circle center calculation function, press [7] or select Circle in the Offset menu. If you have not taken a measurement to the circle before entering this function, a temporary measurement screen appears. 2. Sight any point on the surface of the circle and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. If you use a prism attached to the surface of the circle for the distance measurement, press the +SD softkey to eliminate the offset error (from the attached point to the measured surface of the prism) before you press [ENT]. 3. Sight one edge of the circle and press [ENT]. If you have taken a distance measurement to the center of the circle, press the Calc softkey to calculate the offset using one edge angle observation. 4. Sight the other edge of the circle and press [ENT]. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 89 4 Applications The instrument calculates and records the center of the circle. It also calculates the coordinates of the center point and the radius of the circle. 5. To record the point, press [ENT] or the OK softkey. Sample records SS,71,1.5000,37.0518,32.08380,81.06510,11:51:48, CO, PT1, 0.0000, 0.0000,47.05350, 83.58560 CO, PT2, 0.0000, 0.0000, 29.53010, 83.58560 CO,O/S MSR:71 1.5555 36.5418 38.28360 81.06510 CO,Radius of circle 0.356 CO,Input +SD:0.0020 The calculated point (center of the circle) is stored as an SS record. The following one or two comment records are angle-measured points. For example:

CO, Point name (fixed to PT1/ PT2), HT(0.0000), SD(0.0000), HA, VA. If you press the +SD softkey before you sight Edge1, the input value is recorded at the end. Extending the slope distance 1. To enter the function for extending the slope distance, press [8] or select Input dSD in the Offset menu. If you have not taken a distance measurement before entering this function, a temporary measurement screen appears. 2. Enter the slope distance that you need to add or subtract. You can enter any value from 99.990 through +99.990 m (328.000 through

+328.000 ft). 3. To record the point, press [ENT]. Sample records SS,83,1.5000,77.0518,62.08380,81.06510,11:51:48, CO,O/S MSR:83 1.5555 76.5518 62.08380 81.06510 90 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual

Menu Key In this chapter:

Introduction

Job Manager

Cogo

Settings

Data

Communication

1sec-Keys

Calibration

Time C H A P T E R5 5 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 91 5 Menu Key Introduction Use the MENU screen to access important functions and settings. To display the MENU screen, press the [MENU] key. Job Manager Use the job manager to open, create, delete, and manage jobs. To open the Job Manager, press [1] or select Job on the MENU screen. If there are jobs stored on the instrument, the job list appears, showing all the stored jobs. The newest job appears at the top of the list. If there are no jobs stored, the Create Job screen appears. See Creating a new job, page 93. Opening an existing job The job list shows all the jobs stored on the instrument, in descending date order. The following symbols may be used to provide extra information about jobs:

Symbol

Meaning Current job. Control job. Some of the job settings are different from the current job. Job was created in an older DB. Older files cannot be opened in version 1.10 or later of the software. Press [^] or [v] to move up or down the job list. Press [ENT] to open the highlighted job. When you open a job, all job settings are automatically changed to match those used in the open job. 92 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Creating a new job 1. Press the Creat softkey in the job list. Menu Key 5 2. Enter a job name of up to eight characters. Press

[ENT]. 3. Do one of the following:

To check the job settings, press the Sett softkey. To create a new job using the current job settings, press [ENT] or the OK softkey. Job settings The following settings are set when a job is created, and cannot be changed. This ensures that the data in a job is correctly stored in the database, and that all necessary corrections are applied when you store each record. Scale Factor T-P correction Sea Level C&R correction 0.999600 to 1.000400 ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF/0.132/0.200 Angle unit Distance unit Temp unit Press unit DEG/GON/MIL Metre/US-Ft/I-Ft C/F hPa/mmHg/inHg If you select US-Ft or I-Ft, an additional settings screen appears. Use this screen to specify whether to display values in Decimal-Ft or Ft-Inch. VA zero AZ zero Order HA Zenith/Horizon/Compass North/South NEZ/ENZ Azimuth/0 to BS Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 93 5 Menu Key To move between fields, press [^] or [v]. Alternatively, to move to the next field, press

[ENT]. To change the setting in the selected field, press [<] or [>]. To confirm the job settings and create the job, press [ENT] in the last field (HA). These settings are separate from other temporary settings. Deleting a job B Tip There is no undelete function in the Job Manager. Before you press [ENT] or select DEL, make sure that the selected job is the one that you want to delete. 1. In the job list, highlight the job that you want to delete. 2. Press the DEL softkey. A confirmation screen appears. 3. Do one of the following:

To delete the selected job, press [ENT] or the DEL softkey. To cancel the deletion and return to the previous screen, press [ESC] or the Abrt softkey. After you delete a job, the display returns to the job list. Setting the control job If you search for a point when a control job is specified, and the system cannot find the point in the current job, the control job is also searched. If the point is found in the control job, it is copied to the current job as a UP record. A control job has the same format as a standard job. You can open and modify it like any other job, and you can use it to record any measured data. To set the control job:

1. Highlight the job that you want to use. 2. Press the Ctrl softkey. 94 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 A confirmation screen appears. 3. Do one of the following:

To set the selected job as the control job, press [ENT] or the Yes softkey. To cancel the process, press [ESC] or the No softkey. If a control job is already assigned, the newly assigned control job replaces it as the control job. To clear the control job selected, highlight the current control job in the job list and press the Ctrl softkey. Then press [ENT] or the Yes softkey to confirm. Displaying job Information To display job information, highlight the job name and then press the Info softkey. The Information screen shows the number of records in the job, the free space, and the date when the job was created. Free space indicates how many points can be stored in the job. To return to the job list, press any key. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 95 5 Menu Key Cogo Use the Cogo menu to perform coordinate geometry

(COGO) calculations. You can access this menu at any time from any observation or PT input screen. To open the Cogo menu, press [2] or select Cogo on the MENU screen. Calculating angle and distance between two coordinates To open the Inverse menu, press [1] or select Inverse in the Cogo menu. PT-PT inverse PT-PT calculates the distance and the angle between two input points. To calculate a PT-PT inverse:

1. Press [1] or select PT-PT in the Inverse menu. 2. Enter the first point number or name. Press [ENT]. If you press [ENT] without entering a point name, a coordinate input screen appears, and you can enter coordinates. These coordinates are not stored to the database. If you want to store the point, specify a new point name. 3. Type the second point number/name and press

[ENT]. The MSR softkey allows you to shoot the point on the spot to use it in the calculation. The azimuth, horizontal distance, and vertical distance from the first point to the second point are displayed. 96 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 4. Do one of the following:

To return to the PT input screen, press [ESC]. To return to the COGO menu, press [ENT]. To change the contents of the result screen, press [DSP]. Grade (HD/VD) 100/Gd Slope distance PT1 to PT2 Gd V%

rSD 3Pt angle The 3Pt Angle function calculates the angle between two lines defined by three points. To calculate a 3Pt angle:

1. Press [2] or select 3Pt Angle in the Inverse menu. P1 is the base point. Two lines are to be defined by P2 and P3, both from P1. 2. Enter the point name, or use the MSR softkey to take a measurement to the point. 3. Enter the second point (P2) to define the baseline (P1-P2). The angle (dHA) is measured from the baseline. 4. Enter the third point (P3) to define the second line (P1-P3). When you press the MSR softkey, a temporary measuring screen appears. Sight the target and press [MSR1] or

[MSR2] to take a measurement. After the measurement, a recording point screen appears. To store the measured point, enter the PT, HT, and CD values and press [ENT]. To use the point without recording it, press [ESC]. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 97 5 Menu Key When you have entered three points, the instrument calculates the angle and distances. 5. Do one of the following:

To return to the Inverse menu, press [ENT]. To return to the Input BasePt screen, press

[ESC]. Calculating and manually inputting coordinates To enter the Input menu, press [2] or select Input in the Cogo menu. There are three functions in this menu for recording new coordinate points. Azimuth+HD input To calculate a coordinate by an angle and distance input from the base point (P1), press [1] or select AZ+HD in the Input menu. Enter the base point (P1). Type the point name and press [ENT]. Enter the azimuth, horizontal distance, and vertical distance. Then press [ENT]. To enter 12345'45", type 123.4545 and press [ENT]. If you do not enter a value in the dVD field, the value 0.000 is used. A recording point screen with the calculated coordinates appears. PT defaults to the last recorded PT + 1. Press [ENT] to store the point. 98 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 Traverse To open the Traverse (2Pt Angle) function, press [2] or select Traverse in the Input menu. Traverse function calculates a new point based on the two defined points and angle, horizontal and vertical distances from the line defined by those two points. To enter P1 and P2, enter point names or take measurements to targets. Enter the plus-minus angle, horizontal distance, and vertical distance from the baseline defined by P1-P2. If you do not enter a value in the dVD field, the value 0.000 is used. When you press [ENT] in the dVD field, a new point is calculated. The PT name defaults to the last recorded PT + 1. To record the new point and return to the point input screen, press [ENT]. P1 (base PT) defaults to the previously recorded PT. P2 defaults to the previous P1. To continuously calculate a new point, enter +Ang, HD, and dVD from the previous bearing line. This is a convenient way to enter Traverse points. Entering coordinates To manually enter the XYZ coordinates, press [3] or select Input XYZ in the Input menu. The PT name defaults to the last recorded PT + 1. Enter the coordinates using the numeric keys. To move to the next field, press [ENT] or [v] in a field Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 99 5 Menu Key To store the point as an MP record and return to the point input screen, press [ENT] in the Z field. The default PT is incremented to the next value. You can record NE, NEZ, or Z-only data to the database. Calculating area and perimeter To calculate an area or perimeter, press [3] or select Area & Perim in the Cogo menu. To take a measurement, enter the first point and press

[ENT], or press the MSR softkey. In the upper right corner of the screen, a counter indicates how many points you have entered. To input point numbers consecutively, use the Fr/To softkey. For more information, see Advanced feature:

Entering a range of points, page 101. If you enter a new point name, you can enter new coordinates and record the point. If you do not want to record the point, press [ENT] without entering a value in the PT field. An XY coordinate input screen appears. Continue to enter points until you have defined all the points in the lot. Then, press [v] to calculate the area and perimeter. The first and last points that you enter are joined to close the area. You must enter the points in the order in which they define the lot. You can enter up to 99 points. Press [ENT] to store the calculated values as a a comment record, or press [ESC] to return to the Cogo menu. 100 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual If you chose to store the area, enter a name to identify the area and then press [ENT]. Menu Key 5 When you download data in Nikon RAW format, area (AR) records are output as comment (CO) records. Advanced feature: Entering a range of points To quickly enter a sequential range of points, use the range input function. To access this function, press the Fr/To softkey in the No. 01 or No. 02 input screens. Enter the start point name in the Fr field and the end point name in the To field. You can include letters and hyphens in the point names, but the last character must be numeric. Press [ENT] in To field to start searching for matching points. The counter shows the number of matching points found. When the search is complete, you are returned to the Input PT screen. Press the Calc softkey to calculate the area and perimeter, or enter point names in the PT field. Press [ESC] to return to the Input PT screen with the preceding point name. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 101 5 Menu Key Calculating coordinates from line and offset To enter the Line & offset function, press [4] or select Line & O/S in the Cogo menu. Enter the base point (P1). Specify the azimuth bearing. To do this, enter a value in the AZ or P2 field. P2 is a second point on the line. Enter the horizontal distance along the baseline (Sta), the horizontal distance perpendicular to the line (O/S), and the vertical distance (dVD). A negative value in the Sta field means the opposite direction along the defined bearing line. A negative value in the O/S field is for the left-hand side of the bearing line. To calculate the coordinates of the point (PM), press

[ENT] in the dVD field. You can change the Z coordinate here. To record the point, press [ENT] in the CD field. 102 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual The coordinates are stored as a CC record. Line definition information and Sta, O/S, and dVD values are stored in comment (CO) records. Menu Key 5 Calculating coordinates using intersection functions To enter the Intersection menu, press [3] or select Intersection in the Cogo menu. There are four functions in this menu for calculating coordinates. Calculating a bearing-bearing intersection A bearing-bearing intersection is the intersection point of two lines. 1. To calculate a bearing-bearing intersection, press [1] or select Brng-Brng in the Intersection menu. 2. Enter the first point name and press [ENT]. Alternatively, to measure directly to the point, press the MSR softkey. 3. Define the first line by azimuth. 4. To define the line by two points, press the Pts softkey. The Fr field defaults to the P1 point, but you can change the selected point. In the To field, enter or measure to the second point. For more information about the O/S softkey, see Advanced feature: Entering angle and distance offsets, page 107. 5. Do one of the following:

To return to the previous screen, press [ESC]. The calculated value appears in the AZ field. To go to the next screen, press [ENT]. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 103 5 Menu Key 6. Define the second line by two points or by P2 and AZ. 7. To calculate the coordinates of the intersection point, press [ENT] in the AZ field. The calculated coordinates are displayed. You can input a Z coordinate if necessary. 8. Enter a value in the PT field and in the CD field. 9. To record the point, press [ENT]. Sample records CO,Int BB P1:P10 AZ:330.54175-90.00000 CO, P2:408 AZ:100.0000+0.0000 CC,A123,,4567.3080,200.1467,-1.2056,POT Calculating a bearing-distance intersection 1. Press [2] or select Brng-Dist in the Intersection menu. Brng-Dist calculates the intersection point formed by one line and one distance (radius). 2. Enter a point on the line. The line can be defined by two points or by a point and an azimuth. 3. Enter the second point (P2) as the center of the circle. 104 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 4. Enter the distance from P2. To define the distance (HD) by two points, press the Pts softkey. To calculate the coordinates of the intersection point, press [ENT] in the HD field. 5. If there are two results, the first solution appears graphically relative to the P1-P2 line. To display the second solution, press [<] or [>]. 6. To record the point, press [ENT] when the required solution appears. 7. Enter a Z coordinate if necessary. 8. To move to the PT and CD fields, press [ENT]. Sample records CO,Int BD P1:4672 AZ:330.54175+0.00000 CO, P2:71 HD:100.0000 CC,504,,-839.3065,347.6682,,SIGN Calculating a distance-distance intersection 1. 2. Enter the first point name and press [ENT], or Press [3] or select Dist-Dist in the Intersection menu. press the MSR softkey to measure directly to the point. 3. Enter the distance from P1 and press [ENT]. 4. To define the distance (HD) by two points, press the Pts softkey. 5. Enter P2 and the distance from P2 (HD). 6. To calculate the coordinates of the intersection point, press [ENT] in the HD field. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 105 5 Menu Key Press [<] or [>] to display the second solution. 7. 8. To record the point, press [ENT] when the required solution appears. 9. Enter a Z coordinate if necessary. Press [ENT] to move to the PT and CD fields. Sample records CO,Int DD P1:486 HD:330.6020 CO, P2:7 HD:100.0000 CC,505,,236.5817,50.0461,0.0000, Calculating a point-line intersection 1. 2. Enter the first point name and press [ENT], or Press [4] or select Pt-Line in the Intersection menu. press the MSR softkey to measure directly to the point. 3. Enter the azimuth, or press the Pts softkey to enter another point name on the line. 4. Enter the perpendicular point to the line, or press the MSR softkey to take a measurement to the point. 5. To calculate the coordinates of the intersection point, press [ENT]. If P1 and P2 are 3D points, the Z coordinate of the perpendicular point is calculated relative to the P1-P2 slope. 6. Enter PT and CD then press [ENT] to record the point. Sample records CO,Int PtLine P1:38 AZ:90.00000+0.00000 CO, P2:506 CC,A-123,,4567.3080,200.1467,-1.2056,POT 106 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 Advanced feature: Entering angle and distance offsets To display the offset input screen, press the O/S softkey. In the Ang field, enter a positive value to rotate the line clockwise. Enter a negative value to rotate the line counterclockwise. In the O/S field, enter a positive value to specify an offset to the right. Enter a negative value to specify an offset to the left. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 107 5 Menu Key Settings To display the Settings menu, press [2] or select Settings on the MENU screen. Use this menu to configure the initial job settings. Some job settings, specified in the following sections, cannot be changed once a job is created. If any of these settings are changed while a job is open, a confirmation screen appears, asking you to create a new job with the new settings, or to work with those settings without recording any data. For more information, see Settings, page 174. Angle To open the Angle menu, press [1] or select Angle in the Settings menu. VA zero Zenith/Horizon/Compass The VA zero job setting cannot be changed once a job is created. Resolution HA 1"/5"/10" or 0.2 mgon/1 mgon/2 mgon 0 to BS/Azimuth The HA job setting cannot be changed once a job is created. When this field is set to Azimuth, the horizontal angle (HA) that appears and recorded is in Azimuth value. When this field is set to 0 to BS, HA is in HA zero to BS value. 108 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 Distance To open the Distance menu, press [2] or select Distance in the Settings menu Numeric value between 0.999600 and 1.000400 Scale T-P corr. ON/OFF Sea Level ON/OFF C&R corr. OFF/0.132/0.200 The Scale, T-P corr., Sea Level, and C&R corr. job settings cannot be changed once a job is created. Temperature and Pressure corrections K

275 10000.0

106 P

13.5951 980.665

273 T+

SD'

1

+ K

1000000

SD SD SD'

K P T Slope dist. (before adj.) Slope dist. (after adj.) Compensation coefficient Pressure (hPa) Temperature (C) Sea Level correction HD'

HD Re

Re ZSTN

HD HD'

ZSTN Re Horizontal dist. (before adj.) Horizontal dist. (after adj.) Instrument-Z 6370 km Curvature and Refraction correction Because the surface of the earth is curved, the vertical difference (VD and Z) at the measurement point, as referenced to the horizontal plane, inevitably includes some error. This error is called curvature error. Also, because the density of the air Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 109 5 Menu Key surrounding the earth decreases with altitude, light is refracted at different rates at different altitudes. The error caused by this change in refraction is called refraction error. Curvature error (A A') Refraction error (A A1') A' Horizontal direction P A O A1'

A1 A'

P HD HD VD VD'

SD VA Re k Horizontal dist. (before adj.) Horizontal dist. (after adj.) Vertical dist. (before adj.) Vertical dist. (after adj.) Slope distance Vertical angle 6370 km C&R constant (0.132 or 0.200) HD SD2 2VA(

k

----------------------------------- 1

2 sin 2Re

) VD HD2

----------- 1 2Re

k(

) HD'

VD'

Coordinate To open the Coordinate menu, press [3] or select Coord. in the Settings menu. Order Label NEZ/ENZ XYZ/YXZ/NEZ(ENZ) North/South AZ The Order and AZ job settings cannot be changed once a job is created. Power saving To open the Power Save menu, press [4] or select PwrSave in the Settings menu. Main Unit OFF/5min/10min/30min EDM Unit OFF/At once/0.1min/0.5min/3min/10min Sleep OFF/1min/3min/5min 110 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 Communications To open the Communication menu, press [5] or select Comm. in the Settings menu. Ext.Comm NIKON/SET Port Baud Length Parity Stop bit Serial/Bluetooth (*) 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400 bps 7/8 EVEN/ODD/NONE 1/2

(*) Port selection field appears only when the optional Bluetooth is on-board. Stakeout Press [6] or select Stakeout in the Settings menu to open the Stakeout menu. Add PT

. Integer between 1 and 999,999 This field sets the default point number to record observed data in stakeout. Unit To open the Unit menu, press [7] or select Unit in the Settings menu. Angle DEG (Degree) GON (GON) MIL (Mil6400) Meter/US-Ft/I-F Distance If you select US-Ft or I-Ft, an additional settings screen appears. Use this screen to specify whether to display values in Decimal-Ft or Ft-Inch. Temp Press C (Celsius) F (Fahrenheit) hPa/mmHg/inHg The Angle, Distance, Temp, and Press job settings cannot be changed once a job is created. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 111 5 Menu Key Recording To open the Rec menu, press [8] or select Angle in the Settings menu. Store DB RAW/XYZ/RAW+XYZ This setting determines whether raw and/or coordinate data is stored when you record SS, CP, or SO records in the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) or Stakeout screen. Internal/COM Set this field to COM to output data on the COM port when you press [ENT] in the BMS or a Stakeout screen. The data is not stored to the job file. For more information, see Outputting data to the COM port, page 82 Data Rec Others settings To open the Others menu, press [9] or select Others in the Settings menu. XYZ disp Fast/Norm/Slow/+ENT Defines speed to move to the next screen after showing XYZ of the input PT None/Meter/US-Ft/I-Ft When the Secondary unit is set to a unit, an extra display screen is available in the BMS, stakeout observation screens, and 2-pt reference line screens. The extra screen shows the HD, VD, and SD in the secondary unit. 2nd Unit If you select US-Ft or I-Ft, an additional settings screen appears. Use this screen to specify whether to display values in Decimal-Ft or Ft-Inch. Split ST No/Yes Select Yes to separate the point numbers of station points from other record type point numbers If you set the Split ST field to Yes, an additional setting screen appears. Use this screen to specify the starting ST number. 112 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 CD Input Language ABC/123 Sets the default input mode when a CD field appears. Select a language from the list. Press [<] / [>] to open the select language screen. Press [^] / [v] to move the cursor to the desired language, and press [ENT] to select it. Reboot confirmation screen appears. Press [ENT] and re-start the instrument, and the selected language will be available. Owners Detail Up to 20 characters. Enter your name or the name of your company. If you enter a value in this field, it appears at start-up. B Tip To provide easier configuration for common regional settings, you can quickly configure the Nikon total station to a pre-set combination of default regional settings. For more information, see Changing Regional Configuration Pre-sets, page 25. B Tip The Nikon total station supports up to 3 languages on the instrument. For more information on changing the language settings, see page 113. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 113 5 Menu Key Data Use the Data menu to view or edit records. To display the Data menu, press [4] on the MENU screen. Viewing records You can view data at any time, even in an observation screen or while entering points. Viewing raw data To show the raw data records in a list, press [1] on the Data menu screen. When you first view the raw data, the last four raw records in the current job are displayed. Use [^] or [v] to scroll through the records. To see detailed information for the selected records, press [ENT]. To return to the record list, press [ESC]. SS, CP, F1 records Raw SS, CP and F1 records contain PT, HT, CD, HA, VA, and SD fields. SS records are sideshots (topo shots). All shots from the Basic Measurement Screen

(BMS) are stored as SS records. CP records are shots taken in the Angle or Repeat menus, or in the BMS. For more information, see Recording a foresight point after repeat angle measurement, page 52, and Recording data from any observation screen, page 81. When the Store DB setting is set to RAW+XYZ, press [DSP] to switch between the first screen (showing HA, VA, SD, PT, and HT) and the second screen (showing X, Y, Z, PT, and CD). Coordinates are not available in F1 records. When you take more than one measurement to the same point and choose to overwrite the XYZ data, the old raw record becomes raw data only. As a result, only one SS(RAW) record keeps its corresponding SS(XYZ) record. Other SS(RAW) records to the same point no longer have coordinates available. 114 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 ST records ST (station) records contain ST, HI, BS, and AZ fields. Press [DSP] to switch between the first screen (showing ST, HI, BS, and AZ) and the second screen (showing X, Y, Z, PT, and CD). When you assign a new ST point name in MENU > Stn Setup > Quick, the coordinates of the station is recorded as (0, 0, 0). SO records SO records are stakeout shots. These are shots recorded in stakeout functions. When the Store DB setting is set to RAW+XYZ, press [DSP] to switch between the first screen (showing HA, VA, SD, PT, and HT), the second screen (showing X, Y, Z, PT, and CD), and the third screen (showing dX, dY, dZ, PT, and CD). The dX, dY, and dZ fields store the difference between the stakeout shots actual position and its planned position. These fields are downloaded as comment records in Nikon RAW format. CO records A CO record is a comment added to the job from the system. For example, when you change the Stn-Z using the Remote Benchmark function, or you reset the horizontal angle using the BSCheck function, the system writes a comment record. When you input a Stn-XYZ by Base-XYZ function, the recorded station appears as a comment record. SY records When you complete a station setup, a SY record is stored. This record contains the Temperature, Pressure, and Prism Constant values. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 115 5 Menu Key RM records When you record measurements in RDM (Cont) or RDM (Rad), they are labeled as RM records. Each RM record consists of two screens. Press [DSP] to switch between the first screen (showing From, To, rHD, and rVD) and the second screen

(showing rAZ, rSD, rV%, and rGD). When you download data in Nikon RAW format, RM records are output as comment (CO) records. AR records An AR record stores an area and perimeter calculation. When you download data in Nikon RAW format, AR records are output as comment (CO) records. View coordinate data When you press [2] or select XYZ data in the Data menu, coordinate data appears in a list, with the newest record at the bottom of the screen. Use [^] or [v] to scroll through the records. Use [<] or [>] to move up or down one page. Press [ENT] to see more detailed information about the selected record. The header (XYZ,YXZ,NEZ, or ENZ) depends on the Coord. Label setting in MENU > Settings >

Coord. For more information, see Coordinate, page 110. UP, MP, CC, and RE records All coordinate records contain PT, CD, X, Y, and Z fields. UP records are uploaded point coordinates. MP records are manually input point coordinates. CC records are points calculated in Cogo, and RE records are points calculated in Resection. 116 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 When the Store data setting is set to RAW+XYZ or to XYZ, shots in the BMS (SS records), in various O/S functions (SS records), in 2Pt-RefLine and Arc-RefLine in PRG (SS records) and in some Stakeout functions (SO records) store coordinate records as well. The format of the data is the same as other coordinate records. View records by station To view records by station, press [3] or select ST->SS/SO/CP in the Data menu. A list of all stations appears. Use [^] or [v] to highlight the station name that you want to view. Use [<] or [>] to move up or down one page. To view detailed information about the selected station, press [ENT]. To display all the observation data from the selected station in chronological order, press [ENT] again. Detailed data is as for raw data. For detailed information about each point type and format, see Viewing raw data, page 114. Deleting records Deleting raw records In the RAW screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the record that you want to delete. Then press the DEL softkey. A confirmation screen appears. To delete the selected record, press [ENT] or the Yes softkey. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 117 5 Menu Key If the Store DB setting is set to Both, the system also deletes the corresponding coordinate data when you delete an SS, SO, or CP record. You can also delete raw data by pressing the DEL softkey in the detailed display screen for the record. Deleting coordinate records In the XYZ screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the record that you want to delete. Then press the DEL softkey. A confirmation screen appears. To delete the selected record, press [ENT] or the Yes softkey. To cancel the deletion of data, press [ESC] or the No softkey. You can also delete coordinate data by pressing the DEL softkey in the detailed display screen for the record. If the record that you want to delete is referred by an ST record, a confirmation message appears. Deleting station records In the Station screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the record that you want to delete. Then press the DEL softkey. 118 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 A confirmation screen appears. Press [ENT] or the Yes softkey to delete the selected record. A reconfirmation screen appears. Press the DEL softkey to confirm deletion. There is no undelete function on the instrument. Before you press the DEL softkey, make sure that you have selected the correct station record. You cannot press

[ENT] in this screen. All observations from the station that you selected are deleted. When you delete a ST record in the raw data view or the station data view, all the observation data from the station is also deleted. Editing records For any point record, you can edit the point name (PT), feature code (CD), height of target (HT), height of instrument (HI), backsight point (BS), and backsight azimuth

(AZ). You cannot edit the CD field for SO or F1 records. You cannot edit the HA, VA, or SD values. Editing raw records 1. Do one of the following:

In the RAW screen, highlight the record that you want to edit. Then press the Edit softkey. In the detailed data screen, press the Edit softkey. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 119 5 Menu Key 2. Use [^] or [v] to highlight a field. Then modify the value in the selected field. When you change the HT of an SS, SO, or CP measurement record, its Z coordinate is recalculated. 3. When you press [ENT] on the last line of the edit screen, a confirmation screen appears. 4. Do one of the following:

To accept the changes and return to the data view screen, press [ENT] or the Yes softkey. To return to the edit screen, press [ESC] or the No softkey. Editing coordinate records You can edit PT, CD, and coordinate values in coordinate records. You cannot edit the coordinate record for the current station. 1. Do one of the following:

In the XYZ screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the record that you want to edit. Then press the Edit softkey. In the detailed data screen, press the Edit softkey. 2. Use [^] or [v] to highlight a field. Then modify the value in the selected field. 3. To finish editing, press [ENT] in the CD field. 120 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 A confirmation screen appears. 4. Do one of the following:

To accept the changes and return to the data view screen, press [ENT] or the Yes softkey. To go back to the edit screen, press [ESC] or the No softkey. Editing station records Note The system will not recalculate measurements if you change the station record. All coordinate and raw data observed from an edited station record must be recalculated in your postprocessing software. In the RAW screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the station record that you want to edit. Then press the Edit softkey. You can edit any field in the ST record, but the instrument does not recalculate any measurements from this station. Press [ENT] in the AZ field to confirm the change. If you change the ST or HI values, the coordinates of observation points are not recalculated. A comment record is stored to record the change. The following example shows a comment record for a changed HI value:

CO,HI changed at ST:9012 Old HI= 1.345m If you change the BS or AZ values, raw records are not recalculated. A comment record is stored to record the change. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 121 5 Menu Key Searching records You can search for records by their type, point name, code, or by any combination of these values. Searching raw records In the RAW screen, press the Srch softkey to access the raw data search function. To find a point by name, enter the name in the PT field and press [ENT] twice. You can use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard. For example, when you enter 30* in the PT field, the search matches the points named 300, 301, 302, 3000A2, and 3010. To search by point type, move to the Type field and use [<] or [>] to change the selected point type. The options are ALL, ST, SS, SO, CP, CO, CO(SY), and CO(RDM). If you selected ST, SO or F1 in the Type field, you do not have to enter a value in the CD field. Press [ENT] in the PT field to start the search. If you selected CO, CO(SY), or CO(RDM) in the Type field, you cannot enter a value in the PT or CD fields. Press [ENT] in the Type field to start the search. If more than one point matches the search criteria, the matching points are displayed in a list. Use [^] or [v] to highlight the point you want to use. Then press [ENT] to select it. Detailed data for the selected record appears. Press the DSP softkey to change the fields shown. Press [ESC] to return to the list. 122 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 If no point matches the specified criteria, an error screen appears. Press any key to return to the data screen. Searching coordinate records In the XYZ screen, press the Srch softkey to access the XYZ data search function. To find a coordinate by name, enter the name in the PT field and press [ENT] twice. You can use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard. For example, when you enter 500* in the PT field, the search matches the points named 500, 500-1, 500-A, and 5000. To search by point type, move to the Type field and use [<] or [>] to change the selected point type. The options are ALL, MP, UP, CC, and RE. If more than one point matches the search criteria, the matching points are displayed in a list. Use [^] or [v] to highlight the point you want to use. Press

[ENT] to select it. Detailed data for the selected record appears. Press the DSP softkey to change the fields shown. Press [ESC] to return to the list. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 123 5 Menu Key If no point matches the specified criteria, an error screen appears. Press any key to return to the data screen. Entering coordinates In the XYZ screen, press the Input softkey to display a new input point screen. The PT field defaults to the last recorded PT + 1, but you can change the value shown. Enter the PT and CD and then press [ENT] to enter coordinates. Use the numeric keys to enter the coordinates. Press

[ENT] or [v] in each field to move to the next field. When you press [ENT] in the CD field, the point is stored as an MP record. After you have recording a point, the next point input screen is shown with the updated default PT. You can record NE, NEZ, or Z-only data to the database. Point name list and code list The instrument stores two list files: a list of PT names and a list of CD names. The structure and functionality of these files is the same. The PT name list is useful if you have to handle more than one patterns of point names in the field. For example, you may need to use points named 1, 2, 3 , as well as points named A1, A2, A3 . The code list is a prepared list of feature codes. You can use it to store your own codes. 124 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 Press [4] or select PT name List in the Data menu to open the point name list. Press [5] or select Code list to open the code list. The point or code names and layers are shown in alphabetic order. Use the four softkeys to customize the list. You can store up to 254 points, codes, or layers in each list. Each list entry can be up to 16 characters long. You can use the first character search to find a point, code, or layer in the list. In the list screen, enter the first character of the name you want to find to jump to that part of the list. For more information, see Advanced feature: Searching for a code by using the first character, page 44. Deleting points, codes, or layers In the point or code list, use [^] or [v] to highlight the item you want to delete. Then press the DEL softkey. A confirmation screen appears. Press [ENT] or the Yes softkey to delete the item. Press [ESC] or the No softkey to cancel the deletion. To delete a whole layer, highlight the layer name in the list and press the DEL softkey. All codes and layers in the selected layer are deleted. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 125 5 Menu Key Editing an item in the point list or code list Use [^] or [v] to highlight the item that you want to edit. Then press the Edit softkey. An editing screen appears. For points, the Edit Item screen appears. It contains only the PT field. For codes, the Edit Code screen appears, containing the CD field and the REC field. Edit the text shown and then press [ENT]. A confirmation screen appears. Press [ENT] or the Yes softkey to accept the changes and update the list. Edit code list The Edit Code screen has two fields. The CD field contains the text that appears in the list screen. The REC field is optional. It contains the text that is stored in the job. If you leave the REC field blank, the value in the CD field is used. You can use the REC field to use familiar words or codes on the screen, but store a numeric code in the job. For example, if you set the CD field to MANHOLE and the REC field to 1155, the text MANHOLE appears on the screen, but the code 1155 is stored. If you press the Edit softkey when a layer name appears, only the Lyr field appears. To save changes to the layer name, press [ENT] in the Lyr field. 126 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 Adding a point name In the point list, press the Add softkey to add a new point name to the current layer. Enter a new point name and then press [ENT]. The point name is added to the current layer and the list is updated. Adding a code In the code list, press the Add softkey to add a new feature code to the current layer. Enter the feature code in the CD field. Press [MODE] to change between alphabetic and numeric input mode. You can use the REC field to define a numeric identifier for each feature code. This is optional: If there is a value in the REC field, this value is stored. If you leave the REC field blank, the CD value is stored. Press [ENT] to add the new code and update the code list. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 127 5 Menu Key Adding a layer 1. In the point or code list, press the Layer softkey. 2. Enter the name of the new layer. 3. To change between alphabetic and numeric input mode, press [MODE]. To store the new layer, press

[ENT]. The new layer is added to the list in alphabetic order. Communication Use the Communication menu to download or upload data. To display the Communication menu, press [5] or select Comm. on the MENU screen. Downloading data To go to the download settings screen, press [1] or select Download in the Communication menu. Format Data NIKON SDR2x SDR33 RAW Coordinate To display the total number of records that will be downloaded, press [ENT] in the Data field. 128 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Optional Bluetooth function When the optional Bluetooth is installed, Port selection screen appears when pressing the Comm softkey. Menu Key 5 As each record in the current job is output from the instrument (downloaded), the current line number is updated. After downloading is completed, you can choose to delete the current job. To delete the current job, press [4]. To return to the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS), press [ESC] or the Abrt softkey. Uploading coordinate data To upload coordinate data from a computer, press [2] or select Upload XYZ in the Communication menu. The default data format appears. To change the order of data fields, press the Edit softkey. For more information, see Advanced feature: Editing the data order for upload, page 130. Otherwise, just press [ENT]. Press the Job softkey to go to the Job Manager screen. For more information, see Job Manager, page 92. To change the communication settings, press the Comm softkey. The serial port settings must match the settings used by the terminal software on the computer. Port selection field appears in the Communication menu only when the optional Bluetooth is on-board. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 129 5 Menu Key Use an RS-232C cable to connect the instrument to the computer. The Free space field shows the number of points that can be stored. Press [ENT] to put the instrument in receive mode. Then use the Send Text File command in the terminal program on the computer to start sending data. In the terminal program, set flow control to Xon/Xoff. As each point is received by the instrument, the value in the Records field is incremented. If you press [ESC] during data upload, the upload is canceled and the display returns to the Communication menu. Records that were received before you pressed [ESC] are stored in the job. The system truncates any code that is longer than 16 characters. Duplicate points If the existing point is a UP, CC, or MP record, and it is not referred to by any ST or BS, it is automatically overwritten by the uploaded point. No error message appears. Advanced feature: Editing the data order for upload 1. To open the Data Fields screen, press the Edit softkey. 2. To move between the fields, press [<] or [>]. 3. To change the selected item in a field, use the softkeys. The options are PT, N, E, Z, CD, and or blank. 4. To save your changes and return to the previous screen, press the Save softkey. For example, if your original data is as follows:

1, UB, 30.000, 20.000, L1 and you set the data fields to PT N E CD, then the uploaded data is:

PT=1, N=30.000, E=20.000, CD=L1 130 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 Uploading coordinates without points You can upload data without points. If you do not include a point in the format definition, each line of data is automatically assigned the next available point number. To help you to select points in the field, make sure that you store an identifier in the CD field. The data format cannot include duplicate items. Use PT, N, E, Z and CD once each in the data format. To skip some items in your original file, set the corresponding field to blank. Uploading a point name list or code list When you upload a code list, it always replaces the existing code list on the instrument. To upload a point name list via cable, press [3] or select PT List in the Communication menu. To upload a code list, press [4] or select Code List. Connect the RS-232C cable. Start a terminal program on the computer. To put the instrument into receive mode, press [ENT] or the OK softkey. The counter is updated as each line in the list is stored. You can store up to 254 codes or point names. If a code or point name is longer than 16 characters, it is truncated. 1sec-Keys Use the 1sec-Keys menu to configure the settings for the one-second keys, [MSR], [DSP], [USR], [S-O], and [DAT]. To access this menu, press [6] or select 1sec-Keys in the MENU screen. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 131 5 Menu Key

[MSR] key settings To change settings for the [MSR1] and [MSR2] keys, press

[1] or select [MSR] in the 1sec-Keys menu. There are two [MSR] keys:

To change the settings for the [MSR1] key, press [1]

or select MSR1. To change the settings for the [MSR2] key, press [2]

or select MSR2. Each [MSR] key has five settings. In the Const and AVE fields, use the numeric keys to enter values. In the other fields, use [<] or [>] to change the settings. B Tip You can also access the settings screen by holding down [MSR1] or [MSR2] for one second.

[DSP] key settings To change the display items in the BMS and in Stakeout observation screens, press [2] or select [DSP]

in the 1sec-Keys menu. To move the cursor, use [<], [>] , [^], or [v]. To change the display item, press either the softkey. To save the changes, press [ENT] at the last line of

<DSP3> or press the Save softkey. softkey or the B Tip You can also access the DSP settings screen by holding down [DSP] for one second.

[USR] key settings To change the functions that are assigned to the [USR1]

and [USR2] keys, press [3] or select [USR] in the 1sec-Keys menu. 132 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Menu Key 5 There are two [USR] keys. The function that is assigned to each key appears beside the key name. To change the settings for the [USR1] key, press [1] or select USR1. To change the settings for the [USR2] key, press [2] or select USR2. In the Select Functions screen, the asterisk (*) indicates the function that is currently assigned to the key. To highlight a function, use [^] or [v]. To assign that function to the selected [USR] key, press [ENT].

[S-O] key settings To enter the Stakeout settings screen, press [4] or select

[S-O] in the 1sec-Keys menu. There are two Stakeout settings. For more information, see Stakeout, page 111.

[DAT] key settings 1. To change the settings for the [DAT] key, press [5]

or select [DAT] in the 1sec-Keys menu. The asterisk (*) indicates the currently selected view format. 2. To move the cursor, use [^] or [v]. 3. To change the format displayed by [DAT], press

[ENT]. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 133 5 Menu Key Calibration Use the Calibration screen to calibrate the instrument. To open the Calibration screen, press [7] or select Calibrat. on the MENU screen. For more information, see Adjusting, page 138. Time Use the Date & Time screen to set the current date and time. 1. To open the Date & Time screen, press [8] or select Time on the MENU screen. The current date and time settings are displayed. 2. Enter the date in Year-Month-Day format. For example, to change the date to June 18, 2008, press

[2] [0] [0] [8] [ENT] [6] [ENT] [1] [8] [ENT]. If the highlighted part of the field (for example, the year) is already correct, you can just press [ENT] to use the current value. For example, if the date is already set to June 24, 2008, and you want to change the date to June 18, 2008, press

[ENT] [ENT] [1] [8] [ENT]. 3. To move to the Time field, press [ENT] in the Date field. 4. Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, to set the time to 4:35 PM, press

[1] [6] [ENT] [3] [5] [ENT]. 5. Do one of the following:

To finish setting the date and time, press [ENT] in the Minutes field. To cancel the input, press [ESC]. 134 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual C H A P T E R6 6 Checking and Adjustment In this chapter:

Adjusting the Electronic Level

Checking and Adjusting the Circular Level

Checking and Adjusting the Optical/Laser Plummet

Zero Point Errors of Vertical Scale and Horizontal Angle Corrections

Checking the Instrument Constant

Checking the Laser Pointer Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 135 6 Checking and Adjustment Adjusting the Electronic Level Adjustment of the electronic level is done by Zero point errors of vertical scale and horizontal angle corrections. For detailed instruction, please see page 137. Checking and Adjusting the Circular Level Once you have checked and adjusted the electronic level, check the circular level. If the bubble is not in the center of the level, use the adjusting pin to rotate the three adjustment screws of either circular level on the instrument main body or tribrach until the bubble is centered. Checking and Adjusting the Optical/Laser Plummet The optical axis of the plummet must be aligned with the vertical axis of the instrument. To check and adjust the optical/laser plummet:

1. 2. Place the instrument on the tripod. You do not have to level the instrument. Place a thick sheet of paper marked with an X on the ground below the instrument. While you are looking through the optical plummet, adjust the leveling screws until the image of the X is in the center of the reticle mark For laser plummet, adjust the laser pointer to the X. 3. Rotate the alidade 180. If the marked image is in the same position in the center of the reticle mark, no adjustment is required For laser plummet, if the laser pointer is on the X, no adjustment is required. P 136 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Checking and Adjustment 6 4. If the image or laser pointer is not in the same position, adjust the optical or laser plummet:

a. Use the supplied hexagonal wrench to turn the adjustment screws until the image of the X is in Position P. Position P is the center point of the line connecting the X and the center of the reticle mark

. b. Repeat from Step 2. For laser plummet adjustment, a cap needs to be removed. Zero Point Errors of Vertical Scale and Horizontal Angle Corrections Checking 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Read the vertical angle from the VA1 field in the Basic Measurement Screen Set up the instrument on the tripod. Follow the leveling procedures described in Leveling, page 15. Flip the telescope to the Face-1 position. Sight a target that is within 45 of the horizontal plane.

(BMS). 6. Rotate the instrument 180 and flip the telescope to the Face-2 position. 7. Read the vertical angle from the VA2 field. 8. Add the two vertical angles together, VA1 + VA2. No adjustment is required if the zero reference for vertical angles (VA zero setting) is set to Zenith, and VA1 + VA2 equals 360. No adjustment is required if the zero reference for vertical angles (VA zero setting) is set to Horizon, and VA1 + VA2 is either 180 or 540. An adjustment is required if VA1 + VA2 is not one of the values listed above. Note The difference between the vertical angle reading the relevant angle (either 360 for Zenith, or 180 or 540 for Horizon) is called the altitude constant. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 137 6 Checking and Adjustment Adjusting To enter the calibration screen, press [MENU] and [7]. 1. The Nivo series has two-axis level compensation.Take an F1 measurement to a target on the horizon. Press [ENT]. The vertical angle is shown in the V0 dir= Horiz setting. VA1 HA1 X1 Y1 Face-1 vertical angle (tilt-off value) Face-1 horizontal angle (tilt-off value) Face-1 X axis tilt value Face-1 Y axis tilt value When you have taken the measurement, the message on the bottom line changes from DO NOT TOUCH! to Turn to F2. 2. Take an F2 measurement to the same target. Press [ENT]. VA2 HA2 X2 Y2 Face-2 vertical angle (tilt-off value) Face-2 horizontal angle (tilt-off value) Face-2 X axis tilt value Face-2 Y axis tilt value When the observation on F2 is completed, four parameters are displayed. 3. Do one of the following:

To return to the first observation screen, press [ESC] or the Redo softkey. To set parameters on the instrument, press [ENT] or the OK softkey. IIf ACV, ACH, X, or Y is out of range, OVER appears. Press any key to return to the first observation screen. 138 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Checking and Adjustment 6 Checking the Instrument Constant The instrument constant is a numerical value used to automatically correct for the displacement between the mechanical and electrical centers when measuring distances. The instrument constant is set by the manufacturer before the instrument is shipped. However, to ensure the highest operational accuracy, we recommend that you check the instrument constant several times a year. To check the instrument constant, you can either compare a correctly measured base line with the distance measured by the EDM, or follow the procedure below. P P About 100 m R Q Q To check the instrument constant:

1. 2. Set up the instrument at Point P, in as flat an area as possible. Set up a reflector prism at Point Q, 100 m away from Point P. Make sure that you take the prism constant into account. Install a reflector prism on the tripod at Point P. Set up another tripod at Point R, on the line between Point P and Point Q. 3. Measure the distance between Point P and Point Q (PQ). 4. 5. 6. Transfer the Nivo series instrument to the tripod at Point R. 7. Measure the distance from Point R to Point P (RP), and from Point R to Point Q (RQ). 8. Calculate the difference between the value of PQ and the value of RP + RQ. 9. Move the Nivo series instrument to other points on the line between Point P and Point Q. 10. Repeat Step 5 through Step 9 ten times or so. 11. Calculate the average of all the differences. The error range is within 3 mm. If the error is out of range, contact your dealer. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 139 6 Checking and Adjustment Checking the Laser Pointer The Nivo series total station uses a red laser beam to a laser pointer. The laser pointer is coaxial with the line of sight of the telescope. If the instrument is well adjusted, the red laser pointer coincides with the line of sight. External influences such as shock or large temperature fluctuations can displace the red laser pointer relative to the line of sight. 140 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual C H A P T E R7 7 Specifications In this chapter:

Main Body

Standard Components

External Device Connector Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 141 7 Specifications Main Body Telescope Tube length Magnification Effective diameter of objective Image Field of view Resolving power Focusing distance Measurement range 125 mm (4.91 in.) 30 X 45 mm (1.77 in.) EDM 50 mm (1.97 in.) Erect 120'

2.3 m at 100 m (2.3 ft at 100 ft) 3.0''

1.5 m to infinity (4.92 ft to infinity) Distances shorter than 1.5 m (4.92 ft) cannot be measured with this EDM. Measurement range with no haze, visibility over 40 km (25 miles)) Prism mode Reflector sheet (5 cm x 5 cm) Standard prism (1P) 300 m (984 ft) 5,000 m (16,400 ft) Reflectorless mode Reference target 300 m (984 ft) The target should not receive direct sunlight. Reference target refers to a white, highly reflective material. (KGC90%) The maximum measurement range is 500 m in the reflectorless mode. Distance precision Precise mode Prism Reflectorless Normal mode Prism Reflectorless

(3 + 2 ppm D) mm (10 C to +40 C)

(3 + 3 ppm D) mm

(20 C to 10 C, +40 C to +50 C)

(3 + 2 ppm D) mm (10 C to +40 C)

(3 + 3 ppm D) mm

(20 C to 10 C, +40 C to +50 C)

(10 + 5 ppm D) mm

(10 + 5 ppm D) mm 142 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Measurement intervals Measurement intervals may vary with the measuring distance or weather conditions. For the initial measurement, it may take few more seconds. Specifications 7 Precise mode Prism Reflectorless Normal mode Prism Reflectorless Prism offset correction 1.5 sec. 1.8 sec. 0.8 sec. 1.0 sec. 999 mm to +999 mm (1 mm step) Angle measurement Reading system Nivo3.M Nivo5.M Minimum display increment 360 400G MIL6400 DIN18723 accuracy Absolute encoder Diametrical reading on HA Single reading on VA Single reading on HA/VA 1''/5''/10"

0.2 mgon/1 mgon/2 mgon 0.005 MIL/0.02 MIL/0.05 MIL Nivo3.M: 3" / 1.0 mgon Nvo5.M: 5"/1.5 mgon Tilt sensor Method Compensation range Liquid-electric detection (Dual axis) 3'

Tangent screw Type Tribrach Type Friction clutch endless fine motion Detachable Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 143 7 Specifications Level Electronic level Circular level vial Displayed on the LCD Sensitivity 10'/2 mm Optical plummet Image Magnification Field of view Focusing range Optional laser plummet Wave length Laser class Focusing range Laser diameter Display and keypad Display type Resolution Display illumination Keys Erect 3 5 0.5 m (1.6 ft) to infinity 635 nm Class 2 Approx. 2 mm Graphical LCD 128 64 Backlight 25 Connections in the base of instrument Communications Type Maximum baud rate External power supply input voltage RS-232C 38400 bps asynchronous 4.5 V to 5.2 V DC 144 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Specifications 7 Battery pack Output voltage Continuous operation time 3.8 V DC rechargeable Continuous distance/angle measurement Distance/angle measurement every 30 seconds Continuous angle measurement 10 hours 16 hours 30 hours Tested at 25 C (nominal temperature). Operation times may vary depending on the condition and deterioration of the battery. Environmental performance Operating temperature range Storage temperature range 20 C through +50 C (4 F through +122 F) 25 C through +60 C (13 F through +140 F) Dimensions Main unit Carrying case 149 mm W x 145 mm D x 306 mm H 435 mm W x 206 mm D x 297 mm H Weight Main unit w/o battery Battery Carrying case Charger and AC adapter 3.5 kg (7.95 lbs), approx. 0.1 kg (0.22 lbs), approx. 2.4 kg (5.28 lbs), approx. 0.4 kg (0.99 lbs), approx. Environmental protection Watertight/dust-proof protection IP66 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 145 7 Specifications Standard Components Instrument main body Battery pack (X 2) Universal charger, power cord, and adapters Adjustment pin, Allen wrench Objective lens cap Vinyl cover Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual (this document) Carrying case Shoulder strap (X 2) External Device Connector This connector can be used to connect to an external power source or to communicate with an external device. Before using the external device connector, make sure that the external device meets the specifications below. Input voltage System Signal level Maximum baud rate Compatible male connector 4.5 V to 5.2 V DC RS-232C 9 V standard 38400 bps asynchronous Hirose HR10A-7P-6P or HR10-7P-6P C CAUTION Except for the connection shown in Figure 8.1on page 150, use of this connector is at your own risk. C CAUTION Use only the male connectors specified above. Using other connectors will damage the instrument. 146 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual The external device connector is a Hirose HR 10A-7R-6S female connector. The pinouts for connecting it to an external device connector are shown below:

Specifications 7 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal RXD TXD NC V GND NC Description Receive data (Input) Send data (Output) No connection Power Ground No connection 6 4 5 HRS 1 3 2 C CAUTION Use only the pin connections shown above. Using other connections will damage the instrument. C CAUTION The Nivo series total station has different pin assignment from other models of Nikon total station. To connect to an external power source, supply power to Pin 4 (power terminal) and Pin 5 (ground terminal) on the instrument. The instrument will use the external power source even if the internal battery packs are attached. C CAUTION Make sure that the power supplied is within the rated input range (4.5 V to 5.2 V DC, 1 A maximum). Power supplied outside this range will damage the instrument. To communicate with an external device, connect the RS-232C signal from the external device to Pin 1 (input terminal) and to Pin 2 (output terminal) on the instrument. Cap the data output/external power input connector securely while not in use. The instrument is not watertight if the cap is not attached or not attached securely, and when the data output/external power input connector is in use. The instrument can be damaged by static electricity from the human body discharged through the data output/external power input connector. Before handling the instrument, touch any other conductive material once to remove static electricity. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 147 7 Specifications 148 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual C H A P T E R8 8 System Diagrams In this chapter:

System Components Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 149 8 System Diagrams System Components Tubular Compass Tubular compass attachment Battery charger AC adapter and plug adapter Nivo series Solar filter Diagonal eyepiece Low-power eyepiece High-power eyepiece Connecting cable

(9 pin, USB) Personal computer Figure 8.1 Measurement side 150 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual System Diagrams 8 Coaxial target plate for single prism Target pole Mini prism C Mini prism holder Tiltable single prism holder Standard round single prism C Triple prism holder Mini prism adapter Prism adapter Height adjustment adapter is not used. Tribrach adapter 15 Tribrach W30/W30b Telescopic prism pole Tripod for telescopic prism pole Nikon tripod Figure 8.2 Prism reflector side Note Nivo series must be used with the Tribrach W30 or W30b. Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 151 8 System Diagrams 152 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual C H A P T E R9 9 Communications In this chapter:

Uploading Coordinate Data

Uploading Point Lists and Code Lists

Downloading Data Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 153 9 Communications Uploading Coordinate Data Settings To configure the transmission speed and other settings, go to MENU > Settings > Comm. For more information, see Communications, page 111. Record format You can upload coordinate records in the following formats:

PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT

, X X X X X X X X

, CD CD

, Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Z Z Z Z

, CD CD

, CD

, Z Z 154 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Communications 9 The record formats shown above use the following codes:

Code PT X Y Z CD Description Point number Actual X coordinate Actual Y coordinate Actual Z coordinate Feature code Length Up to 20 digits Variable length Variable length Variable length Up to 16 characters Data example 20100,6606.165,1639.383,30.762,RKBSS 20104,1165611.6800,116401.4200,00032.8080 20105 5967.677 1102.343 34.353 MANHOLE 20106 4567.889 2340.665 33.444 PT1 20107 5967.677 1102.343 34.353 20109,4657.778,2335.667,,PT2 20111,4657.778,2335.667 20113 4657.778 2335.667 20115,,,34.353,MANHOLE 20117,,,33.444 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 155 9 Communications Uploading Point Lists and Code Lists Settings To configure the transmission speed and other settings, go to MENU > Settings > Comm. For more information, see Communications, page 111. File format PT lists and code lists use the same record format. Use the filenames POINT.LST for a PT list, and CODE.LST for a code list. The first line of the file must contain the text DEFAULT in capital letters. Curly brackets { } group items together under the preceding line. For example, Layer 3-1 contains String 3-1-1 and String 3-1-2. Layer 3 contains the five items from Layer 3-1 to String 3-3. String represents characters that are displayed on the screen. Code represents characters that are stored in the database. DEFAULT

String1 , Code1 Layer2

String2-1, Code2-1 String2-2, Code2-2

Layer3

Layer 3-1

String3-1-1, Code3-1-1 String3-1-2, Code3-1-2

String3-2, Code3-2 String3-3, Code3-3

String4, Code4 String5, Code5 String6, Code6 String7, Code7

Figure 9.1 Record format for PT lists and code lists 156 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Data example Communications 9 DEFAULT

STRUCTURES

TREE, S0001 FENCE, S0002 MAIL BOX, S0003 FLOWER BED, S0004

ROADS

MANHOLE, R0001 CENTER LINE

WHITE, R002-W YELLOW, R002-Y

SIDEWALK, R0003 CROSSING, R0004 BRIDGE, R0005 SIGNAL, R0006 HIGHWAY STAR, R0007

RAILWAY

CROSSING, RW001 STATION, RW002 SIGNAL, RW003 BRIDGE, RW004 TUNNEL, RW005

Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 157 9 Communications Downloading Data Settings To configure the transmission speed and other settings, go to MENU > Settings > Comm. For more information, see Communications, page 111. Nikon raw record formats Coordinate records type , pt

(pt id)

, northing , easting , elevation , code type pt

(pt id) northing easting elevation code Uploaded point Manually input point Calculated coordinate Resection point One of the following codes:

UP MP CC RE Point number

(Point ID) Northing of the coordinate Easting of the coordinate Elevation of the coordinate Feature code Station records ST , stnpt

(stnid)

, bspt

(bs id)

, hi

, bsazim , bsha ST stnpt

(stn id) bspt

(bs id) hi bsazim bsha Station record identifier (fixed text) Station point number

(Station ID) Backsight point number

(Backsight ID) Height of instrument Backsight azimuth Backsight horizontal angle 158 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Control point records CP , pt

(pt id)

, ht

, sd , ha , va , time , code Communications 9 CP pt

(pt id) ht sd ha va time code Control point record identifier (fixed text) Point number

(Point ID) Height of target Slope distance Horizontal angle Vertical angle 24-hour time stamp Feature code Sideshot records SS , pt

, ht

, sd , ha , va , time , code SS pt ht sd ha va time code Sideshot record identifier (fixed text) Point number Height of target Slope distance Horizontal angle Vertical angle 24-hour time stamp Feature code Stakeout records SO , pt

(sopt)

, ht

, sd , ha , va , time , SO pt

(sopt) ht sd ha va time Stakeout record identifier (fixed text) Recorded point number

(Original number of point staked) Height of target Slope distance Horizontal angle Vertical angle 24-hour time stamp Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 159 9 Communications F1 records face , pt

, ht

, sd , ha , va , time face pt ht sd ha va time Shot taken using Face-1 (fixed text) One of the following:

F1 Shot taken using Face-1 for Station setup (fixed text) Point number Height of target Slope distance Horizontal angle Vertical angle 24-hour time stamp Comment/note records CO , text CO text Comment record identifier (fixed text) Comment text 160 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Communications 9 SDR2x and SDR33 record formats Header record 00NM ver 0000 datetime ang dist press temp coor 1 14 520 00NM ver 2124 2540 41 0000 datetime ang 42 43 44 45 46 dist press temp coor 1 Instrument record SDR2x SDR33 Degrees Gons Mils Header record identifier (fixed text) SDR download version. One of the following:

SDR20V03-05 SDR33V04-01 Not used Download date and time (in hours and minutes) Angle units. One of the following:

1 2 4 Distance units. One of the following:

1 2 Pressure units. One of the following:

1 2 3 Temperature units. One of the following:

1 2 Coordinate order. One of the following:

1 2 Not used mm Hg In. Hg hPa Celsius Fahrenheit Meters Feet NEZ ENZ 01KI1 instr serNo Instr serNo 1 zero VA 0.000 0.000 0.000 15 621, 2843 2227, 4449 50 51 01KI1 instr serNo 1 zero VA 5261, 6271, 7281, 0.000 0.000 0.000 Instrument record identifier (fixed text) Instrument make and model Instrument serial number Not used The reference point for vertical angles. One of the following:

1 2 Not used Not used Not used Zenith Horizon Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 161 9 Communications Station details record 02KI stnpt northing easting elevation hi desc 14 58 (2x), 520 (33) 918 (2x), 2136 (33) 1928 (2x), 3752 (33) 2938 (2x), 5368 (33) 3948 (2x), 6984 (33) 4964 (2x), 85100 (33) 02KI stnpt Station details record identifier (fixed text) Station point number northing Northing of station easting Easting of station elevation Elevation of station hi desc Height of instrument Station description Target details record 03NM ht 14 514 (2x), 520 (33) 03NM ht Target details record identifier (fixed text) Height of target Backsight bearing details record 07KI stnpt bspt bsazim ha 14 58 (2x), 520 (33) 912 (2x), 2136 (33) 1322 (2x), 3752 (33) 2332 (2x), 5368 (33) 07KI stnpt bspt Backsight bearing details record identifier

(fixed text) Station point number Backsight point number bsazim Backsight azimuth ha Horizontal angle 162 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Communications 9 Coordinates record 08KI pt northing easting elevation desc 14 58 (2x), 520 (33) 918 (2x), 2136 (33) 1928 (2x), 3752 (33) 2938 (2x), 5368 (33) 3954 (2x), 6984 (33) 08KI pt Coordinates record identifier (fixed text) Point number northing Northing of the coordinate easting Easting of the coordinate elevation Elevation of the coordinate desc Feature code Observation record 09MC stnpt pt sd va ha desc 14 58 (2x), 520 (33) 912 (2x), 2136 (33) 1322 (2x), 3752 (33) 2332 (2x), 5368 (33) 3342 (2x), 6984 (33) 4358 (2x), 85100 (33) 09MC stnpt Observation record identifier (fixed text) Station point number pt sd va ha Observed point number Slope distance Vertical angle Horizontal angle desc Feature code Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 163 9 Communications Job identifier record 10NM jobid 1 incZ T&Pcorr C&Rcorr refcon sealev 14 58 (2x), 520 (33) 10NM jobid Job identifier record ID (fixed text) Job name/title Note The following fields occur only in SDR33 format. 2D 3D Off On Point ID length option 2D or 3D coordinates. One of the following:

1 2 Atmospheric correction. One of the following:

1 2 Curvature and refraction correction. One of the following:

1 Off 2 On Refraction constant. One of the following:

1 2 Sea level correction. One of the following:

1 2 0.132 0.200 Off On 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 incZ T&Pcorr C&Rcorr refcon sealev Note record 13NM note 14 564 13NM note Note record ID (fixed text) Note text 164 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Data examples Nikon raw data format CO,Nikon RAW data format V2.00 CO,EXAMPLE5 CO,Description: SAMPLE DATA OF DOWNLOAD CO,Client:

CO,Comments:

CO,Downloaded 22-JUL-2008 18:56:10 CO,Software: Pre-installed version: 1.0.0.1 CO,Instrument: Nivo 5.M CO,Dist Units: Metres CO,Angle Units: DDDMMSS CO,Zero azimuth: North CO,Zero VA: Zenith CO,Coord Order: NEZ CO,HA Raw data: Azimuth CO,Tilt Correction: VA:ON HA:ON CO, EXAMPLE5 <JOB> Created 22-JUL-2008 07:09:21 CO,S/N:213705 MP,1,,100.000,200.000,10.000, CO,Temp:20C Press:760mmHg Prism:0 22-JUL-2008 07:11:34 ST,1,,,,1.400,55.4500,55.4500 F1,,,,0.0000,90.0000,8:27:58 SS,3,1.200,330.706,326.027,20.320,07:13:46,SIGN SS,4,1.250,379.193,300.847,29.084,07:14:24,TREE SS,5,1.218,363.344,328.032,30.105,07:14:57,TREE R SO,1003,,1.240,331.220,326.783,19.998,07:18:17, Nikon coordinate data format 1,100.0000,200.0000,10.0000, 2,200.0000,300.0000,20.0000, 3,116.9239,216.9140,11.8425,TRAIN PLATFORM 4,126.6967,206.2596,11.2539,RAMP 11,100.0045,199.9958,10,0000, 13,116.9203,216.9113,11.7157, 14,126.6955,206.2579,10.9908, 21,100.0103,199.9958,10.0000, 31,100.0013,200.0005,10.0000, 41,100.0224,200.0331,9.9000, 43,116.9263,216,9165,11.8016,CURB 44,126.7042,206.2871,10.8193,DITCH 45,116.9266,216.9160,11.8028, 46,126.7046,206.2845,10.8213,CP POINT Communications 9 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 165 9 Communications SDR2x raw data format 00NMSDR20V03-05 000023-Jul-2008 18:39:111211 10NMEXAMPLE6 01KI1 Nikon Nivo 5.M 000000 Nikon Nivo 5.M 00000012 0.000 0.000 0.000 13NMDownloaded 23-Jul-2008 18:39:22 13NMSftware: Pre-install version: 1.0.0.1 13NMInstrument: Nikon Nivo 5.M 13NMDist Units: Metres 13NMAngle Units: Degrees 13NMZero azimuth: North 13NMZero VA: Horizon 13NMCoord Order: NEZ 13NMClient:

13NMDescription:

13NMTilt Correction: VA:ON HA:ON 13NM EXAMPLE6 <JOB> Created 23-Jul-2008 07:09:21 08KI0001100.000 200.000 10.000 08KI0002200.000 300.000 20.000 02KI0001100.000 200.000 10.000 0.100 07KI0001000245.0000 0.0000 13F100000002<null> <null> 0.0000 13F200000002<null> <null> 179.9639 13NMBS Check HA:359.3525 Reset to HA: 0.0000 07:21:41 13F10000000323.990 4.1694 0.0000 13F20000000323.990 175.8403 180.0028 03NM0.000 13F10001000323.990 4.1653 359.9833 MAIN PLATFORM 13F10001000427.445 2.4097 328.1958 RAMP 13NMStart of 2-Pt Resection 13F10000000427.445 2.4097 0.0000 13F10000000323.991 4.1542 31.8042 13F10000000427.430 1.8583 121.4306 13F10000000323.976 3.8625 153.2306 08KI0011100.005 199.996 10.000 02KI0011100.005 199.996 10.000 0.100 07KI0011000344.9980 0.0000 166 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Communications 9 SDR2x coordinate data format 00NMSDR20V03-05 000023-Jul-2008 18:40:111211 10NMEXAMPLE6 01KI1 Nikon Nivo 5.M 000000 Nikon Nivo 5.M 00000012 0.000 0.000 0.000 13NM 080926-2 <JOB> Downloaded 08-Oct-2008 18:40:06 13NMSftware: Pre-install version: 1.0.0.1 13NMInstrument: Nikon Nivo 5.M 13NMDist Units: Metres 13NMAngle Units: Deqrees 13NMZero azimuth: North 13NMZero VA: Horizon 13NMProjection correction: OFF 13NMC&R correction: OFF 13NMSea level correction: OFF 13NMCoord Order: NEZ 13NMClient:

13NMDescription:

13NMTilt Correction: VA:OFF HA:OFF 13NM EXAMPLE6 <JOB> Created 23-Jul-2008 07:09:21 13NMPrism constant: 0 08KI0001100.000 200.000 10.000 08KI0002200.000 300.000 20.000 13NMBacksight Check to Pt:2 HA:359.3525 07:21:39 13NMBacksight Pt:2 Reset to HA: 0.0000 07:21:41 08KI0003116.924 216.914 11.843 MAIN PLTFORM 08KI0004126.697 206.260 11.254 RAMP 13NMStart of 2-Pt Resection 08KI0011100.005 199.996 10.000 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 167 9 Communications 168 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Error Messages In this chapter:

Cogo

Communications

Data

Job Manager

Programs

Recording Data

Searching

Settings

Stakeout

Station Setup

System Error C H A P T E R10 10 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 169 10 Error Messages Cogo NO Result The system was unable to calculate an area because points were not entered in the correct order. Press any key to return to the Cogo menu. Then enter the points in the correct order. 100.1 Same Coordinate The point or coordinate that you entered is identical to the previous input point. Press any key to return to the point input screen. Then use a different point. 100.2 XY-coordinate is required The input point does not have XY (NE) coordinates. Press any key to return to the point input screen. Then enter a point that has X and Y coordinates. 100.3 Communications If an error is detected during uploading of data, the Nivo instrument aborts the upload process and displays one of the following messages. Check Data 100.4 There are errors in the uploaded data. The uploaded data contains errors, such as an alphabetic character in a coordinate field. Press any key. Then check the specified line in the data. DUPLICATE PT The uploaded data contains a duplicate PT. Press any key. Then check the specified point in the data. 100.5 B Tip If the existing point is a UP, CC, or MP record, and is not referred by ST or BS, then it will be overwritten by the uploaded record. No error message appears. PT MAX20 chars 100.6 The uploaded data contains a PT with a name or number that is longer than 20 digits. Press any key. Then check the specified line in the data. XYZ OVERRANGE The uploaded data contains a coordinate that is longer than 13 digits. Press any key. Then check the specified line in the data. 100.7 170 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Data Error Messages 10 Can't Edit Current ST You have tried to edit the current ST. Note You cannot edit the current ST. However, old ST records can be edited. No recalculation can be performed on the instrument. Press any key to return to the code/layer name input screen. 100.8 Can't Edit ST/BS refer to this PT You have tried to edit a coordinate that the current ST or BS refers to. You cannot change a coordinate if the current ST or BS refers to it. Press any key to return to the Data view screen. 100.9 Can't Edit XYZ from measurement You have tried to change the coordinates of an SO, SS, or CP record. You cannot change the coordinates of an SO, SS, or CP record. Press any key to return to the previous screen. 100.10 DELETE Stn-XYZ 100.11 You have tried to delete a coordinate record that the current ST or BS refers to. You must confirm that you want to delete a coordinate record that the current ST or BS refers to. To ... delete XYZ return to the previous screen without deleting XYZ Press ... the DEL softkey

[ESC] or the Abrt softkey Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 171 10 Error Messages Job Manager Cannot Assign You have tried to set the current job as the control file. Press any key to return to the previous screen. Then select a different job. 100.12 Can't Create There is no space available to create a job or record a point. Press any key to return to the Job Manager. Then use the DEL softkey to delete old jobs. 100.13 Existing Job You have entered an existing job name for a new job. Press any key and then change the name for the new job. 100.14 MAX 32Jobs 100.15 You are trying to create a new job when the maximum number of jobs (32) is already stored. Press any key to return to the Job Manager. Then use the DEL softkey to delete old jobs. Programs NO Stn Setup You did not perform a station setup or BS check before entering the Programs function. 100.16 To ... go to the Stn Setup menu return to the BMS go to the Programs menu Press ...

[2] or select Stn Setup

[ESC]

[1] or select Continue B Tip Selecting Continue does not resume the last ST record. You should only use the Continue option if you are sure that the previous ST coordinates and the current HA orientation are correct. Otherwise, records in the Programs function may not be correct. XY&Z coordinate are required Three-dimensional coordinates are required in S-Plane function. Press any key to return to the point input screen. Then enter a three-dimensional point. 100.17 172 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Recording Data Error Messages 10 DATA FULL The data storage is full. Press any key to return to the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS). Then:

100.18 To ... delete unnecessary data delete jobs Go to ... MENU > Data MENU > Job DUPLICATE PT The input PT you are trying to record already exists in the current job. An existing coordinate record cannot be overwritten by measured data. Press any key to return to the point input screen. Change PT. 100.19 Duplicate PT 100.20 The input PT you are trying to record already exists in the current job as an SS, SO, or CP record. An existing SS, SO, or CP record can be overwritten by measured data. To ... return to the PT input screen record RAW data and update XYZ data record RAW data only Press ...

[ESC] or the Abrt softkey the XYZ softkey the RAW softkey No Open Job No job is open. 100.21 To ... open the job list, if there are existing jobs create a new job return to the previous screen Press ...

[1] or select Select job

[2] or select Create job

[ESC]

NO Stn Setup There is no station record in the current job, or a station setup or BS check has not been done since the program was rebooted. 100.22 To ... continue recording go to the Stn Setup menu return to the previous screen Press ...

[1] or select Continue. If there is already an ST record in the job, the message CO, Use current orientation appears.

[2] or select STN Setup

[ESC]

Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 173 10 Error Messages OVER RANGE You are trying to record a coordinate with more than 13 digits Press any key to return to the previous screen. Then check the current ST coordinate. 100.23 Searching PT Not Found There is no point that matches the criteria you entered. Press any key to return to the point input screen. This message may appear in any function where the PT/CD is input, such as Station Setup or Stakeout. 100.24 Settings Stakeout Job Settings will be changed You have changed one or more of the following job settings:

VA zero or HA in the Angle screen (see Angle, page 108) Scale, T-P, Sea Lvl, or C&R in the Distance screen (see Distance, page 109) Coord or Az Zero in the Coordinates screen (see Coordinate, page 110) Angle, Dist, Temp, or Press in the Unit screen (see Unit, page 111) 100.25 To ... discard the changes to the job settings close the current job and save the changes to the job settings Press ...

[ESC] or the Abrt softkey. The current job remains open.

[ENT] or the OK softkey Note To record a point using the new settings, create a new job using the new settings. Input Error The point name style used in the Fr field is not the same as the style used in the To field. For example, the Fr field style is 1, and the To field style is A200. Press any key to return to the Fr/To input screen. Then re-enter the point name, using the same naming style in both fields. 100.26 174 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual Error Messages 10 NO Stn Setup You did not perform a station setup or BS check before entering the Stakeout function. 100.27 To... go to the Stn Setup menu return to the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) go to the Stakeout menu Press ...

[2] or select Stn Setup

[ESC]

[1] or select Continue B Tip Selecting Continue does not resume the last ST record. You should only use the Continue option if you are sure that the previous ST coordinates and the current HA orientation are correct. Otherwise, records in the Stakeout function may not be correct. Station Setup Calc ST Failed Need additional PT 100.28 Calculating ST failed in resection. This message may appear after you have deleted a point the View shots screen. Press any key to return to the PT input screen. Take another shot to calculate the ST coordinate. Same Coordinate 100.29 The input PT or coordinate is identical to the current station in STN/1:Known, or the same coordinate or point name/number is found in Resection. Press any key to return to the PT input screen. Then use a different PT. Space LOW 100.30 There is not enough space to record a station when you start any of the Station Setup functions. To ... return to the BMS continue Press ... press [ESC] or the Abrt softkey. Use the DEL softkey in Job Manager to delete old jobs. press [ENT] or the OK softkey. You may not be able to record the whole process. XY-coordinate is required The input point for ST/BS does not have N/E coordinates. Press any key to return to the PT input screen. Then use a PT that has N/E coordinates. 100.31 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual 175 10 Error Messages Z-coordinate is required The input point for Benchmark does not have a Z coordinate. Press any key to return to the PT input screen. Then use a PT that has a Z coordinate. 100.32 System Error

=SYSTEM ERROR=

The system has detected an internal error that is related to the lower-level system. Press any key to turn the instrument off. The system will reboot when this error is reported. If you still have more points to shoot in the site, turn the instrument on and repeat the open a job and station setup procedures. Data stored before this error will be kept safely in the Job file. If the error appears frequently, please contact your dealer or Trimble Support and report the message that appears below the =SYSTEM ERROR= line. 100.33 176 Total Station Nivo Series Instruction Manual NORTH AMERICA (Survey) Tripod Data Systems P O Box 947 Corvallis, OR 97339 USA

+1-541-753-9322 Phone

+1-541-757-7439 Fax www.tdsway.com OR NORTH AMERICA (CI/Construction) Trimble Construction Instruments Division/Trimble Geomatics and Engineering Division 5475 Kellenburger Road Dayton, Ohio 45424-1099 USA 800-538-7800 (Toll Free)

+1-937-245-5154 Phone

+1-937-233-9441 Fax www.trimble.com xxxxxxxx, Trimble Navigation LImited. All rights reserved. Trimble is a trademark of Trimble Navigation Limited registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and other countries. Nikon is a registered trademark of Nikon. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. PN xxxxxxx-xxx (xx/xx)

USER GUIDE Part 1 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station NORTH AMERICA Trimble Construction Division 5475 Kellenburger Road Dayton, Ohio 45424 USA 800-538-7800 (Toll Free)

+1-937-245-5154 Phone

+1-937-233-9441 Fax EUROPE Trimble GmbH Am Prime Parc 11 65479 Raunheim GERMANY

+49-6142-2100-0 Phone

+49-6142-2100-550 Fax ASIA-PACIFIC Trimble Navigation Singapore Pty Limited 80 Marine Parade Road

#22-06, Parkway Parade Singapore 449269 SINGAPORE

+65-6348-2212 Phone

+65-6348-2232 Fax www.trimble.com USER GUIDE Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station Version 1.00 Revision A February 2009

Corporate Office Construction Division 5475 Kellenburger Road Dayton, Ohio 45424-1099 USA 800-538-7800 (toll free in USA)

+1-937-245-5600 Phone

+1-937-233-9004 Fax www.trimble.com Legal Notices Copyright and Trademarks 2006-2009, Nikon-Trimble Co. Limited. All rights reserved. 2007-2009, Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved. Trimble and the Globe & Triangle logo are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited registered in the United States and in other countries. Nikon is a registered trademark of the Nikon Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Release Notice This is the February 2009 release (Revision A) of the Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide. It applies to version 1.00 of the TS635 construction total station. Manufacturer Nikon-Trimble Co., Ltd. Technoport Mituiseimei Bldg. 16-2, Minamikamata 2-chome, Ota-ku Tokyo 144-0035 Japan Product Limited Warranty Information For applicable product Limited Warranty information, please refer to the Limited Warranty Card included with this Trimble product, or consult your local Trimble authorized dealer. Notices Class B Statement Notice to Users. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communication. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Changes and modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer or registrant of this equipment can void your authority to operate this equipment under Federal Communications Commission rules. C WARNING - This equipment has been certified to comply with the limits for a Class B personal computer and peripherals, pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. Only peripherals (computer input/output devices, terminals, printers, etc.) certified to comply with the Class B limits may be attached to this equipment. Operation with non-certified personal computer and/or peripherals is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception. The connection of a non-

shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC Certification of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits established by the FCC for this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Canada This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Le prsent appareil numrique nmet pas de bruits radiolectriques dpassant les limites applicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans le rglement sur le brouillage radiolectrique dict par le Ministre des Communications du Canada. 2 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Europe This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements for a Class B device pursuant to European Council Directive 2004/108/EC on EMC, thereby satisfying the requirements for CE Marking and sale within the European Economic Area (EEA). These requirements are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential or commercial environment. Representative in Europe Trimble GmbH Am Prime Parc 11 65479 Raunheim, Germany Australia and New Zealand This product conforms with the regulatory requirements of the Australian Communications Authority (ACA) EMC framework, thus satisfying the requirements for C-Tick Marking and sale within Australia and New Zealand. Taiwan Battery Recycling Requirements The product contains a removable Ni-MH battery. Taiwanese regulations require that waste batteries are recycled. Notice to Our European Union Customers For product recycling instructions and more information, please go to: www.trimble.com/environment/summary.html. Recycling in Europe To recycle Trimble WEEE, call: +31 497 53 2430, and ask for the

"WEEE associate," or mail a request for recycling instructions to:

Trimble Europe BV c/o Menlo Worldwide Logistics Meerheide 45 5521 DZ Eersel, NL For the Bluetooth unit USA FCC Part 15 Subpart/RSS-210, OET bulletin 65 supplement C satisfied CAUTION: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canada RSS-210 Low Power Device Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. European Union countries, Iceland, Norway, Liechtenstein, Turkey, Switzerland EN300 328v17.1, EN50360 satisfied Hereby, Nikon-Trimble Co., Ltd., declares that this instrument is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Declaration of Conformity available at http://www.nikon-trimble.com/. RF exposure compliance 1. To comply with FCC/IC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. 2. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Contents 1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Rechargeable Lithium-ion (Li-ion) batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Specifications for laser emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Conforming standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1 2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 System diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Care and maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Adjusting and tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Related information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Setting up the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Unpacking and repacking the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Charging the battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Applying power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Conditioning / calibrating a battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Detaching the battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Attaching the battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Setting up the tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Centering the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Centering with the optical plummet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Centering with the laser plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Centering with a plumb bob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Leveling the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Focusing the telescope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Setting the measurement mode and preparing the target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Measurement with a prism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Measurement in reflectorless (N-Prism) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Viewing and changing the measurement settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Target field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Prism constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3 Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Instrument keyboard and display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Instrument keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Status bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 3 4 LCD backlight, laser pointer, beep sound, and contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

[DSP] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

[MODE] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

[HOT] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Bubble indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Laser plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Turning on the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Turning off the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Sleep mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Regional configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 List available jobs or data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Entering data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Entering a point name or number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Entering a code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Entering values in feet and inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Creating or opening a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Creating a new job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Creating a control job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Measuring distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Sighting a prism reflector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Taking a distance measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Viewing and changing the measurement settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 HA reset and angle operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Setting the horizontal angle to 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Entering the horizontal angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Station setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Known. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Base XYZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Remote BM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 BS Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Layout menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 L-O to Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 L-O from Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 L-O from Arc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 XYZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Programs menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Remote distance measurement (RDM) - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 RDM (Radial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 RDM (Cont) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 REM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 V-Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Cogo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Recording measurement data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 4 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 5 6 Switching between display screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Opening an existing job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Creating a new job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Deleting a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Setting the control job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Displaying job information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Settings (basic job settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Power saving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Other settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Viewing coordinate data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 UP, MP, CC, SS, and SO records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Deleting coordinate records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Editing coordinate records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Searching coordinate records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Entering coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Downloading coordinate data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Uploading coordinate data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 1sec-Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

[MSR] button settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

[DSP] button settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Checking and Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Adjusting the electronic level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Checking and adjusting the circular level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Checking and adjusting the optical/laser plummet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Zero point errors of vertical scale and horizontal angle corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Checking the calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Adjusting the calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 The instrument constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Checking and adjusting the laser pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 A Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Main body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 5 Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Measurement range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Distance precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Measurement intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Angle measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Tilt sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Tangent screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Tribrach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Optical plumment (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Laser plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Display and keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Connections in the base of instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Environmental performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Standard components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 External device connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Transferring Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Transferring coordinate data to the total station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Record format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Data example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Transferring coordinate data from the total station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Data examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Cogo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Job manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Recording data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Station setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 System error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 B C 6 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Safety For your safety read the safety and warnings section and this manual carefully and thoroughly before using the Trimble TS635 construction total station. Although these products are designed for maximum safety, using them incorrectly or disregarding the instructions can cause personal injury or property damage. You should also read the installation manual for the battery charger, and the documentation for any other equipment that you use with a Trimble TS635 construction total station. Note Always keep this user guide near the instrument for easy reference. Warnings and Cautions The following conventions are used to indicate safety instructions:

C WARNING Warnings alert you to situations that could cause death or serious injury. C CAUTION Cautions alert you to situations that could cause injury or property damage. Always read and follow the instructions carefully. Rechargeable Lithium-ion (Li-ion) batteries WARNING Do not damage the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery. A damaged battery can cause an explosion or fire, and can result in personal injury and/or property damage. To prevent injury or damage:

Do not use or charge the battery if it appears to be damaged. Signs of damage include, but are not limited to, discoloration, warping, and leaking battery fluid. Do not expose the battery to fire, high temperature, or direct sunlight. Do not immerse the battery in water. Do not use or store the battery inside a vehicle during hot weather. Do not drop or puncture the battery. Do not open the battery or short-circuit its contacts. C WARNING Avoid contact with the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery if it appears to be leaking. Battery fluid is corrosive, and contact with it can result in personal injury and/or property damage. To prevent injury or damage:

If the battery leaks, avoid contact with the battery fluid. If battery fluid gets into your eyes, immediately rinse your eyes with clean water and seek medical attention. Do not rub your eyes!

If battery fluid gets onto your skin or clothing, immediately use clean water to wash off the battery fluid. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 7 Safety C Charge and use the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery only in strict accordance with the instructions. Charging or using the battery in unauthorized equipment can cause an explosion or fire, and can result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. To prevent injury or damage:

Do not charge or use the battery if it appears to be damaged or leaking. Charge the Lithium-ion battery only in a product that is specified to charge it. Be sure to follow all instructions that are provided with the battery charger. Discontinue charging a battery that gives off extreme heat or a burning odor. Use the battery only in equipment that is specified to use it. Use the battery only for its intended use and according to the instructions in the product documentation. Warnings Before using the instrument, read the following warnings and follow the instructions that they provide. C WARNING Never look at the sun through the telescope. If you do, you may damage or lose your eyesight. C WARNING The TS635 construction total station is not designed to be explosion-proof. Do not use the instrument in coal mines, in areas contaminated with coal dust, or near other flammable substances. C WARNING Never disassemble, modify, or repair the instrument yourself. If you do, you may receive electric shocks or burns, or the instrument may catch fire. You may also impair the accuracy of the instrument. C WARNING Use only the specified battery charger and AC adapter that is supplied with the instrument. Do not use any other charger or you may cause the battery pack to catch fire or rupture. C WARNING Do not cover the battery charger and AC adapter while the battery pack is being recharged. The charger must be able to dissipate heat adequately. Coverings such as blankets or clothing can cause the charger to overheat. C WARNING Avoid recharging the battery pack in humid or dusty places, in direct sunlight, or near heat sources. Do not recharge the battery pack when it is wet. If you do, you may receive electric shocks or burns, or the battery pack may overheat or catch fire. C WARNING Although the battery pack has an auto-reset circuit breaker, you should take care not to short circuit the contacts. Short circuits can cause the battery pack to catch fire or burn you. 8 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Safety C WARNING Never burn or heat the battery. Doing so may cause the battery to leak or rupture. A leaking or ruptured battery can cause serious injury. C WARNING Before storing the battery pack or battery charger, cover the contact points with insulation tape. If you do not cover the contact points, the battery pack or charger may short circuit, causing fire, burns, or damage to the instrument. C WARNING The battery is not waterproof on its own. Do not get the battery wet when it is removed from the instrument. If water seeps into the battery, it may cause a fire or burns. Cautions Before using the instrument, read the following cautions and follow the instructions that they provide:

C CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. C CAUTION The tops of the tripod ferrules are very sharp. When handling or carrying the tripod, take care to avoid injuring yourself on the ferrules. C CAUTION Before carrying the tripod or the instrument in the carry case, check the shoulder strap and its clasp. If the strap is damaged or the clasp is not securely fastened, the carry case may fall, causing personal injury or instrument damage. The shoulder strap is available as an optional extra. C CAUTION Before setting up the tripod, make sure that no-ones hands or feet are underneath it. When the legs of the tripod are being driven into the ground, they could pierce hands or feet. C CAUTION After mounting the instrument on the tripod, securely fasten the thumb screws on the tripod legs. If the thumb screws are not securely fastened, the tripod may collapse, causing personal injury or instrument damage. C CAUTION After mounting the instrument on the tripod, securely fasten the clamp screw on the tripod. If the clamp screw is not securely fastened, the instrument may fall off the tripod, causing personal injury or instrument damage. C CAUTION Securely fasten the tribrach clamp knob. If the knob is not securely fastened, the tribrach may come loose or fall off when you lift the instrument, causing personal injury or instrument damage. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 9 Safety C CAUTION Do not stack objects on the plastic carry case, or use it as a stool. The plastic carry case is unstable and its surface is slippery. Stacking or sitting on the plastic carry case may cause personal injury or instrument damage. C CAUTION The system in the instrument may stop functioning in order to avoid any errors in measurements when the instrument detects strong electromagnetic wave(s). If this happens, turn off the instrument and remove the source of the electromagnetic wave(s). Then turn on the instrument to resume the work. Laser safety The TS635 is a Class 2 laser instrument, in accordance with IEC60825-1, Am2 (2001):

Safety of Laser Products. To counteract hazards, it is essential for all users to pay careful attention to the safety precautions and control measures specified in the standard IEC60825-1, (2001-08), particularly EN60825-1:1994, A11:1996, and A2:2001, as this refers to the hazard distance that is defined in this User Guide. Note The hazard distance is the distance from the laser at which beam irradiance or radiant exposure equals the maximum permissible value to which personnel may be exposed without being exposed to health risks. C WARNING Only qualified and trained persons should be assigned to install, adjust, and operate the laser equipment. C WARNING Precautions should be taken to ensure that persons do not look directly, with or without an optical instrument, into the beam. C WARNING Wherever practicable, the laser beam path should be located well above or below eye level. Specifications for laser emission Laser pointer Wave length Output power Distance meter Wave lenght Output power Pulse width Laser plummet (option) 630-680 nm CW: Po 1.0 mW 850-890 nm Pulse: Po 6.4 mW

< 5 ns 10 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Safety Wave length Output power 635 nm CW: Po < 1.0 mW Conforming standards EN60825-1/Am.2 : 2001 (IEC60825-1/Am.2 : 2001) Laser pointer: Class 2 Distance meter: Class 1 Laser plummet: Class 2 (Option) FDA21CFR Part 1040 Sec.1040.10 and 1040.11 Except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No.50, dated June 24, 2007. EU USA Labels Laser pointer Laser plummet (optional) Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 11 Safety 12 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Introduction In this chapter:

Q System diagram Q Care and maintenance Q Related information C H A P T E R 1 1 This user guide describes the unique capabilities and features available in the Trimble construction total station. TS635 The TS635 construction total station is a reflectorless EDM instrument. Reflectorless operation enables you to take measurements to points that are inaccessible with a prism. The software for the TS635 construction total station makes it easy for you to learn to operate one model of instrument and, with little additional training, to apply that knowledge to other models. Before using the instrument, read this user guide carefully. In particular, pay attention to the warnings and cautions that appear in the Safety section. Your comments and suggestions about the TS635 construction total station are welcome. Please contact us at the address given in the front of this manual. In addition, your feedback about the supporting documentation helps us to improve it with each revision. E-mail your comments to sales@trimble.com. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 13 1 Introduction System diagram The system diagram shows the hardware that is used with the TS635 construction total station. Note You must use the TS635 total station with tribrach W30 or W30b. 14 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Care and maintenance Introduction 1 C CAUTION The battery pack contains a Lithium-ion battery. When disposing of the battery pack, follow the environmental guidelines as determined by law and/or local regulations. The TS635 construction total station is a precision instrument that you should store, use, and clean in an appropriate way. Storage Do not store the total station in hot or humid locations. In particular, you must store the battery pack in a dry location at a temperature of less than 30 C

(86 F). High temperature or excessive humidity can cause mold to grow on the lenses. It can also cause the electronic assemblies to deteriorate, and so lead to instrument failure. When storing the instrument in areas subject to extremely low temperatures, leave the carry case open. If you do not intend to use the tribach for an extended period, lock down the tribach clamp knob and tighten its safety screw. Store the battery pack with the battery discharged. Environmental conditions Do not leave the instrument in direct sunlight or in a closed vehicle for prolonged periods. Overheating the instrument may reduce its efficiency. Sudden changes in temperature may cloud the lenses and drastically reduce the measurable distance, or cause an electrical system failure. If there has been a sudden change in temperature, leave the instrument in a closed carry case in a warm location until the temperature of the instrument returns to room temperature. If the total station has been used in wet conditions, immediately wipe off any moisture and dry the instrument completely before returning it to the carry case. The TS635 construction total station contains sensitive electronic assemblies which have been well protected against dust and moisture. However, if dust or moisture gets into it, severe damage could result. The carry case is designed to be watertight, but you should not leave it exposed to rain for an extended period. If exposure to rain is unavoidable, make sure that the carry case is placed with the Trimble nameplate facing upward. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 15 1 Introduction Cleaning Do not use organic solvents such as ether or print thinner to clean the non-metallic parts of the instrument, such as the keyboard, or the painted or printed surfaces. Doing so could result in discoloration of the surface or in peeling of printed characters. Clean these parts only with a soft cloth or tissue that is lightly moistened with water or a mild detergent. To clean the optical lenses, lightly wipe them with a soft cloth or a lens tissue that is moistened with alcohol. Adjusting and tightening When adjusting the leveling screws, stay as close as possible to the center of each screws range. The center is indicated by a line on the screw. The reticle plate cover has been correctly mounted. Do not release it or subject it to excessive force, for example in an attempt to make it watertight. Reticle plate cover Before attaching the battery pack, make sure that the contact surfaces on the battery and TS635 construction total station are clean. Securely press the cap that covers the data output/external power input connector terminal. The instrument is only watertight if the cap is attached securely, or when the data output/external power input connector is used. The TS635 construction total station is not watertight when the data output/external power input connector is used. Static electricity from the human body, discharged through the data output/external power input connector, can damage the instrument. Before handling the instrument, touch any other conductive material once in order to remove static electricity. Be careful not to pinch your finger between the telescope and trunnion of the instrument. 16 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Introduction 1 Related information Contact your local Trimble dealer for more information about the support agreement contracts for software and firmware, and an extended warranty program for hardware. Consider a training course to help you use your total station to its fullest potential. For more information, go to the Trimble website at www.trimble.com. Alternatively, send an email to trimble_support@trimble.com. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 17 1 Introduction 18 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide C H A P T E R 2 Setting up the Instrument 2 This chapter describes how to prepare the TS635 construction total station before you use it in the field. In this chapter:

Q Unpacking and repacking the instrument Q Charging the battery pack Q Setting up the tripod Q Centering the instrument Q Leveling the instrument Q Focusing the telescope Q Setting the measurement mode and preparing the target Q Viewing and changing the measurement settings Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 19 2 Setting up the Instrument Unpacking and repacking the instrument Note Handle the TS635 construction total station carefully to protect it from shocks and excessive vibration. To unpack the instrument, grip the carry handle and then carefully remove the instrument from the carry case. To repack the instrument, refer to the following figure, Charging the battery pack Before charging the battery pack, read the following warnings, cautions, and notes. C WARNING Do not damage the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery. A damaged battery can cause an explosion or fire, and can result in personal injury and/or property damage. To prevent injury or damage:

Do not use or charge the battery if it appears to be damaged. Signs of damage include, but are not limited to, discoloration, warping, and leaking battery fluid. Do not expose the battery to fire, high temperature, or direct sunlight. Do not immerse the battery in water. Do not use or store the battery inside a vehicle during hot weather. Do not drop or puncture the battery. Do not open the battery or short-circuit its contacts. C WARNING Avoid contact with the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery if it appears to be leaking. Battery fluid is corrosive, and contact with it can result in personal injury and/or property damage. To prevent injury or damage:

If the battery leaks, avoid contact with the battery fluid. If battery fluid gets into your eyes, immediately rinse your eyes with clean water and 20 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Setting up the Instrument 2 seek medical attention. Do not rub your eyes!

If battery fluid gets onto your skin or clothing, immediately use clean water to wash off the battery fluid. C WARNING Charge and use the rechargeable Lithium-ion battery only in strict accordance with the instructions. Charging or using the battery in unauthorized equipment can cause an explosion or fire, and can result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. To prevent injury or damage:

Do not charge or use the battery if it appears to be damaged or leaking. Charge the Lithium-ion battery only in a product that is specified to charge it. Be sure to follow all instructions that are provided with the battery charger. Discontinue charging a battery that gives off extreme heat or a burning odor. Use the battery only in equipment that is specified to use it. Use the battery only for its intended use and according to the instructions in the product documentation. C WARNING To charge the battery pack, use only the battery charger and AC adapter that are supplied with the instrument. Do not use any other charger or you may cause the battery pack to catch fire or rupture. The enclosed battery pack cannot be used with other chargers. C WARNING Do not cover the battery charger and AC adapter while the battery pack is being recharged. The charger must be able to dissipate heat adequately. Coverings such as blankets or clothing can cause the charger to overheat. C WARNING Avoid recharging the battery pack in humid or dusty places, in direct sunlight, or near heat sources. Do not recharge the battery pack when it is wet. If you do, you may receive electric shocks or burns, or the battery pack may overheat or catch fire. C WARNING Although the battery pack has an auto-reset circuit breaker, you should take care not to short circuit the contacts. Short circuits can cause the battery pack to catch fire or burn you. C WARNING Never burn or heat the battery. Doing so may cause the battery to leak or rupture. A leaking or ruptured battery can cause serious injury. C WARNING Before storing the battery pack or battery charger, cover the contact points with insulation tape. If you do not cover the contact points, the battery pack or charger may short circuit, causing fire, burns, or damage to the instrument. C WARNING The battery is not waterproof on its own. Do not get the battery wet when it is removed from the instrument. If water seeps into the battery, it may cause a fire or burns. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 21 2 Setting up the Instrument Calibration on light (0) Power jack Charge light (0) 5 V, 4 A Battery slot 1 Calibration button Top edge of case Charge light (1) Calibration on light (1) Battery slot 2 Applying power Plug in the charger to the supplied AC adapter to turn the unit on. The power input must be 5 V with at least 4 A of current capability. Each battery may take up to 2 A while charging. Charging the battery Slide a battery into either battery slot to begin charging. The adjacent charge indicator will illuminate yellow when charging is in progress. The charge indicator will change to green when charging is complete. Take note of the following:

Charger slots are completely independent so a battery may be inserted regardless of what is occurring in the other battery slot. Charging may take 2-4 hours if the battery was normally discharged. Charging may take up to 5 hours with a completely drained battery which has been stored for several months without use. 22 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Setting up the Instrument 2 If the charge indicator(s) are blinking, there is a problem with the battery or with the charger. Lithium-ion batteries should not be charged above 40 C to 45 C (104 F to 113 F). A blinking charge light may mean that the batteries are too hot for charging. Charging will resume after the batteries cool down. Conditioning / calibrating a battery You must calibrate the battery (condition it) once every 6 months or more often if required. Calibration ensures that the reported remaining battery charge is accurate. To start calibrating a battery, hold down the calibration button on the unit and then insert a battery. Only the battery that was inserted while the button is pressed begins calibration. During battery calibration, the battery will be charged, discharged completely, and then recharged again. Calibration should complete in approximately 17 hours. Do not cover the charger vents during a calibration cycle. The blue calibration indicator light(s) blink slowly (on 1.5 sec, off 2 sec) while calibration is in progress. The charge light(s) may be on or off during the calibration cycle if the case temperature does not get too high. When a calibration cycle is completed, the calibration light stops blinking but remains on until the corresponding battery is removed. Case temperature:

The temperature of the bottom case may continue to climb to approximately 43 C before temperature regulation is enabled to keep the case from becoming warmer. As the battery voltage drops, the case cools down and the automatic temperature limiting is no longer necessary. This minimizes the time required to discharge a battery. If the case temperature continues to become too hot internally, even after temperature regulation is enabled, there is a secondary failsafe that aborts the calibration completely. If an abort occurs, the calibration light(s) blink rapidly and battery charging is re-enabled. Detaching the battery pack C CAUTION To avoid problems with the electricity supply, do not touch the contacts on the battery pack. 1. 2. If the instrument is turned on, press [PWR] to turn it off. Turn the battery box release knob counterclockwise, open the battery box cover and then pull the battery pack out of the battery box. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 23 2 Setting up the Instrument Attaching the battery pack 1. 2. 3. 4. Clear any dust or other foreign particles from the battery socket. Turn the battery box release knob counterclockwise and then open the battery box cover. Put the battery pack into the battery box. Connect the battery pack at the bottom with the connecting direction faced inside. Close the battery box cover and then turn the knob clockwise until you hear a click sound. CAUTION If the battery pack is not attached securely, this could adversely affect the watertightness of the instrument. 24 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Setting up the tripod C CAUTION The tips of the tripod ferrules are very sharp. When handling or carrying the tripod, take care to avoid injuring yourself on the ferrules. Setting up the Instrument 2 Note Do not carry the instrument while it is attached to a tripod. 1. Open the tripod legs far enough for the instrument to be stable. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Locate the tripod directly over the station point. To check the position of the tripod, look through the center hole in the tripod head. Firmly press the tripod ferrules into the ground. Level the top surface of the tripod head. Securely fasten the thumb screws on the tripod legs. Place the instrument on the tripod head. Insert the tripod mounting screw into the center hole of the base plate of the instrument. 8. Tighten the tripod mounting screw. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 25 2 Setting up the Instrument Centering the instrument When you center the instrument, you align its central axis precisely over the station point. To center the instrument, you can use the optical plummet, the laser plummet, or a plumb bob. The plumb bob is sold separately. Centering with the optical plummet Note For high accuracy, check and adjust the optical plummet before you center the instrument. 1. 2. Set up the instrument on the tripod. See above. Look through the optical plummet and align the reticle with the station point. To do this, turn the leveling screws until the center mark over the image of the station point. of the reticle is directly 3. While supporting the tripod head with one hand, loosen the tripod leg clamps and adjust the lengths of the legs until the air bubble is in the center of the circular level. 4. Tighten the tripod leg clamps. 5. Use the electronic level to level the instrument. See also Leveling the instrument, page 28. 6. Look through the optical plummet to make sure that the image of the station point is still in the center of the reticle mark. 7. If the station point is off-center, do one of the following:

If the station point is slightly off-center, loosen the tripod mounting screw and then center the instrument on the tripod. Use only direct movement to center the instrument. Do not rotate it. When the instrument is centered, tighten the mounting screw. If there is major displacement of the station point, repeat this procedure starting with Step 2. Centering with the laser plummet C CAUTION Do not see the laser directly. Note For high accuracy, check and adjust the laser plummet before you center the instrument. 1. 2. Set up the instrument on the tripod. See page 25. Turn on the laser plummet. 26 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Setting up the Instrument 2 3. Align the laser pointer to the station point. To do this, turn the leveling screws until the laser pointer is over the station point. 4. While supporting the tripod head with one hand, loosen the tripod leg clamps and adjust the lengths or the legs until the air bubble is the center of the circular level. 5. Tighten the tripod leg clamps. 6. Use the electronic level to level the instrument. See Leveling the instrument, page 28. 7. 8. Check that the laser pointer is over the station point. If the station point is off-center, do one of the following:

If the station point is slightly off-center, loosen the tripod mounting screw and then center the instrument on the tripod. Use only direct movement to center the instrument. Do not rotate it. When the instrument is centered, tighten the mounting screw. If there is major displacement of the station point, repeat this procedure starting with Step 2. Centering with a plumb bob 1. Set up the instrument on the tripod. See page 25. 2. Hang the plumb line on the hook of the tripod mounting screw. 3. Adjust the length of the plumb line so that the tip of the plumb bob is at the height of the station point. 4. Loosen the tripod mounting screw slightly. 5. Using both hands to support the outer side of the tribrach, carefully slide the instrument about on the tripod head until the tip of the plumb bob is positioned over the exact center of the station point. Note To confirm that the instrument is precisely aligned, check its position from two directions at right-angles to each other. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 27 2 Setting up the Instrument Leveling the instrument When you level the instrument, use th electronic level to you make the vertical axis of the instrument exactly vertical. During leveling, always set the instrument in the Face 1 direction. See Figure3.1, page 34. To level the instrument:

1. Move the bubble into the circle on the circular level and then turn on the power. 2. Rotate the alidade until the bottom edge of the keyboard panel is parallel to the two of the leveling screws (B and C). A A B B C C 3. Use leveling screws B and C to move the bubble into the center of the electronic level. 1 Bottom edge of the keyboard panel 4. Rotate the alidade approximately 90. 5. Use leveling screw A to move the bubble into the center of the electronic level. 6. Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 to center the bubble in both positions. 7. Rotate the alidade 180. If the bubble in the electronic level remains centered, the instrument is level. If the bubble moves off center, adjust the electronic level. For detailed instructions, see Adjusting the electronic level, page 118. A B C 2 Bottom edge of the keyboard panel 28 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Focusing the telescope C WARNING Never look at the sun through the telescope. If you do, you may damage or lose your eyesight. Setting up the Instrument 2 When you sight the instrument, you aim the telescope at the target, bring the target image into focus, and align the image with the center cross-hairs of the reticle. To sight the instrument:

1. Adjust the diopter:

a. b. Aim the telescope at a blank area, such as the sky or a piece of paper. Looking through the eyepiece, rotate the diopter ring until the reticle cross-hairs are in sharp focus. 2. Eliminate parallax:

Diopter ring Telescope focusing ring a. b. Aim the telescope at the target image. Rotate the focusing ring until the target image is in sharp focus on the reticle cross-hairs. c. Move your eye vertically and laterally to check whether the target image moves relative to the reticle cross-hairs. If the target image does not move, there is no parallax. If the target image does move, rotate the telescope focusing ring and repeat Step 2c. 3. Rotate the tangent screw. The final turn of the tangent screw should be in a clockwise direction, to align the target accurately on the center cross-hairs. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 29 2 Setting up the Instrument Setting the measurement mode and preparing the target The TS635 construction total station has two measurements modes: Prism mode

(Prism) and Reflectorless mode (N-Prism). To change the mode at any time from any observation screen, hold down [MSR1] or [MSR2]. Set the measurement mode depending on the target you want to measure, as shown here. Target Prism, reflector sheet Other, reflective materials Target settings Prism mode Reflectorless mode Indicator on status bar No sign In some cases, you can measure to another target that is not appropriate to the set measurement mode. Note The TS635 Total Station is Laser Class 1 in the measurement function, and Laser Class 2 in the Laser Pointer function. Do not sight the prism when the Laser Pointer is on. Measurement with a prism As the TS635 construction total station is extremely sensitive, multiple reflections on the prism surface can sometimes cause a significant loss in accuracy. To maintain the accuracy of your measurements:

Use a prism with thin edges. Thin edges Do not use a prism with scratches, a dirty surface, a chipped center, or thick edges. Chipped center Thick edges 30 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Setting up the Instrument 2 When measuring a short distance, incline the prism slightly so that the EDM can ignore unnecessary reflections on the prism surface, as shown below.

Not completely square to the sighting axis

Completely square to the sighting axis Hold the prism securely in place and do not move while taking measurements. In Prism mode, to avoid false measurements on objects other than the prism or reflector-sheet, targets that are less reflective than the prism or reflector sheet are not measured. Even if you start a measurement, measured values are not displayed. To measure less reflective objects, use the N-Prism (Reflectorless) mode. Measurement in reflectorless (N-Prism) mode The TS635 Construction Total Station enables reflectorless measurements up to 300 m

(984 feet). The intensity of the reflection from the target determines the distance the TS635 can measure in this mode. The color and condition of the target surface also affect the measurable distance, even if the targeted objects are the same. Some less-reflective targets may not be measured. The following table describes some examples of targets and approximate measuring distances:

Target Traffic signs, reflectors Paper (white), veneer (new) Wall (brightly painted), brick You can measure approximately ... 500 meters (1640 feet) 300 meters (990 feet) 100 to 200 meters (330 to 660 feet) Measurable distances may be shorter or measurement intervals may be longer if either of the following conditions apply:

the angle of the laser against the target is small the surface of the target is wet In direct sunlight, the measurable distance may be shorter. In this case, try to throw a shadow on the target. Targets with completely flat surfaces, such as mirrors, cannot be measured unless the beam and the target are perpendicular to each other. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 31 2 Setting up the Instrument Make sure there are no obstacles between the instrument and the target when taking measurements. When you need to take measurements across a road or a place where vehicles or other objects are frequently moving, take several measurements to a target for the best result. Viewing and changing the measurement settings Hold down [MSR1] or [MSR2] for one second. To move the cursor between the fields, press [^]

or [v]. To change the value in the selected field, press [<]

or [>]. The available values are:

Field Target Constant (prism constant) Mode Track Values Prism mode N-Prism mode

-999 mm through 999 mm Precise Normal Track (continuous MSR) ON Track (continuous MSR) OFF Target field If the measurement is started with the Target field set to Prism mode, there is a dash in front of the prism constant, for example 18 mm. If the measurement is started with the Target field set to N-Prism (Reflectorless) mode, there is square bracket in front of the prism constant, for example ]18 mm. The displayed symbol will continuously move from left to right over the prism constant in the display. Prism constant The factory default of the prism constant value of the TS635 construction total station is -30 mm. Change the prism constant to match the constant value of the prism you are using. Once you have set up the instrument, you can turn on the TS635 construction total station, change the instrument settings, and start a job. See also Getting Started, page 33. 32 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide C H A P T E R 3 3 After you set up the instrument, see page 19, you can start using the TS635 Construction Total Station. This chapter describes the basic features of the instrument, how to turn it on, change the instrument settings, and start a job. Getting Started In this chapter:

Q Parts of the instrument Q Instrument keyboard and display Q Turning on the instrument Q Turning off the instrument Q Regional configuration Q List available jobs or data Q Entering data Q Creating or opening a job Q Measuring distances Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 33 3 Getting Started Parts of the instrument Figure 3.1 and Figure 3.2 show the main parts of the TS635 Construction Total Station. Carrying handle Optical sight

(finder) Horizontal axis indication mark Vertical tangent screw Battery box Battery box release knob Horizontal tangent screw The laser safety label shown below is attached to the underside of the keyboard. Complies with 21 CFR 1040 . 10 and 1040 . 11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No . 50 , dated June 24 , 2007 MADE IN JAPAN NIKON-TRIMBLE CO.,LTD. Technoport Mitsuiseimei Bldg. 16-2,Minamikamata 2-chome, Ota-ku, Tokyo 144-0035 Japan Telescope focusing ring Telescope eyepiece Diopter ring Reticle plate cover Face 1 display and keyboard The label shown below is attached to the underside of the keyboard. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules . Operation is subject to the following two conditions :

1 this device may not cause harmful interference , and 2 this device must accept any interference received , including interference that may cause undesired operation. Tribrach clamp knob Figure 3.1 Back view of the TS635 Construction Total Station 34 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide The laser safety label shown below is attached to the side of the telescope. Laser Radiation Do not stare into beam Class 2 Laser Product Po1mW CW =630-690nm IEC60825-1:2001 Objective LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED FROM THIS PART Optical plummet

(shown here) or optional optical plummet Circular level Leveling screw Tribrach Getting Started 3 The laser safety label shown below is attached to the telescope. Horizontal axis indication mark Battery box Battery box release knob Data output/

external power input connector

(input voltage 4.5-5.2 V DC) The laser safety label shown below is attached here

(underneath). LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT Po<1.0mW CW =635nm I E C 6 0 8 2 5 - 1 , 2 0 0 1 Figure 3.2 Front view of the TS635 Construction Total Station Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 35 3 Getting Started Instrument keyboard and display Instrument keyboard Use the buttons on the instrument keyboard to carry out the following functions:

Button Function Turns the instrument on or off. Illumination button. Turns the backlight on or off. Provides access to the switch window if held down for one second. Displays the MENU screen. Changes the button input mode between alphanumeric and numeric if pressed when you are in a PT or CD field. See ... page 44 page 39 page 91 page 41 Records measured data, moves on to the next screen, or confirms and accepts the entered data in input mode. page 89 Returns to the previous screen. In numeric or alphanumeric mode, deletes input. Starts distance measurement, using the measure mode settings for the [MSR1]

button. Displays measurement mode settings, if held down for one second. Starts distance measurement, using the measure mode settings for the [MSR2]

button. Displays measurement mode settings, if held down for one second. page 53 page 53 36 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Button Function Moves to the next available display screen. Changes the fields that appear on the DSP1, DSP2, and DSP3 screens, if held down for one second. Displays the Angle menu. Displays the Layout function menu. In numeric mode, enters 7. Displays the Station Setup menu. In numeric mode, enters 8. In alphanumeric mode, enters A, B, C, or 8. Displays the Programs menu. In numeric mode, enters 9. In alphanumeric mode, enters D, E, F, or 9. Displays the (HOT) menu, which includes Height of Target and Temp-Press settings. In numeric mode, enters (minus). In alphanumeric mode, enters. (period),

(minus), or + (plus). Displays the Bubble indicator. In numeric mode, enters 0. In alphanumeric mode, enters *, /, =, or 0. Getting Started 3 See ... page 40 page 60 page 60 page 60 page 75 page 42 page 42 Status bar The status bar appears on the right of every screen. It contains icons that indicate the status of various system functions. Status bar Laser pointer indicator The icon appears as you turn on the laser pointer. When the icon appears on the screen, the emitting power is laser class 2:

Laser pointer ON. If there is no icon, the laser pointer is off. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 37 3 Getting Started Input mode indicator The input mode indicator appears only when you are entering points or coordinates. It shows the data input mode:

Input mode is numeric. Press a button on the number pad to enter the number printed on the button. Input mode is alphabetic. Press a button on the number pad to enter the first letter printed beside the button. Press the button repeatedly to cycle through all the letters assigned to that button. For example, to enter the letter O in alphabetic mode, press [5] three times. Battery indicator Shows each voltage level of the right and left internal batteries individually. When the external battery is connected with the instrument, its voltage is shown. Top: left battery Internal batteries:

Bottom: right battery External battery Internal batteries External battery Battery level indication Battery low If the battery level is critically low, a message appears. 38 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 EDM measurement status When you are taking measurements, the EDM measurement status shows the mode that is being used. When you display observation data, the EDM measurement status shows the mode that was used when the data was collected.:

Reflectorless mode If there is no icon, Prism mode is being used. LCD backlight, laser pointer, beep sound, and contrast adjustment Press the illumination key to open the the 4-switch window and then press:

[1] to turn the LCD backlight on/off

[2] to turn the laser pointer on /off

[3] to turn the beep sound on /off

[4] to open the contrast adjustment window.

[ENT] / [4]

[ESC]

Switch setup window Contrast adjustment window Do the following:

To turn on/off each function, press [ENT] when the option 1, 2, 3 or 4 is selected or directly press the [1], [2], [3], or [4] key. Holding down the illumination key for one second also turns on/off the LCD backlight. To move the cursor up and down, press [^] or [v]. To adjust the constrast, in the contrast adjustment window, press [>] or [<] . To close the window, press [ESC]. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 39 3 Getting Started Switch 1: Turning on/off the LCD backlight LCD backlight is on LCD backlight is off Switch 2: Turning on/off the laser pointer Laser pointer is on Laser pointer is off The icon appears while turning on the laser pointer. When the icon is on the screen, the emitting power is Laser Class 2. Switch 3: Turning on/off the sound Sound is on Sound is off

[DSP] button Use the [DSP] button to change the current display screen or to change display settings. Switching between display screens When several display screens are available:

the DSP indicator appears at the top left of the screen the screen indicator ( for example, 1/4) appears at the top right To move to the next available screen, press [DSP]. For example, if you are currently in the second display screen, press [DSP] to move to the third display screen. The screen indicator changes from 2/4 to 3/4. When the secondary distance unit is set, an additional screen is available. It shows the HD, VD, and SD values. See also Other settings, page 94. The smallest unit of display for distances measured in feet-and-inches is 1/16 in. Smaller units are impractical in the field. When the actual value is greater than 99999'11"15/16, the > symbol appears. If the actual distance is less than 9999'11''15/16, the ` (solid triangle) symbol appears. This does not affect calculations. The precise value is used internally in all cases. 40 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 Customizing items in the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) To customize the items that are displayed on the DSP1, DSP2, and DSP3 screens:

1. Hold down [DSP] for one second. 2. Use the arrow buttons [^], [v], [<], and [>] to highlight the item that you want to change:

3. Press the of items that can be displayed for this item. softkey to scroll through the list or The items that you can choose from are HA, AZ, HL, VA, V%, SD, VD, HD, Z, and (none). 4. To save your changes, press the Save softkey. Alternatively, highlight the last item for DSP3 and press [ENT]. The DSP screens show the items you have selected. Except for the (none) item, you cannot display the same item on more than one line of the same screen. The items displayed in the DSP1, DSP2, DSP3, and DSP4 screens are also used in the corresponding Layout screens (LO2, LO3, LO4, and LO5). You can also customize the displayed items in Layout. Header characters The following header characters appear in DSP screens:

Colon (:) indicates that tilt correction is applied to the value. Hash symbol (#) indicates that tilt correction is off. Underscore (_) under the tilt correction character indicates that Sea Level Correction or Scale factor is applied.

[MODE] button The [MODE] button is on the top row of the TS635 keypad. Use it to change the keyboard mode for the current screen. Changing the input mode while entering points or codes When the cursor is in a point (PT) or code (CD) field, press [MODE] to change the input mode between alphanumeric (A) and numeric (1). The input mode indicator in the status bar changes to show the current input mode. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 41 3 Getting Started When the cursor is in a height (HT) field, only numeric input mode is available. Pressing [MODE] has no effect when the cursor is in a HT field.

[HOT] key The HOT key menu is available from any observation screen. To display the HOT key menu, press [HOT]. Changing the height of the target 1. Press [HOT] to display the HOT menu. 2. Do one of the following:

Press [1]. Select HT. Press [ENT]. Enter the target height or select the height from the HT stack. 3. 4. Note To display the HT stack, press the Stack softkey. The HT stack stores the last 20 HT values entered. Setting the current temperature and pressure 1. Press [HOT] to display the HOT menu. 2. Do one of the following:

Press [2]. Select Temp-Press. Press [ENT]. Enter the ambient temperature and pressure. The ppm value is updated automatically. 3. 4. Bubble indicator The bubble indicator appears if the instrument goes out of level while the compensator is turned on. It also appears directly after the start up screen. To display the bubble indicator in an observation screen at any other time, press

. 42 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 The TS635 Construction Total Station has a two-axis level compensation. To turn the leveling compensators on or off, press [<] or [>]. When the levelling compensators are turned off, the text OFF appears on the screen. If the instrument is more than 3'30" out of level, the text OVER appears on the screen. To return to the observation screen, press [ESC] or [ENT]. Laser plummet Laser plummet on / off Do one of the following:

To turn the laser plummet switch on, press

. To close the bubble indicator window, press [ESC]. To turn the laser plummet switch off, press

. To open the luminance adjustment window, press [Lumi.]. To turn the laser plummet switch off and close the bubble indicator window, press [ESC]. Laser luminance adjustment Laser luminance can be set to 4 levels. To set the luminance brighter by one level, press

[Light] once. To set the luminance darker by one level, press

[Dark] once To return to the bubble indicator window, press [ESC] or

[ENT]. The current setting of leveling compensators is indicated by header characters (:, #, :, and

#) after field labels (such as HA, VA, SD, and HD) in observation screens. For more information, see Header characters, page 41. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 43 3 Getting Started Turning on the instrument Press the [PWR] button. The start-up screen appears. It shows the model name, current temperature, pressure, date, and time. The display automatically changes to the electronic level after two seconds. If you entered your name or your companys name in the Owners detail field, the text from this field appears on the start-up screen. To set the Owners detail field, press [MENU] and then select Settings / Other. See also Other settings, page 94. Turning off the instrument Press [PWR] and [ENT]. 1. 2. Do one of the following:

Press...

[ENT] again the Reset softkey the Sleep softkey

[ESC]

To... turn off the instrument reboot the software and re-start the instrument access the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) without an open job. put the instrument into power-saving mode cancel the power-off process and return to the previous screen Sleep mode To put the instrument into sleep mode, do one of the following:

In the Press [ENT] OFF screen, press the Sleep softkey. Enable the Power Save setting. See also Power saving, page 94. The instrument wakes up if any of the following events occur:

You press a button The instrument receives a remote control command You rotate the alidade You tilt the telescope 44 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 Regional configuration To provide easier configuration for common regional settings, you can quickly configure the TS635 Construction Total Station to a pre-set combination of default regional settings. The Regional Configuration screen appears only after the language configuration is complete and the instrument has rebooted. 1. Follow the steps in the language section on page 95. 2. 3. Once the instrument reboots, the Regional Configuration screen appears. Press [^] or [v] to highlight the required regional settings and then press [ENT]. If you do not want to change the current settings, press [ESC] and quit. The instrument will continue to use the last settings that were configured. The settings affected by the Regional Configuration screen are:

Category Angle Distance Coordinates Power Save Communication Units Rec Others Setting VA zero Resolution Scale T-P Corr. Sea Level C&R corr. Order Label Main Unit EDM Unit Sleep Ext. Comm Baud Length Parity Stop bit Angle Distance Temp Press Rec Data CD Field Add Const XYZ disp 2nd Unit CD Input Europe Zenith 5"

1.000000 On Off 0.132 ENZ ENZ Off Off 5 minutes Nikon 4800 8 None 1 GON meters C mm Hg ON ON 1000 Fast None

<ABC>

International Zenith 5"

1.000000 On Off 0.132 ENZ ENZ Off Off 5 minutes Nikon 4800 8 None 1 DEG meters C mm Hg ON ON 1000 Fast None

<ABC>

United States Zenith 5"

1.000000 On Off 0.132 NEZ NEZ Off Off 5 minutes Nikon 4800 8 None 1 DEG US-ft F In Hg ON ON 1000 Fast None

<ABC>

Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 45 3 Getting Started The default regional configuration pre-set is Europe settings. See also Settings (basic job settings), page 90. List available jobs or data The TS635 Construction Total Station lists available jobs or data when you do any of the following:

view or edit data (Press [MENU] then select Data) open the Job Manager (Press [MENU] then select Job) search for points or codes The current cursor position is shown in inverted colors

(it appears as white text on a black background). Press [^] to move the cursor one line up, or press [v] to move the cursor one line down. If the Page Up icon before the current page. Press [<] to move up one page. appears, there are more pages If the Page Down icon appears, there are more pages after the current page. Press [>] to move down one page. To select an item from the list, move the cursor onto the item and press [ENT]. Entering data You can enter the following into the TS635 Construction Total Station:

A point name or number, see page 46 A code, see page 49 Entering a point name or number You can use numeric or alphanumeric names up to 20 characters long to identify points. The default name for a new point is the last point name entered, with the last digit incremented. For example, if the last point name was A100, the default name for the next point is A101. If the last character of the previous point name is alphabetic, the default point name is identical to the last point name. When the cursor is in a PT (point) field, there are several ways to specify a point, or to enter coordinates. You can:

Enter an existing point, see page 47 46 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 Enter a new point, see page 47 Press [ENT] without a point name, see page 47 Specify a wildcard, see page 48 Record an instant measurement, see page 48 Enter a point from a point stack, see page 49 Enter a point from the point list, see page 49 Entering an existing point When you enter a known point name or number, the coordinates of that point are briefly displayed. A short beep sounds before the next screen appears or the next field is selected. To adjust the duration of the coordinate window display, press [MENU] then select Settings /

Others. To leave the window open until you press

[ENT], set the XYZ disp field to +ENT. See also page 94. Entering a new point When you enter a new point name or number, a coordinate input screen appears. Enter the coordinates for the point in NE, NEZ, or elevation-only (Z) format. To store the point in the current job, press [ENT] on the last line (the CD field). Pressing [ENT] without a point name To use a point without recording the coordinates, press

[ENT] in a PT field, without entering a point name. The input coordinates are used in the calculation but they are not saved in the database. The message This PT will not be recorded appears. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 47 3 Getting Started Specifying a wildcard (*) If you include an asterisk ( for example, A100*) when you enter a point or code name, a list of points that match the entered text appears. Use [^] or [v] to move the cursor to the point that you want to use. Then press [ENT]. If the Page Up one page on the list. You can also use [<]. icon appears, you can use it to move up If the Page Down down one page. You can also use [>]. icon appears, you can use it to move When you select a point from the list, its coordinates are displayed and a beep sounds. Entering a point by recording an instant measurement 1. Press the MSR softkey:

An observation screen appears. 2. 3. To start a measurement, press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. To change the height of the target, select the HT softkey. 4. When you have finished the measurement, press

[ENT] to go to the point recording screen. 5. Enter the point or code name and then press [ENT]. When you move the cursor to a field, the current or default value appears in inverted colors. (It appears as white text on a black background). This is the default Replace All input mode. To change the input mode to Overwrite and highlight the first character, press [>]. To move the cursor to the end of the string, press [<]. 48 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 Entering a point from the point stack The point stack is a list of the last 20 point names used, in chronological order from last used to first used. To enter a point from the point stack:

1. 2. Select the Stack softkey when the cursor is in the PT field. The stack appears. Press [^] or [v] to move the cursor to the point that you want to use. 3. Press [ENT]. When you return to the point input screen, the selected point name is entered in the PT field, incremented by one. For example, if you selected the A101 point, A102 appears in the PT field. Entering a point from the point list 1. 2. Select the List softkey when the cursor is in the PT field. A list of existing points appears. Press [^] or [v] to move the cursor to the point that you want to use. 3. Press [ENT]. When you return to the point input screen, the selected point name is entered in the PT field. Add numeric or alphabetic characters if required. Entering a code The CD (Code) field defaults to the last code used. You can select a different code in the input point screen. Codenames can be numeric or alphanumeric, and up to 16 characters long. There are several ways to enter a code:

Enter a code directly, see page 50 Enter a code from the code stack, see page 50 Enter a code from the code list, see page 50 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 49 3 Getting Started Entering a code directly 1. To change the input mode to alphanumeric or numeric, press [MODE]. 2. Use the keypad to enter the code. Entering a code from the code stack The code stack is a list of up to 20 recently used codes. When you reboot the TS635 Construction Total Station, the code stack is cleared. To enter a code from the code stack:

1. 2. Select the Stack softkey when the cursor is in the CD field. The stack appears. To move the cursor to the code that you want to use, press [^] or [v]. 3. Press [ENT]. The selected code is copied to the CD field. Entering a code from the code list 1. 2. Select the List softkey when the cursor is in the CD field. A list of existing codes appear. Press [^] or [v] to highlight the feature code that you want to use. 3. Press [ENT]. A layer has an arrow at the end of the code label. If you highlight a layer in the list and then press [ENT], the codes and layers in that layer are displayed. When you return to the input screen, the selected code is entered in the CD field. Advanced feature: Searching for a code using the first character Items are shown in alphabetic order. To find a code quickly when the code list appears, use the first-character search. For example, to see feature codes that begin with T, use the keypad to enter the letter T (press [1] twice). After each button press, the input mode field displays the selected letter. For example, if you press [1], S appears. If you quickly press [1] again, T appears. If you do not press the [1] button again, the letter T is selected. 50 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 Once you select a letter, the cursor moves to the feature code beginning with that letter. If there is no code beginning with that letter, the cursor moves to the next available letter. Entering values in feet and inches If US Survey Feet (US-Ft) or International Feet (I-Ft) is selected as the distance unit, you can enter and display distances, HIs, HTs, and coordinate values in decimal feet or in feet and inches. See also Unit, page 93, and Other settings, page 94. To enter values in feet and inches in an input screen, enter the elements, separated by periods (.), in the following format:

<Feet> [.] <Inches> [.] <Numerator> [.] <Denominator> [ENT]

(011) (015) (099) The default denominator is 16. If the denominator is 16, you do not have to enter it, and it is not displayed on the screen. For example, if you enter

[2] [.] [0] [8] [.] [5] [.] [ENT], it appears as 2'08" 5/ (2 feet, 8 and 5/16ths inches). The following examples show how to enter various values:

To enter... 65' 5 3/8"

65'

65' 5"

65' 5 3/8"

5 3/8"

Key in...

[6] [5] [.] [5] [.] [3] [.] [8] [ENT]

[6] [5] [ENT]

[6] [5] [.] [5] [ENT]

[6] [5] [.] [5] [.] [6] [ENT]

[0] [.] [5] [.] [3] [.] [8] [ENT] or [0] [.] [5] [.] [6] [ENT]

The numerator and denominator that you enter are automatically converted to the closest value from the following list: 0, 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 3/4, 7/8, 1/16, 3/16, 5/16, 7/16, 9/16, 11/16, 13/16, 15/16. If the denominator is 16, it is not shown on the screen. Creating or opening a job To record data on the TS635 Construction Total Station, you must create or open a job. Note Before using the TS635 Construction Total Station for the first time, check that you are using the required job settings. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 51 3 Getting Started Creating a new job 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Press [MENU]. The MENU screen appears. Press [1]. The Job Manager appears. Select the Creat softkey. The Create Job screen appears. Enter the job name. To check the job settings, select the Sett softkey. You cannot change the settings for a job once you have created the job. Press [ENT] in the last field of the Job Sett screen. The new job is created. Note You can only have a maximum of 32 jobs. Creating a control job A control job, or common file, stores coordinate data that is used by several field jobs. To create a control job in the office:

1. 2. Press [MENU]. The MENU screen appears. Press [1] or select Job. The Job Manager appears. 3. Move the cursor to the job to use as the control job. 4. 5. Select the Ctrl softkey. Select the Yes softkey. When you enter a point name or number, the system searches in the current job first. If the point is not found in the current job, the search is automatically extended to the control job. If the point is found in the control job, the selected point is copied to the current job as a UP record. 52 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Getting Started 3 Measuring distances C WARNING Never look at the sun through the telescope. If you do, you may damage or lose your eyesight. C WARNING Precautions should be taken to ensure that persons do not look directly, with or without an optical instrument, into the beam. C WARNING Laser beam path should be located well above or below eye level wherever practicable. Sighting a prism reflector Sight the telescope until you see cross-hairs at the center of the prism reflector. Sighting a single prism Sighting a tiltable single prism Taking a distance measurement To take a distance measurement, press [MSR1] or [MSR2] in the Basic Measurement Screen

(BMS) or in any observation screen. While the instrument is taking a measurement, the prism constant appears in a smaller font. If tracking is set to ON, measurements are taken continuously until you press [MSR1], [MSR2], or [ESC]. Each time a measurement is taken, the distance is updated. To change the height of target (HT), temperature, or pressure, press [HOT]. See also [HOT] button, page 42. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 53 3 Getting Started Settings that relate to corrections (T-P corr, Sea Level, C&R corr., and Map projection) are included in the job settings and are job-specific. To change any of these settings, you must create a new job. See also Job, page 86, and Settings (basic job settings), page 90. Viewing and changing the measurement settings 1. Hold down [MSR1] or [MSR2] for one second. 2. 3. To move the cursor between the fields, press [^] or

[v]. To change the value in the selected field, press [<]

or [>]. Field Target Const (prism constant) Mode Track Values Prism N-Prism 999 mm through 999 mm Precise Normal Track (continuous MSR) ON Track (continuous MSR) OFF Target field If the measurement is started with the Target field set to Prism, there is a dash in front of the prism constant. If the measurement is started with the Target field set to N-Prism, there is a right square bracket ] in front of the prism constant. The symbol then continuously moves from left to right over the prism constant in the display. The Target setting is used by the TS635 Construction Total Station to apply better cyclic-error adjustment in distance measurement. The target setting efficiently eliminates multipath reflection. An incorrect Target setting may result in measurements outside the precision and intervals specified for the instrument. If you aim a prism target in the N-prism mode, the warning message Signal High!Try Prism Mode appears because of the excessive light reflection. A measurement made immediately after changing the target setting may take a longer time than usual. 54 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide

USER GUIDE Part 2 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station NORTH AMERICA Trimble Construction Division 5475 Kellenburger Road Dayton, Ohio 45424 USA 800-538-7800 (Toll Free)

+1-937-245-5154 Phone

+1-937-233-9441 Fax EUROPE Trimble GmbH Am Prime Parc 11 65479 Raunheim GERMANY

+49-6142-2100-0 Phone

+49-6142-2100-550 Fax ASIA-PACIFIC Trimble Navigation Singapore Pty Limited 80 Marine Parade Road

#22-06, Parkway Parade Singapore 449269 SINGAPORE

+65-6348-2212 Phone

+65-6348-2232 Fax www.trimble.com USER GUIDE Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station Version 1.00 Revision A February 2009

Corporate Office Construction Division 5475 Kellenburger Road Dayton, Ohio 45424-1099 USA 800-538-7800 (toll free in USA)

+1-937-245-5600 Phone

+1-937-233-9004 Fax www.trimble.com Legal Notices Copyright and Trademarks 2006-2009, Nikon-Trimble Co. Limited. All rights reserved. 2007-2009, Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved. Trimble and the Globe & Triangle logo are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited registered in the United States and in other countries. Nikon is a registered trademark of the Nikon Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Release Notice This is the February 2009 release (Revision A) of the Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide. It applies to version 1.00 of the TS635 construction total station. Manufacturer Nikon-Trimble Co., Ltd. Technoport Mituiseimei Bldg. 16-2, Minamikamata 2-chome, Ota-ku Tokyo 144-0035 Japan Product Limited Warranty Information For applicable product Limited Warranty information, please refer to the Limited Warranty Card included with this Trimble product, or consult your local Trimble authorized dealer. Notices Class B Statement Notice to Users. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communication. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Changes and modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer or registrant of this equipment can void your authority to operate this equipment under Federal Communications Commission rules. C WARNING - This equipment has been certified to comply with the limits for a Class B personal computer and peripherals, pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules. Only peripherals (computer input/output devices, terminals, printers, etc.) certified to comply with the Class B limits may be attached to this equipment. Operation with non-certified personal computer and/or peripherals is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception. The connection of a non-

shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC Certification of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits established by the FCC for this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Canada This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Le prsent appareil numrique nmet pas de bruits radiolectriques dpassant les limites applicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans le rglement sur le brouillage radiolectrique dict par le Ministre des Communications du Canada. 2 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Europe This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements for a Class B device pursuant to European Council Directive 2004/108/EC on EMC, thereby satisfying the requirements for CE Marking and sale within the European Economic Area (EEA). These requirements are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential or commercial environment. Representative in Europe Trimble GmbH Am Prime Parc 11 65479 Raunheim, Germany Australia and New Zealand This product conforms with the regulatory requirements of the Australian Communications Authority (ACA) EMC framework, thus satisfying the requirements for C-Tick Marking and sale within Australia and New Zealand. Taiwan Battery Recycling Requirements The product contains a removable Ni-MH battery. Taiwanese regulations require that waste batteries are recycled. Notice to Our European Union Customers For product recycling instructions and more information, please go to: www.trimble.com/environment/summary.html. Recycling in Europe To recycle Trimble WEEE, call: +31 497 53 2430, and ask for the

"WEEE associate," or mail a request for recycling instructions to:

Trimble Europe BV c/o Menlo Worldwide Logistics Meerheide 45 5521 DZ Eersel, NL For the Bluetooth unit USA FCC Part 15 Subpart/RSS-210, OET bulletin 65 supplement C satisfied CAUTION: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canada RSS-210 Low Power Device Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. European Union countries, Iceland, Norway, Liechtenstein, Turkey, Switzerland EN300 328v17.1, EN50360 satisfied Hereby, Nikon-Trimble Co., Ltd., declares that this instrument is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Declaration of Conformity available at http://www.nikon-trimble.com/. RF exposure compliance 1. To comply with FCC/IC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. 2. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Contents 1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Rechargeable Lithium-ion (Li-ion) batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Specifications for laser emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Conforming standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1 2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 System diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Care and maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Adjusting and tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Related information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Setting up the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Unpacking and repacking the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Charging the battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Applying power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Conditioning / calibrating a battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Detaching the battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Attaching the battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Setting up the tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Centering the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Centering with the optical plummet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Centering with the laser plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Centering with a plumb bob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Leveling the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Focusing the telescope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Setting the measurement mode and preparing the target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Measurement with a prism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Measurement in reflectorless (N-Prism) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Viewing and changing the measurement settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Target field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Prism constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3 Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Instrument keyboard and display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Instrument keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Status bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 3 4 LCD backlight, laser pointer, beep sound, and contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

[DSP] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

[MODE] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

[HOT] key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Bubble indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Laser plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Turning on the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Turning off the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Sleep mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Regional configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 List available jobs or data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Entering data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Entering a point name or number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Entering a code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Entering values in feet and inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Creating or opening a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Creating a new job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Creating a control job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Measuring distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Sighting a prism reflector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Taking a distance measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Viewing and changing the measurement settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 HA reset and angle operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Setting the horizontal angle to 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Entering the horizontal angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Station setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Known. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Base XYZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Remote BM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 BS Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Layout menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 L-O to Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 L-O from Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 L-O from Arc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 XYZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Programs menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Remote distance measurement (RDM) - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 RDM (Radial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 RDM (Cont) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 REM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 V-Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Cogo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Recording measurement data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 4 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 5 6 Switching between display screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Opening an existing job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Creating a new job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Deleting a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Setting the control job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Displaying job information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Settings (basic job settings). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Power saving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Other settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Viewing coordinate data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 UP, MP, CC, SS, and SO records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Deleting coordinate records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Editing coordinate records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Searching coordinate records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Entering coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Downloading coordinate data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Uploading coordinate data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 1sec-Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

[MSR] button settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

[DSP] button settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Checking and Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Adjusting the electronic level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Checking and adjusting the circular level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Checking and adjusting the optical/laser plummet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Zero point errors of vertical scale and horizontal angle corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Checking the calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Adjusting the calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 The instrument constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Checking and adjusting the laser pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 A Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Main body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 5 Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Measurement range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Distance precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Measurement intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Angle measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Tilt sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Tangent screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Tribrach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Optical plumment (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Laser plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Display and keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Connections in the base of instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Environmental performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Standard components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 External device connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Transferring Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Transferring coordinate data to the total station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Record format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Data example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Transferring coordinate data from the total station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Data examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Cogo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Job manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Recording data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Station setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 System error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 B C 6 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide C H A P T E R 4 4 This chapter describes the menu and display screens, and TS635 Construction Total Station applications. Use the following keystrokes when working in the display screens and when you use the applications:

To switch between display screens To change HT To record points Press [DSP]. See also page 83. Press [HOT]

Press [ENT]

Applications In this chapter:

Q HA reset and angle operations Q Station setup Q Layout menu Q Programs menu Q Recording measurement data Q Switching between display screens Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 55 4 Applications HA reset and angle operations To access the Angle menu, press [ANG] in the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS). To select a command from the Angle menu, press the corresponding number key. Alternatively, press [^] or [v] to highlight the command and then press [ENT]. Setting the horizontal angle to 0 Press [1] or select 0-Set in the Angle menu. The display returns to the BMS. Entering the horizontal angle 1. Press [2] or select Input in the Angle menu. The HA Input screen appears. 2. Use the numeric keys to enter the horizontal angle. 3. Press [ENT]. To enter 12345'50", key in [1] [2] [3] [.] [4] [5] [5] [0]. The displayed value is rounded to the minimum angle increment. Station setup To access the Stn Setup menu, press [STN] in the BMS. To select a command from the Stn Setup menu, press the corresponding number key. Alternatively, press [^] or

[v] to highlight the command and then press [ENT]. The last function used is highlighted. The station setup options are:

Baseline, page 57 Known, page 58 Base XYZ, page 60 Remote BM, page 60 BS Check, page 61 56 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Applications 4 Baseline Select this option for a two-point resection along a known line. 1. Press [1] or select BaseLine from the Stn Setup menu. 2. Enter a known point as P1. If you enter a new point name, a coordinate input screen appears. Sight P1 and press [MSR1] or [MSR2] to take a measurement. Press [ENT]. 3. Choose how you want to define a known line:

a. b. To define the line by entering P2 coordinates, press [1] or select By Coord. To define the line by entering the azimuth, press [2] or select By Angle. If you select By Angle, the azimuth input screen appears: Enter the angle value and press [ENT]. A measurement screen appears. Sight P2 and press [MSR1] or [MSR2] to take a measurement. Press [ENT]. After the measurement to P2 is completed, press [ENT]. The coordinates of the station are calculated. 4. 5. To record the station, press [ENT] or the REC softkey. To check the measurement, press the DSP softkey. If you defined the line by entering its azimuth, the HD and VD between P1 and P2 are displayed. If you defined the line by entering the P2 coordinates, the difference of HD (dHD) and VD

(dZ) between your measurement data and input coordinate data are displayed. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 57 4 Applications 6. 7. 8. Enter the station name, the height of instrument

(HI), and a feature code (CD) if required. The station name defaults to the last recorded PT + 1. Backsight (BS) defaults to the first point (P1). To change the selected point, highlight the BS field and then select the Change softkey. To finish the setup and record the station, press

[ENT] in the BS field. Known Select this option to set up a station with known coordinates or azimuth. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press [2] or select Known in the Stn Setup menu. Enter a point name or number in the ST field. If the input point number or name is an existing point, its coordinates are displayed and the cursor moves to the HI (Height of instrument) field. If the point is new, a coordinate input screen appears. Enter the coordinates for the point. Press [ENT] after each field. When you press [ENT] in the CD field, the new point is stored. If the specified point has a code, the code appears in the CD field. Enter the instrument height in the HI field and then press [ENT]. In the Backsight screen that appears, select an input method for defining the backsight point:

To sight the backsight by entering coordinates, see the following section. To sight the backsight by entering the azimuth and angle, see page 59. Sighting the backsight by entering coordinates Z Xb X0 X t h g i e h t n e m u r t s n I Station point

(Xi, Yi, Zi) Backsight point

(Xb, Yb, Zb) Y0 Yb Y 58 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Applications 4 To enter coordinates for the backsight point (BS), press [1] or select Coord from the Backsight screen. Enter the point name. If the point exists in the job, its coordinates are shown. If you intend to take a distance measurement to the BS, enter the height of target in the HT field. Sight the BS, and then press [ENT] to complete the setup. HA Azimuth calculated by coordinates If measuring to a known coordinate BS, press

[DSP] to display a QA screen. The QA screen shows the dHD and dVD values, which indicate the difference between the measured distance and the distance calculated from the known coordinates. To record the station, press [ENT]. To finish the station setup after taking a distance measurement, press [ENT]. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Sighting the backsight by entering the azimuth angle i t h g e h t n e m u r t s n I X Azimuth Backsight point Y0 Station point

(Xi, Yi, Zi) Y 1. 2. To enter the azimuth angle to the backsight point, press [2] or select Angle from the Backsight screen. If there is no point name for the BS, press [ENT] on the BS field. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 59 4 Applications 3. In the HA field, enter the azimuth angle to the BS point. If you press [ENT] without entering a value in the HA field, the azimuth is automatically set to 000'00". 4. Sight the BS point and press [ENT]. Base XYZ Select this option to change the instrument XYZ values. Base XYZ does not store an ST record in the job, so the BS Check cannot check the backsight if you enter a station using the Base XYZ option. You can use this function without an open job. 1. 2. Press [3] or select Base XYZ from the Stn Setup menu. The current instrument XYZ values are shown as the default. Enter the new instrument XYZ values and then press [ENT]. 3. Do one of the following:

To reset the horizontal angle, enter a value in the HA field and then press

[ENT]. If you do not need to reset the horizontal angle, leave the HA field blank and then press [ENT]. The Stn Setup menu appears. Remote BM Select this option to determine the station elevation. 1. 2. Press [4] or select Remote BM from the Stn Setup menu. Enter the BM point and press [ENT]. The point appears briefly. The cursor then moves to the HT field. 3. Enter the HT and then press [ENT]. 60 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Applications 4 4. Sight the Bench Mark point and then press [MSR1]

or [MSR2]. The updated station coordinates are displayed. You can change the HI in this screen. 5. To record the updated STN, press [ENT]. When the HI setting is changed, the Z coordinate is updated before the station is recorded. You must complete a station setup before you use the Remote Benchmark function. BS Check Select these options to check and reset the backsight direction. Note Complete a station setup before using the BS check function. This function always refers to the backsight point from the last station (ST) record stored in the current open job. 1. Press [5] or select BS Check in the Stn Setup menu. The HA field refers to the current HA reading, and the BS field refers to the BS in the last station setup. Enter station coordinates for observations without recording data. 2. Do one of the following:

To reset the horizontal angle to the HA set in the last station setup, sight the BS and then select the Reset softkey or press [ENT]. To cancel the process and return to the BMS, select the Abrt softkey or press [ESC]. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 61 4 Applications Layout menu To access the Layout menu, press [L-O] in the BMS. To select a command from the Layout menu, press the corresponding number key. Alternatively, press [^] or [v]

to highlight the command and then press [ENT]. The last function used is highlighted. There are four layout options:

L-O to Point, page 62 L-O from Line, page 63 L-O from Arc, page 64 XYZ, page 65 L-O to Point Use this method to lay out a point based on the down, out, and dZ location to a specified line. 1. Press [1] or select L-O to Point from the Layout menu. 2. Enter the first point (P1) along the line. Alternatively, select the MSR softkey to measure a point. If you press [ENT] without entering a PT name, you can enter temporary coordinates. Temporary coordinates are not recorded in the job. Enter the second point (P2) along the line. Enter offsets to the line. To enter the value 0.0000, press [ENT] in a blank field. Sta O/S

(-) dZ Distance from P1 along the line Distance perpendicular to the line Right side of the P1P2 line Left side of the P1P2 line Difference in height from the line Rotate the instrument until the dHA is close to 000'00". Sight the target, and then press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. 3. 4. 5. 6. 62 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Applications 4 When a distance measurement is taken, the difference between the measured point and the design point appears. 7. To record the point as an SO record, press [ENT]. Note Press [DSP] to switch between display screens. See also page 83. The following figure shows the terminology used to guide you to the required point. Fill Out Cut L R In In Out R L Fill Cut L-O from Line Select this option to measure distance and offset values along a specified line. 1. Press [2] or select L-O from Line from the Layout menu. 2. Enter the first point for the reference line. 3. 4. Alternatively, select the MSR softkey to measure a point. If you press [ESC] in the Record PT screen, the measured point is used but not recorded in the job. Enter the second point for the reference line. Enter an asterisk ( for example, A*) in the PT field to perform a wildcard search. A list of matching points appears. Highlight a point in the list and then press

[ENT]. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 63 4 Applications The following figure shows how to determine or input a location relative to a line used for Layout. PT2 Dwn Out Prism PT2 dZ PT1 Plain view Prism PT1 Dwn Side view 5. Sight the prism or reflective sheet and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. Dwn Out dZ Horizontal distance from P1 to the measured point along the P1-P2 line Horizontal offset from the P1-P2 line to the measured point Vertical offset from the P1-P2 line to the measured point 6. Note Press [DSP] to switch between display screens. See also page 83. L-O from Arc Select this option to measure distance and offset values on the arc-curve. 1. 2. Press [3] or select L-O from Arc from the Layout menu. Enter the start of the curve point (P1) and the azimuth of its tangent line (HA1). Alternatively, to enter P1 by direct measurement, select the MSR softkey. 3. Choose a method to define the curve. P2 can be any point on the tangent line that is to exit the curve. 4. In the radius (Rad) field, enter a positive value for a clockwise curve. Enter a negative value for a counter-clockwise curve. 64 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Applications 4 Once you entered all factors, the TS635 Construction Total Station calculates the curve. If the curve length (Len) is too large for a circle of the given radius, the curve is shortened. Note Press [DSP] to switch between display screens. See also page 83. XYZ Select this option to specify the layout point by coordinates. 1. Press [4] or select XYZ in the Layout menu. 2. Do one of the following:

Enter the point name that you want to establish and then press [ENT]. Specify the point by code or radius from the TS635 Construction Total Station. If several points are found, they are displayed in a list. Press [^] or [v] to move up and down the list. Use [<] to move up one page, or [>] to move down one page. 3. Highlight a point in the list and then press [ENT]. The delta angle and the distance to the target are shown. 4. Rotate the instrument until the dHA is close to 000'00". Press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. dHA HD Difference in horizontal angle to the target point Distance to the target point Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 65 4 Applications 5. Ask the rod person to adjust the target position. When the target is on the intended position, the displayed errors become 0.000 m (0.000 ft). dHA R/L IN/OUT CUT/FIL Difference in horizontal angle to the target point Right/Left (Lateral error) In/Out (Longitudinal error) Cut/Fill Once a measurement is taken, the Cut/Fill value and Z coordinate are updated as the VA is changed. 6. To record the point, press [ENT]. The PT field defaults to the specified PT + 1000. Press [MENU] and then select Settings / Rec. Use the Add Constant field to specify an integer. The integer is added to the point number that is being laid out to generate a new number for recording the layout point. The default value is 1000. For example, when you stake out PT3 with an Add Constant of 1000, the default value in the SO field (layout record) is 1003. The display then returns to the observation screen. Press [ESC]. The display returns to the PT/CD/R input screen. If you entered the stakeout point using a single point name, the PT defaults to the last PT + 1. 7. If you selected a point from the list, the display returns to the list, unless all points have been selected. Press [ESC] to return to the point input screen. 66 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Advanced feature: Specifying a layout list by inputting points by range Applications 4 1. 2. Select the Fr/To softkey when the PT field is selected. Enter the start point (Fr) and the end point (To). The range between Fr and To must be less than 1001 points. If existing points are found between Fr and To, a point list appears. To highlight a point in the list, press [^] or [v]. To go to the layout observation screen, press

[ENT]. If you have assigned a control job, and additional points are found in the control job, the Ctrl softkey appears under the list. Programs menu To access the Programs menu, press [PRG] in the BMS. To select a command from the Programs menu, press the corresponding number key. Alternatively, press [^] or

[v] to highlight the command and then press [ENT]. The last function used is highlighted. The Programs menu has the following options:

RDM (Radial), page 69 RDM (Cont), page 69 REM, page 70 V-Plane, page 70 Cogo, page 71 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 67 4 Applications Remote distance measurement (RDM) - overview RDM or Remote distance measurement measures the horizontal distance, vertical distance, and slope distance between two points. First sighting point rSD rHD Second sighting point rVD Horizontal angle 0 direction Second sighting point rHA First sighting point Station point Slope distance between two points Vertical distance between two points Horizontal distance between two points Percentage of grade (rVD/rHD) 100%

Vertical grade (rHD/rVD):1 Azimuth from first point to second point rSD rVD rHD rV%

rGD rAZ Difference between RDM (Radial) and RDM (Cont) measurement methods RDM (Radial) calculations are made with reference to the first point. RDM (Cont) calculations are made with reference to the two preceding points. P3 P2 P1 P2 P4 P1 P3 P4 RDM(Radial) RDM(Cont) 68 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide RDM (Radial) Choose this option to measure between the current point and the first point measured. Applications 4 1. 2. 3. Press [1] or select RDM(Radial) in the Programs menu. Sight the first point and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. The distance from the station point to the first point appears. Sight the second point and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. The distances between the first and second point are displayed. rSD rVD rHD Slope distance between two points Vertical distance between two points Horizontal distance between two points 4. To change display screens, press [DSP]. rHA rV%

rGD Azimuth from first point to second point Percentage of grade (rVD/rHD) 100%

Vertical grade (rHD/rVD): 1 5. Press [ESC] to exit. RDM (Cont) Choose this option to measure between the current point and the immediately preceding point. 1. 2. Press [2] or select RDM(Cont.)from the Programs menu. Follow the procedure as for a radial RDM measurement. See also RDM (Radial), page 69. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 69 4 Applications REM Choose this option to measure a remote elevation. Note A prism is required only at the sighting (target) point. Arbitrary point Sighting point Station point 1. 2. 3. 4. Press [3] or select REM in the Programs menu. Enter the height of the target. Sight the target point and press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. Loosen the vertical clamp and then turn the telescope to aim at an arbitrary point. The difference in elevation (Vh) appears. 5. Press [ESC] to exit. V-Plane Choose this option to measure distance and offset values in the vertical plane, using the 2-Pt Reference Plane function. Baseline 1. Press [4] or select V-Plane in the Programs menu. 2. Enter the first point in the vertical plane:

70 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Applications 4 a. b. c. To enter the first point by direct measurement, select the MSR softkey. A temporary observation screen appears. Press [MSR1] or [MSR2]. The Record PT screen appears. Enter a value in the PT and CD fields, and then press [ENT]. 3. Enter the second point in the vertical plane. To do this, repeat Step 2. Once the plane is defined, the calculated Dwn and dZ values are updated as you move the telescope. No distance measurement is required. Dwn dZ Horizontal distance from P1 to the target point along the baseline Vertical distance from P1 to the target point Note Press [DSP] to switch between display screens. See also page 83. 4. Press [ESC] to exit this function. Cogo Choose the Cogo option to perform coordinate geometry (Cogo) calculations. To open the Cogo menu, press [5] on the Programs menu. There are five items in the Cogo menu:

Inverse, page 72 Input, page 74 Area & Perm, page 76 Down+Out, page 77 Intersection, page 78 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 71 4 Applications Inverse Choose this option from the Cogo menu to calculate angle and distance between two coordinates. Press [1] or select Inverse in the Cogo menu. The Inverse menu appears. PT-PT inverse PT-PT calculates the distance and the angle between two input points. To calculate a PTPT inverse:

1. Press [1] or select PT-PT in the Inverse menu. 2. Enter the first point number or name, and then press [ENT]. If you press [ENT] without entering a point name, a coordinate input screen appears, and you can enter coordinates. These coordinates are not stored to the database. If you want to store the point, specify a new point name. 3. Type the second point number/name, and then press [ENT]. If necessary select the MSR softkey to shoot the point on the spot so that you can use it in the calculation. The azimuth, horizontal distance, and vertical distance from the first point to the second point are displayed. 4. Do one of the following:

Gd V%

rSD To return to the PT input screen, press [ESC]. To return to the Cogo menu, press [ENT]. To change the contents of the result screen, press [DSP]. Grade (HD/VD) 100/Gd Slope distance PT1 to PT2 72 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Applications 4 3Pt Angle If you choose 3Pt Angle, the TS635 Construction Total Station calculates the angle between two lines defined by three points. To calculate a 3Pt angle:

1. 2. 3. Press [2] or select 3Pt Angle from the Inverse menu. P1 is the base point. Two lines are to be defined by P2 and P3, both from P1. Enter the P1 point name. Alternatively, use the MSR softkey to take a measurement to the point. Enter the second point (P2) to define the baseline, P1P2. The angle (dHA) is measured from the baseline. 4. Enter the third point (P3) to define the second line, P1P3. When you press the MSR softkey, a temporary measuring screen appears. Sight the target and press [MSR1] or [MSR2] to take a measurement. After the measurement, a recording point screen appears. To store the measured point, enter the PT, HT, and CD values and press [ENT]. To use the point without recording it, press [ESC]. When you have entered three points, the instrument calculates the angle and distances. 5. Do one of the following:

To return to the Inverse menu, press [ENT]. To return to the Input BasePt screen, press

[ESC]. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 73 4 Applications Input Choose this option from the Cogo menu to calculate and manually input coordinates. To enter the Input menu, press [2] or select Input from the Cogo menu. There are three functions in this menu for recording new coordinate points. Azimuth+HD input To calculate a coordinate by an angle and distance input from the base point (P1), press [1] or select HA+HD from the Input menu. Enter the base point, P1. Type the point name and press

[ENT]. Enter the azimuth, horizontal distance, and vertical distance. Then press [ENT]. For example, to enter 12345'45", type 123.4545 and then press [ENT]. If you do not enter a value in the dVD field, the value 0.0000 is used. A recording point screen with the calculated coordinates appears. The PT field defaults to the last recorded point + 1. Press [ENT] to store the point. Traverse To calculate a new point based on two defined points and the angle, horizontal and vertical distances from the line defined by those two points, use the Traverse

(2Pt Angle) function. Press [2] or select Traverse in the Input menu. 74 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Applications 4 To enter P1 and P2, enter point names or take measurements to targets. Enter the plus-minus angle, horizontal distance, and vertical distance from the baseline defined by P1P2. If you do not enter a value in the dVD field, the value 0.0000 is used. When you press [ENT] in the dVD field, a new point is calculated. The name in the PT field defaults to the last recorded point, + 1. To record the new point and return to the point input screen, press [ENT]. P1 (the base point) defaults to the previously recorded point value. P2 defaults to the previous P1 value. B Tip To continuously calculate a new point, enter +Ang, HD, and dVD from the previous bearing line. This is a convenient way to enter Traverse points. Entering coordinates To manually enter the XYZ coordinates, press [3] or select Input XYZ from the Input menu. The PT name defaults to the last recorded PT + 1. Enter the coordinates using the numeric keys. To move to the next field, press [ENT] or [v] in a field. To store the point as an MP record and return to the point input screen, press [ENT] in the Z field. The default PT is incremented to the next value. You can record NE, NEZ, or Z-only data. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 75 4 Applications Area & Perm Choose this option from the Cogo menu to calculate area and perimeter. Press [3] or select Area & Perim in the Cogo menu. To take a measurement, enter the first point and press

[ENT], or select the MSR softkey. In the upper right corner of the screen, a counter indicates how many points you have entered. To input point numbers consecutively, use the Fr/To softkey. See also Advanced feature: Entering a range of points, page 76. If you enter a new point name, you can enter new coordinates and record the point. If you do not want to record the point, press [ENT] without entering a value in the PT field. An XY coordinate input screen appears. Continue to enter points until you have defined all the points in the lot. Then, press [v] to calculate the area and perimeter. The first and last points that you enter are joined to close the area. You must enter the points in the order in which they define the lot. You can enter up to 99 points. Press [ENT] to exit from the function, or press [ESC] to return to the previous screens one by one. Advanced feature: Entering a range of points To quickly enter a sequential range of points, use the range input function. To access this function, select the Fr/To softkey in the No. 01 or No. 02 input screens. Enter the start point name in the Fr field and the end point name in the To field. You can include letters and hyphens in the point names, but the last character must be numeric. 76 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Applications 4 To start searching for matching points, press [ENT] in the To field. The counter shows the number of matching points found. When the search is complete, you are returned to the Input PT screen. Select the Calc softkey to calculate the area and perimeter, or enter point names in the PT field. Press [ESC] to return to the Input PT screen where the preceding point name appears. Note If you search for a point when a control job is specified, and the system cannot find the point in the current job, the control job is also searched. If the point is found in the control job, it is copied to the current job as a UP record. See also Setting the control job, page 89. Down+Out Choose this option from the Cogo menu to calculate coordinates from Down and Out. Press [4] or select Down & Out in the Cogo menu. Enter the base point (P1). Specify the azimuth bearing. To do this, enter a value in the HA or P2 field. P2 is a second point on the line. P2 HA P1 Enter the horizontal distance along the baseline (Dwn), the horizontal distance perpendicular to the line (Out), and the vertical distance (dVD). Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 77 4 Applications Out(+) Dwn(-) Dwn(+) Out(-) A negative value in the Dwn field means the opposite direction along the defined bearing line. A negative value in the Out field is for the left-hand side of the bearing line. To calculate the coordinates of the point (PM), press

[ENT] in the dVD field. You can change the Z coordinate here. To record the point, press [ENT] in the CD field. The coordinates are stored as a CC record. Intersection Choose this option from the Cogo menu to calculate coordinates using intersection functions. Press [5] or select Intersection in the Cogo menu. The Intersection menu appears. It has four functions for calculating coordinates. 78 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Applications 4 Calculating a bearing-bearing intersection A bearing-bearing intersection is the intersection point of two lines. To calculate a bearing-bearing intersection:

1. 2. Press [1] or select Brng-Brng in the Intersection menu. Enter the first point name and press [ENT]. Alternatively, to measure directly to the point, select the MSR softkey. 3. Define the first line by azimuth. 4. To define the line by two points, select the Pts softkey. The Fr field defaults to the P1 point, but you can change the selected point. In the To field, enter or measure to the second point. See also Advanced feature: Entering angle and distance offsets, page 82. 5. Do one of the following:

To return to the previous screen, press [ENT]. The calculated value appears in the HA field. To go to the next screen, press [ENT]. 6. Define the second line by two points or by P2 and HA. 7. 8. 9. To calculate the coordinates of the intersection point, press [ENT] in the HA field. The calculated coordinates are displayed. You can input a Z coordinate if necessary. Enter a value in the PT field and in the CD field. To record the point, press [ENT]. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 79 4 Applications Calculating a bearing-distance intersection 1. Press [2] or select Brng-Dist in the Intersection menu. Brng-Dist calculates the intersection point formed by one line and one distance (radius). 2. Enter a point on the line. The line can be defined by two points or by a point and an azimuth. 3. Enter the second point (P2) as the center of the circle. 4. Enter the distance from P2:

To define the distance (HD) by two points, select the Pts softkey. To calculate the coordinates of the intersection point, press [ENT] in the HD field. 5. 6. 7. 8. If there are two results, the first solution appears graphically relative to the P1P2 line. To display the second solution, press [<] or [>]. To record the point, press [ENT] when the required solution appears. Enter a Z coordinate if necessary. To move to the PT and CD fields, press [ENT]. 80 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Applications 4 Calculating a distance-distance intersection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Press [3] or select Dist-Dist in the Intersection menu. Enter the first point name and press [ENT], or select the MSR softkey to measure directly to the point. Enter the distance from P1 and press [ENT]. To define the distance (HD) by two points, select the Pts softkey. Enter P2 and the distance from P2 (HD). To calculate the coordinates of the intersection point, press [ENT] in the HD field. Press [<] or [>] to display the second solution. To record the point, press [ENT] when the required solution appears. 9. Enter a Z coordinate if necessary. 10. Press [ENT] to move to the PT and CD fields. Calculating a point-line intersection 1. 2. 3. Press [4] or select Pt-Line in the Intersection menu. Enter the first point name and press [ENT], or select the MSR softkey to measure directly to the point. Enter the azimuth, or select the Pts softkey to enter another point name on the line. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 81 4 Applications 4. 5. Enter the perpendicular point to the line, or select the MSR softkey to take a measurement to the point. To calculate the coordinates of the intersection point, press [ENT]. If P1 and P2 are 3D points, the Z coordinate of the perpendicular point is calculated relative to the P1P2 slope. 6. Enter PT and CD then press [ENT] to record the point. Advanced feature: Entering angle and distance offsets To display the offset input screen, select the O/S softkey. In the Ang field, enter a positive value to rotate the line clockwise. Enter a negative value to rotate the line counter clockwise. In the O/S field, enter a positive value to specify an offset to the right. Enter a negative value to specify an offset to the left. 82 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Applications 4 Recording measurement data To record points from any observation screen, press

[ENT]. PT defaults to the last recorded PT, + 1. You can enter the PT name from the point list or the point stack. See Entering a point from the point list, page 49, and Entering a point from the point stack, page 49. To record the point, press [ENT] on the last field. If HA or VA is moved after you take a measurement, but before you press [ENT], the recalculated coordinates will be stored. If the point name that you want to record already exists in the job, an error message appears. Depending on the type of existing record, you can overwrite the old record with the new data. See Recording data, page 125. If you do not need to record data, press [MENU] and set Settings / Rec to OFF. The default setting is OFF. Switching between display screens Press [DSP] to switch between display screens. See the [DSP] button, page 40. Each time you press [DSP], the next screen appears. When you press [DSP] in the final screen, the first screen appears. The following line display screens are available. LINE1 LINE2 LINE3 LINE4 dOWN OUT dZ X Y Z HA VA SD HA VD HD Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 83 4 Applications LINE5 HD VD SD The LINE5 screen is available only if the secondary distance unit is set. See also Other settings, page 94. The following arc display screens are available. ARC1 ARC2 ARC3 ARC4 X Y Z HA VA SD HA VD HD DWN OUT dZ ARC5 HD VD SD The ARC5 screen is available only if the secondary distance unit is set. See also Other settings, page 94. The following plane display screens are available. PLN1 PLN2 PLN3 DWN dZ X Y Z HA VA 84 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide C H A P T E R 5 5 Menu Screen In this chapter:

Q Job Q Settings (basic job settings) Use the MENU screen to access functions and settings. To display the MENU screen, press the [MENU] key. Q Data Q Communication Q 1sec-Key Q Calibration Q Time Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 85 5 Menu Screen Job Use the Job option to open, create, delete, and manage jobs. To open the Job Manager, press [1] or select Job from the MENU screen. If jobs are stored on the TS635 construction total station, the job list appears. It shows all the stored jobs with the newest job at the top of the list. See Opening an existing job, page 86. If no jobs are stored, the Create Job screen appears. See Creating a new job, page 86. Opening an existing job The job list shows all the jobs stored on the instrument, in descending date order. The following symbols provide extra information about jobs:

Symbol

Meaning Current job Control job Some of the job settings are different from the current job Press [^] to move up or [v] to move down the job list. Press [ENT] to open the highlighted job. When you open a job, all job settings are automatically changed to match those used in the open job. Creating a new job 1. Select the Creat softkey in the job list. 2. Enter a job name of up to eight characters. Select

[ENT]. 3. Do one of the following:

86 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 To check the job settings, select the Sett softkey. To create a new job using the current job settings, press [ENT] or select the OK softkey. Job settings Job settings are separate from other temporary settings. Job settings are established when a job is created, and cannot be changed. This ensures that the data in a job is correctly stored in the database, and that all necessary corrections are applied when you store each record. To move between fields, press [^] or [v]. Alternatively, to move to the next field, press [ENT]. To change the setting in the selected field, press [<] or [>]. To confirm the job settings and create the job, press [ENT] in the last field. Screen 1 Scale Factor T-P correction Sea Level C&R correction OFF / 0.132 / 0.200 0.999600 to 1.000400 ON / OFF ON / OFF Screen 2 Angle unit Distance unit Temp unit Press unit DEG / GON /MIL Metre / US-Ft / I-Ft C / F hPa / mmHg / inHg Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 87 5 Menu Screen Screen 3 If you select USFt or IFt, an additional settings screen appears. Use this screen to specify whether to display values in DecimalFt or FtInch. VA zero Order Zenith / Horizon NEZ / ENZ Deleting a job Note There is no undelete function in Job Manager. Before you press [ENT] or select DEL, make sure that the selected job is the one that you want to delete. 1. In the job list, highlight the job to delete. 2. Select the DEL softkey. A confirmation screen appears. 3. Do one of the following:

To delete the selected job, press [ENT] or select the DEL softkey. To cancel the deletion and return to the previous screen, press [ESC] or select the Abrt softkey. After you delete a job, the job list appears. 88 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Setting the control job A control job has the same format as a standard job. You can open and modify it like any other job, and you can use it to record any measured data. Menu Screen 5 To set the control job:

1. Highlight the job that you want to use as the control job. 2. Select the Ctrl softkey. A confirmation screen appears. 3. Do one of the following:

To set the selected job as the control job, press [ENT] or select the Yes softkey. To cancel the process, press [ESC] or select the No softkey. If a control job is already assigned, the newly assigned control job replaces it as the control job. To clear the selected control job, highlight the current control job in the job list and select the Ctrl softkey. Then press [ENT] or select the Yes softkey. Displaying job information To display job information, highlight the job name and then select the Info softkey. The Information screen shows the number of records in the job, the free space, and the date when the job was created. Free space indicates how many points can be stored in the job. To return to the job list, press any button. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 89 5 Menu Screen Settings (basic job settings) Use the Settings menu to configure the basic job settings. Press [2] or select Settings on the MENU screen. Some job settings, as identified in the following sections, cannot be changed once a job is created. If you attempt to change any of these settings while a job is open, a confirmation screen appears, asking you to create a new job with the new settings, or to work with the new settings without recording any data. See Settings, page 126. Angle To change the angles, press [1] or select Angle in the Settings menu. VA zero Resolution Zenith / Horizon 1" / 5" / 10"

0.2 / 1 / 2 mgon 0.005 / 0.02 / 0.05 mil The VA zero job setting cannot be changed once a job is created. Distance These settings cannot be changed once a job is created. To change the distance, press [2] or select Distance in the Settings menu. Scale T-P corr Sea Level C&R corr Numeric value between 0.999600 and 1.000400 ON / OFF ON / OFF OFF / 0.132 / 0.200 90 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 Temperature and pressure corrections K

275 10000.0

106 P 980.665 13.5951

273 T+

SD'

1

K

1000000 SD SD SD'

K P T Slope dist. (before adj.) Slope dist. (after adj.) Compensation coefficient Pressure (hPa) Temperature (C) Sea-level corrections HD'

HD Re

Re ZSTN

HD HD'

ZSTN Re Horizontal dist. (before adj.) Horizontal dist. (after adj.) Instrument-Z 6370 km Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 91 5 Menu Screen Curvature and refraction corrections Because the surface of the earth is curved, the vertical difference (VD and Z) at the measurement point, as referenced to the horizontal plane, inevitably includes some error. This error is called curvature error. Also, because the density of the air surrounding the earth decreases with altitude, light is refracted at different rates at different altitudes. The error caused by this change in refraction is called refraction error. Curvature error (A A') Refraction error (A A1') A' Horizontal direction P A O A1'

A1 A'

P HD'

HD SD2 2VA(

k

----------------------------------- 1

2 sin 2Re

) VD'

HD HD'

VD VD'

SD VA Re k VD HD2

----------- 1 2Re

k(

) Horizontal dist. (before adj.) Horizontal dist. (after adj.) Vertical dist. (before adj.) Vertical dist. (after adj.) Slope dist Vertical angle 6370 km C&R constant (0.132 or 0.200) 92 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 Coordinate Press [3] or select Coord. in the Settings menu. The Coordinate menu appears. Order Label NEZ / ENZ XYZ / YXZ / NEZ(ENZ) The Order and AZ job settings cannot be changed once a job is created. Communications Press [4] or select Comm. in the Settings menu. The Communication menu appears. Ext.Comm Port Baud (bps) Length Parity Stop bit NIKON / SET Serial/Bluetooth 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 /

38400 7 / 8 EVEN / ODD / NONE 1 / 2 See also Appendix B, Transferring Coordinate Data. Unit Note The Angle, Distance, Temp, and Press job settings cannot be changed once a job is created. Press [5] or select Unit in the Settings menu. The Unit menu appears. Angle Distance Temp Pressure DEG (Degree) GON (GON) MIL (Mil6400) Meter US-Ft I-F C (Celsius) F (Fahrenheit) hPa mmHg inHg Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 93 5 Menu Screen If you select US-Ft or I-Ft, an additional settings screen appears. Use this screen to specify whether to display values in Decimal-Ft or Ft-Inch. Power saving To open the Power Save menu, press [4] or select PwrSave in the Settings menu. Main unit Sleep OFF / 5 min / 10 min / 30 min OFF / 1 min / 3 min / 5 min

. Recording Press [7] or select Rec in the Settings menu. The Rec Menu appears. Rec Data CD field Add const ON / OFF ON / OFF Integer between 1 and 999,999 If you need to record coordinate data from your observations, set the Rec Data field to ON. If you would like to record a feature code when you record coordinate data, set the CD field to ON. The CD field appears in the Recording PT screen. This field sets the default point number for the observed coordinate data when you select Layout / XYZ. Other settings Press [8] or select Other in the Settings menu. The Others menu appears. XYZ disp 2nd Unit CD Input Language Fast / Normal / Slow / +ENT None / Meter / US-Ft / I-Ft 123 / ABC English / French / German / Italian /

Dutch Owners Detail Up to 20 characters 94 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 XYZ disp defines the speed to move to the next screen after showing XYZ of the input point. When the secondary unit is set to a unit, an extra display screen is available in the BMS, layout observation screens, and LO from line screens. The extra screen shows the HD, VD, and SD in the secondary unit. If you select US-Ft or I-Ft, an additional settings screen appears. Use this screen to specify whether to display values in Decimal-Ft or Ft-Inch. The CD Input field sets the default input mode when a CD field appears. In the Language field, use [<] / [>] to open the language screen and [v] / [^] to select the required language. Press

[ENT] to confirm. In the Reboot confirmation screen, press [ENT] to restart the instrument. The instrument reboots and shows the start-up screen in the selected language. Then a regional setting screen appears, in which you can quickly configure the instrument to a pre-set combination of the default regional settings. See Regional configuration, page 45. The Owners Detail field allows you to enter your name or the name of your company. If you enter a value in this field, it appears when you start the TS635 construction total station. Data Use the Data menu to view or edit records. To access it, press [3] on the MENU screen. Viewing coordinate data Coordinate data appears in a list, with the newest record at the bottom of the screen. Use [^] or [v] to scroll through the records. Use [<] or [>] to move up or down one page. Press [ENT] to see more detailed information about the selected record. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 95 5 Menu Screen The header (XYZ, YXZ, NEZ, or ENZ) depends on the Coord. Label setting, which is accessed by pressing [MENU] and then selecting Settings / Coord. See also Coordinate, page 93. UP, MP, CC, SS, and SO records All coordinate records contain PT, CD, X, Y, and Z fields. UP records are uploaded point coordinates. MP records are manually input point coordinates. CC records are points calculated in Cogo. SS records are sideshot records stored in the BMS. SO records are stored in layout functions. Deleting coordinate records 1. In the XYZ screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the record that you want to delete. Then select the DEL softkey. 2. A confirmation screen appears. a. b. To delete the selected record, press [ENT] or select the Yes softkey. To cancel the deletion of data, press [ESC] or select the No softkey. Alternatively, delete coordinate data by selecting the DEL softkey in the detailed display screen for the record. If the record that you want to delete is referred by any station record, a confirmation message appears. Editing coordinate records You can edit point, CD, and coordinate values in coordinate records. However, you cannot edit the coordinate record for the current station. 96 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 1. Do one of the following:

In the XYZ screen, use [^] or [v] to highlight the record to edit. Then select the Edit softkey. In the detailed data screen, select the Edit softkey. 2. Use [^] or [v] to highlight a field. Then modify the value in the selected field. 3. When you have finished editing, press [ENT] in the CD field. A confirmation screen appears. 4. Do one of the following:

To accept the changes and return to the data view screen, press [ENT] or select the Yes softkey. To go back to the edit screen, press [ESC] or select the No softkey. Searching coordinate records You can search for records by their type, point name, code, or by any combination of these values. In the XYZ screen, select the Srch softkey to access the XYZ data search function. To search for a record by point name, enter the point name in the PT field and press [ENT] twice. You can use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard. For example, when you enter 500* in the PT field, the search matches the points named 500, 500-1, 500-A, and 5000. To search for a record by point type, move to the Type field and use [<] or [>] to change the selected point type. The options are ALL, MP, UP, CC, and RE. If more than one point matches the search criteria, the matching points are displayed in a list. Use [^] or [v] to highlight the required point. Press [ENT] to select it. Detailed data for the selected record appears. Select the DSP softkey to change the fields shown. Press [ESC] to return to the list. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 97 5 Menu Screen If no point matches the specified criteria, an error screen appears. Press any button to return to the data screen. Entering coordinates In the XYZ screen, select the Input softkey. A new input point screen appears. The PT field defaults to the last recorded PT + 1, but you can change the value shown. Enter the PT and CD and then press [ENT] to enter coordinates. Use the numeric keys to enter the coordinates. Press [ENT] or [v] in each field to move to the next field. When you press [ENT] in the CD field, the point is stored as an MP record. After you have recording a point, the next point input screen is shown with the updated default PT. You can record NE, NEZ, or Z-only data. 98 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Communication Use the Communication menu to download or upload data. To access it, press [4] or select Comm. on the MENU screen. Menu Screen 5 Downloading coordinate data To change the download settings, press [1] or select Download in the Communication menu. Format Data NIKON (Fixed) Coordinate (all) Coordinate (layout records only) To display the total number of records that will be downloaded, press [ENT] in the Data field. As each record in the current job is output from the TS635 construction total station, the current line number is updated. Once transferring is completed, you can choose whether to delete the current job:

To delete the current job, press [4]. To return to the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) without deleting the current job, press [ESC] or select the Abrt softkey. Uploading coordinate data To upload coordinate data from a computer, press [2] or select Upload XYZ in the Communication menu. The default data format appears. To change the order of data fields, select the Edit softkey. See also Advanced feature: Editing the data order for upload, page 100. Otherwise, press [ENT]. Select the Job softkey to go to the Job Manager screen. See also Job, page 86. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 99 5 Menu Screen To change the communication settings, select the Comm softkey. The serial port settings must match the settings used by the terminal software on the computer. Use an RS-232C cable to connect the TS635 construction total station to the computer. In the terminal program, set flow control to Xon/Xoff. The Free space field shows the number of points that can still be stored on the TS635 construction total station. Press [ENT] to put the TS635 construction total station in receive mode. On the computer, choose the Send Text File command in the terminal program to start sending data. As each point is received by the instrument, the value in the Records field is incremented. If you press [ESC] during data upload, the upload is canceled and the display returns to the Communication menu. Records that were received before you pressed [ESC] are stored in the job. During upload, the system will truncate any code that is longer than 16 characters. If the existing point is a UP, CC, or MP record, and it is not referred to by any station or backsight, it is automatically overwritten by the uploaded point. No error message appears. Advanced feature: Editing the data order for upload 1. 2. 3. Select the Edit softkey. The Data Fields screen appears. To move between the fields, press [<] or [>]. To change the selected item in a field, use the and or blank. softkeys. The options are PT, N, E, Z, CD, 4. To save your changes and return to the previous screen, select the Save softkey. For example, if your original data is as follows:

1, 30.000, 20.000, L1 and you set the data fields to PT N E CD, then the uploaded data is:

PT=1, N=30.000, E=20.000, CD=L1 For more information about coordinate data, see Transferring coordinate data to the total station, page 118. 100 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Menu Screen 5 Uploading coordinates without points You can upload data without points. If you do not include a point in the format definition, each line of data is automatically assigned the next available point number. To help you to select points in the field, make sure that you store an identifier in the CD field. The data format cannot include duplicate items. Use PT, N, E, Z, and CD once each in the data format. To skip an item in your original file, set the corresponding field to blank. 1sec-Key Use the 1sec-Key menu to configure the settings for the one-second buttons, [MSR1],

[MSR2], and [DSP]. To access it, press [5] or select 1sec-Keys in the MENU screen.

[MSR] button settings There are two [MSR] buttons:

To change the settings for the [MSR1] button, press [1] or select MSR1. To change the settings for the [MSR2] button, press [2] or select MSR2. Each [MSR] button has four settings. In the Const and Track field, use the numeric keys to enter values. In the other fields, use [<] or [>] to change the settings. B Tip To quickly access the settings screen, hold down [MSR1] or [MSR2] for one second.

[DSP] button settings To change the display items in the BMS and in Layout observation screens, press [2] or select [DSP] in the 1sec-Keys menu. To move the cursor, use [<], [>], [^] or [v]. To change the display item, press either the softkey or the softkey. To save the changes, press [ENT] from the last line of

<DSP3> or select the Save softkey. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 101 5 Menu Screen B Tip To quickly access the DSP settings screen, hold down [DSP] for one second. Calibration Use the Calibration screen to calibrate the instrument if required. To access the Calibration screen, press [6] or select Calibrat from the MENU screen. See also Adjusting the calibration, page 106. Time Use the Date & Time screen to set the current date and time. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press [7] or select Time on the MENU screen. The Date & Time screen appears. The current date and time settings are displayed. Enter the date in Year-Month-Day format. For example, to change the date to August 15, 2006 press [2] [0] [0] [6] [ENT] [8] [ENT] [1] [5] [ENT]. If the highlighted part of the field ( for example, the year) is already correct, press

[ENT] to use the current value. For example, if the date is already set to August 20, 2006, and you want to change the date to August 25, 2006, press [ENT] [ENT] [2] [5]

[ENT]. To move to the Time field, press [ENT] from the Date field:

Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, to set the time to 4:35 PM, press [1] [6] [ENT] [3] [5] [ENT]. 5. Do one of the following:

To finish setting the date and time, press [ENT] in the Minutes field. To cancel the changes, press [ESC]. 102 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide C H A P T E R 6 Checking and Adjusting 6 This chapter describes how to check the accuracy of the TS635 construction total station, and if necessary, adjust the required settings. In this chapter:

Q Adjusting the electronic level Q Checking and adjusting the circular level Q Zero point errors of vertical scale and horizontal angle corrections Q The instrument constant Q Checking and adjusting the laser pointer Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 103 6 Checking and Adjusting Adjusting the electronic level To adjust the electronic level, Zero point errors of vertical scale and horizontal angle corrections are used. See page 105. Checking and adjusting the circular level Once you have checked and adjusted the electronic level, check the circular level. If the bubble is not in the center of the level, use the adjusting pin to rotate the three adjustment screws of either circular level on the instrument main body or tribrach until the bubble is centered. Checking and adjusting the optical/laser plummet The optical axis of the plummet must be aligned with the vertical axis of the instrument. To check and adjust the optical/laser plummet:

1. 2. Place the instrument on the tripod. You do not have to level the instrument. Place a thick sheet of paper marked with an X on the ground below the instrument. 3. Do the following:

Look through the optical plummet and then adjust the leveling screws until the image of the X is in the center of the reticle mark . For the laser plummet, adjust the laser pointer to the X. 4. Rotate the alidade by 180. If the marked image is in the same position in the center of the reticle mark, no adjustment is required. For the laser plummet, if the laser pointer is on the X, no adjustment is required. 104 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Checking and Adjusting 6 5. If the image or laser pointer is not in the same position, adjust the optical or laser plummet:

a. Use the supplied hexagonal wrench to turn the adjustment screws until the image of the X is in Position P. Position P is the center point of the line connecting the X and the center of the reticle mark . b. Repeat from Step 2. For laser plummet adjustment, you must remove a cap. Zero point errors of vertical scale and horizontal angle corrections Checking the calibration 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Set up the instrument on the tripod. Follow the leveling procedures described in Leveling the instrument, page 28. Flip the telescope to the Face-1 position. The display and tangent screws are facing towards you. Sight a target that is within 45 of the horizontal plane. Read the vertical angle from the VA1 field in the Basic Measurement Screen

(BMS). Rotate the instrument 180 and flip the telescope to the Face-2 position. The display and tangent screws are turned away from you. Read the vertical angle from the VA2 field. Add the two vertical angles together, VA1 + VA2. No adjustment is required if the zero reference for vertical angles (VA zero setting) is set to Zenith, and VA1 + VA2 equals 360. No adjustment is required if the zero reference for vertical angles (VA zero setting) is set to Horizon, and VA1 + VA2 is either 180 or 540. An adjustment is required if VA1 + VA2 is not one of the values listed above. Note The difference between the vertical angle reading the relevant angle (either 360 for Zenith, or 180 or 540 for Horizon) is called the altitude constant. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 105 6 Checking and Adjusting Adjusting the calibration 1. 2. Press [MENU] and [6]. The calibration screen appears. Take an F1 measurement to a target on the horizon. Press [ENT]. The calibration fields for F1 are:

X1 Y1 VA1 HA1 Face-1 X-axis tilt value Face-1 Y-axis tilt value Face-1 vertical angle (tilt-off value) Face-1 horizontal angle (tilt-off value) The vertical angle is shown in the V0 dir= Horiz setting. When you have taken the measurement, the message on the bottom line changes from DO NOT TOUCH! to Turn to F2. Take an F2 measurement to the same target. Press [ENT]. 3. The TS635 construction total station has horizontal and vertical axis adjustment:

X2 Y2 VA2 HA2 Face-2 X-axis tilt value Face-2 Y-axis tilt value Face-2 vertical angle (tilt-off value) Face-2 horizontal angle (tilt-off value) When the observation on F2 is completed, four parameters are displayed. 4. Do one of the following:

To return to the first observation screen, press [ESC] or select the Redo softkey. To set parameters on the instrument, press

[ENT] or select the OK softkey. 5. If ACV, ACH, or Tilt is out of range, OVER appears. Press any key to return to the first observation screen. 106 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Checking and Adjusting 6 The instrument constant The instrument constant is a numerical value used to automatically correct for the displacement between the mechanical and electrical centers when measuring distances. The instrument constant is set at the factory. However, to ensure the highest operational accuracy, we recommend that you check the instrument constant several times a year. The following figure shows the setup to check the instrument constant. P P About 100 m Q R Q To check the instrument constant, either compare a correctly measured base line with the distance measured by the EDM, or carry out the following procedure. 1. 2. Set up the instrument at Point P, in as flat an area as possible. Set up a reflector prism at Point Q, 100 m away from Point P. Make sure that you take the prism constant into account. 3. Measure the distance between Point P and Point Q (PQ). 4. 5. 6. Install a reflector prism on the tripod at Point P. Set up another tripod at Point R, on the line between Point P and Point Q. Transfer the TS635 construction total station to the tripod at Point R. 7. Measure the distance from Point R to Point P (RP), and the distance from Point R to Point Q (RQ). 8. Calculate the difference between the value of PQ and the value of RP + RQ. 9. Move the TS635 construction total station to other points on the line between Point P and Point Q. 10. Repeat Step 5 through Step 9 several times. 11. Calculate the average of all the differences. The error range is within 3 mm. If the error is out of range, contact your dealer. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 107 6 Checking and Adjusting Checking and adjusting the laser pointer The TS635 construction total station uses a red laser beam to measure and as a laser pointer. The laser pointer is coaxial with the line of sight of the telescope. If the instrument is well adjusted, the red laser pointer coincides with the line of sight. External influences such as shock or large temperature fluctuations can displace the red laser pointer relative to the line of sight. 108 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Specifications In this chapter:

Q Measurement range Q Distance precision Q Measurement intervals Q Angle measurement Q Tilt sensor Q Tangent screws Q Tribrach Q Level Q Display and keypad Q Connections in the base of instrument Q Battery pack Q Environmental performance Q Dimensions Q Weight Q Standard components Q External device connector A P P E N D I X A A This appendix details the specifications and standard components of the TS635 construction total station. It also describes the connector that is used to connect the instrument to an external power source or to communicate with an external device. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 109 A Specifications Main body Telescope Tube length Magnification Effective diameter of objective Image Field of view Resolving power Focussing distance 125 mm (4.91 inch) 30 45 mm (1.77 inch) EDM 50 mm (1.97 inch) Erect 120'

2.3 m at 100 m (2.3 ft at 100 ft) 3.0"

1.5 m to infinity (59 inch to infinity) Measurement range Distances shorter than 1.5 m (4.92 ft) cannot be measured with this EDM. Measurement range with no haze, visibility over 40 km (25 miles) Prism mode Reflector sheet (5 cm x 5 cm) Standard prism (1P) 300 m (984 ft) 5,000 m (16,400 ft) Reflectorless mode Reference target 300 m (984 ft) Notes The target should not receive direct sunlight. Reference target refers to a white, highly reflective material (KGC 90%). In reflectorless mode, the maximum measurement range is 500 m (1,640 feet). 110 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Distance precision Precise mode Prism mode Reflectorless mode Specifications A

(3 + 2 ppm D) mm 10 C through +40 C (+14 F through +104 F)

(3 + 3 ppm D) mm

(20 C through 10 C), (+40 C through +50 C)

(4 F through +14 F), (+104 F through +122 F)

(3 + 2 ppm D) mm 10 C through +40 C (+14 F through +104 F)

(3 + 3 ppm D) mm

(20 C to 10 C), (+40 C through +50 C)

(4 F through +14 F), (+104 F through +122 F) Normal mode Prism mode Reflectorless mode

(10 + 5 ppm D) mm

(10 + 5 ppm D) mm Measurement intervals Measurement intervals may vary with the measuring distance or weather conditions;

At the initial measurement, it may take longer. Precise mode Prism mode Reflectorless mode Normal mode Prism mode Reflectorless mode Prism offset correction 1.5 sec. 1.8 sec. 0.8 sec. 1.0 sec. 999 mm to +999 mm

(1 mm step) Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 111 A Specifications Angle measurement Reading system 360 400G MIL6400 DIN18723 accuracy Tilt sensor Absolute encoder Diameterial reading on HA Single reading on VA 1"/5"/10"

0.2 mgon / 1 mgon / 2 mgon 0.005 mil / 0.02 mil / 0.05 mil 5"/ 1.5 mgon Method Compensation range Liquid-electric detection 3 Tangent screws Type Friction clutch endless fine motion Tribrach Type Level Detachable Electronic level Circular level vial Displayed on the LCD Sensitivity 10' / 2 mm Optical plumment (Optional) Image Magnification Field of view Focussing range Erect 3x 5 0.5 m (1.6 ft) to infinity 112 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Specifications A Laser plummet Wave length Laser class Focussing range Laser diameter Display and keypad Display type Resolution Display illumination Keys 635 nm Class 2 8 Approximately 2 mm Graphical LCD 128 64 Backlight 25 Connections in the base of instrument Communications Type Maximum baud rate External power supply input voltage Battery pack RS-232C 38400 bps asynchronous 4.5 V through 5.2 V DC Output voltage Continuous operation time Continuous distance/angle measurement Distance/angle measurement every 30 seconds Continuous angle measurement 3.8 V DC rechargeable 10 hours 16 hours 30 hours Note Tested at 25 C (77 F) (normal temperature). Operation times may vary depending on the condition and deterioration of the battery. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 113 A Specifications Environmental performance Operating temperature range Storage temperature range 20 C through +50 C

(4 F through +122 F) 25 C through +60 C

(13 F through +140 F) Dimensions Main unit Carry case Weight 149 mm W x 145 mm D x 306 mm H

(6.6 inch W x 6.8 inch D x 13.7 inch H) 435 mm W x 206 mm D x 297 mm H

(18.5 inch W x 13.8 inch D x 9.1 inch H) Main unit (without battery) Battery Carry case Charger and AC adapter Approximately 3.5 kg (7.7 lbs) Approximately 0.1 kg (0.22 lbs) Approximately 2.4 kg (5.29 lbs) Approximately 0.4 kg (0.9 lbs) Environmental protection Watertight/dust-proof protection IP66 Standard components Instrument main body Battery pack (x 2) Universal charger, power cord, and adaptors Adjustment pin, Allen wrench The TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide (this document) Carry case 114 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide External device connector Specifications A This connector can be used to connect to an external power source or to communicate with an external device. Before using the external device connector, make sure that the external device meets the specifications below. Input voltage System Signal level Maximum baud rate Compatible male connector 4.5 V DC to 5.2 V DC RS-232C 9 V standard 38400 bps asynchronous Hirose HR10A-7P-6P or HR10-7P-6P C CAUTION Except when connected as shown in the System diagram, page 14, use of the Hirose HR10A-7P-6P or HR10-7P-6P is at your own risk. C CAUTION Use only the male connectors specified above. Using other connectors will damage the instrument. The external device connector is a Hirose HR 10A-7R-6S female connector. The pinouts for connecting the instrument to an external device connector are shown below:

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal RxD TxD NC V GND NC Description Receive data (Input) Send data (Output) No connection Power Ground No connection 6 4 5 HRS 1 3 2 C CAUTION Only use the pin connections shown above. Using other connections will damage the instrument. C CAUTION The TS635 total station has different pin assignments from other Construction total stations. To connect to an external power source, supply power to Pin 4 (power terminal) and Pin 5 (ground terminal) on the instrument. The instrument will use the external power source even if the internal battery packs is attached. C CAUTION Make sure that the power supplied is within the rated input range (4.5 V to 5.2 V, 1 A maximum). Power supplied outside this range will damage the instrument. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 115 A Specifications To communicate with an external device, connect the RS-232C signal from the external device to Pin 1 (input terminal) and to Pin 2 (output terminal) on the instrument. Cap the data output/external power input connector securely when the instrument is not in use. The instrument is not watertight if the cap is detached or not attached securely, or when the data output/external power input connector is in use. The instrument can be damaged by static electricity from the human body discharged through the data output/external power input connector. Before handling the instrument, touch any other conductive material once to remove static electricity. 116 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide A P P E N D I X B Transferring Coordinate Data B In this chapter:

Q Transferring coordinate data to the total station Q Transferring coordinate data from the total station The TS635 construction total station uses lists of coordinate data. This chapter describes how to transfer data between the total station and the office computer. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 117 B Transferring Coordinate Data Transferring coordinate data to the total station Settings To configure the transmission speed and other settings, press [MENU] and then select Settings / Comm. See also Communications, page 93. Record format You can transfer coordinate records to the TS635 construction total station in the following formats:

PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT PT

, X X X X X X X X

, CD CD

, Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Z Z Z Z

, CD

, CD

, CD

, Z Z 118 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Transferring Coordinate Data B The formats use the following codes:

Code PT X Y Z CD Description Point number Actual X coordinate Actual Y coordinate Actual Z coordinate Feature code Length Up to 20 digits Variable length Variable length Variable length Up to 16 characters Data example 20100,6606.165,1639.383,30.762,RKBSS 20104,1165611.6800,116401.4200,00032.8080 20105 5967.677 1102.343 34.353 MANHOLE 20106 4567.889 2340.665 33.444 PT1 20107 5967.677 1102.343 34.353 20109,4657.778,2335.667,,PT2 20111,4657.778,2335.667 20113 4657.778 2335.667 20115,,,34.353,MANHOLE 20117,,,33.444 Transferring coordinate data from the total station Settings To configure the transmission speed and other settings, press [MENU] and then select Settings / Comm. See also Communications, page 93. Data examples Nikon coordinate data format 1,100.0000,200.0000,10.0000, 2,200.0000,300.0000,20.0000, 3,116.9239,216.9140,11.8425,TRAIN PLATFORM 4,126.6967,206.2596,11.2539,RAMP 11,100.0045,199.9958,10,0000, 13,116.9203,216.9113,11.7157, 14,126.6955,206.2579,10.9908, 21,100.0103,199.9958,10.0000, 31,100.0013,200.0005,10.0000, 41,100.0224,200.0331,9.9000, 43,116.9263,216,9165,11.8016,CURB 44,126.7042,206.2871,10.8193,DITCH 45,116.9266,216.9160,11.8028, 46,126.7046,206.2845,10.8213,CP POINT Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 119 B Transferring Coordinate Data 120 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide A P P E N D I X C C The appendix describes the error messages that may appear when you use the TS635 construction total station. Error Messages In this chapter:

Q Cogo Q Communications Q Data Q Job manager Q Layout Q Programs Q Recording data Q Searching Q Settings Q Station setup Q System error Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 121 C Error Messages Cogo NO Result The system was unable to calculate an area because points were not entered in the correct order. Press any key to return to the Cogo menu. Then enter the points in the correct order. Same Coordinate The point or coordinate that you entered is identical to the previous input point. Press any key to return to the point input screen. Then use a different point. XY-coordinate is required The input point does not have XY (NE) coordinates. Press any key to return to the point input screen. Then enter a point that has X and Y coordinates. Communications If an error is detected while data is being transferred to the TS635 construction total station, the total station stops the transfer and displays one of the following messages:

Check Data There are errors in the data that is being transferred to the total station, such as an alphabetic character in a coordinate field. Press any key. Then check the specified line in the data. DUPLICATE PT C CAUTION If the existing point is a UP, CC, or MP record, and the point is not referred to by ST or BS, the existing point will be overwritten by the uploaded record. No error message appears. The uploaded data contains a duplicate PT. Press any button. Then check the specified point in the data. PT MAX20 chars The uploaded data contains a PT with a name or number that is longer than 20 digits. Press any button. Then check the specified line in the data. XYZ OVERRANGE The uploaded data contains a coordinate that is longer than 13 digits. Press any button. Then check the specified line in the data. 122 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Data Error Messages C Can't Edit XYZ from measurement You have tried to change the coordinates of an SO, SS, or CP record. You cannot change the coordinates of these records. Press any button to return to the previous screen. DELETE Stn-XYZ You have tried to delete a coordinate record that the current ST or BS refers to. You must confirm that you want to delete this record. To... delete XYZ return to the previous screen without deleting XYZ Press... the DEL softkey

[ESC] or the Abrt softkey Job manager Cannot Assign You have tried to set the current job as the control file. Press any button to return to the previous screen. Then select a different job. Can't Create There is no space available to create a job or record a point. Press any button to return to the Job Manager. Then select the DEL softkey to delete old jobs. Existing Job You have entered an existing job name for a new job. Press any button and then change the name for the new job. MAX 32Jobs You are trying to create a new job when the maximum number of jobs (32) is already stored. Press any button to return to the Job Manager. Then select the DEL softkey to delete old jobs. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 123 C Error Messages Layout Input Error The point name style used in the Fr field is not the same as the style used in the To field. For example, the Fr field style is 1, and the To field style is A200. Press any button to return to the Fr/To input screen. Then re-enter the point name, using the same naming style in both fields. NO Stn Setup You did not perform a station setup or BS check before entering the Layout function. To... go to the Stn Setup menu return to the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS) go to the Stakeout menu Press...

[2] or select Stn Setup

[ESC]

[1] or select Continue C CAUTION Selecting Continue does not resume the last ST record. You should only use the Continue option if you are sure that the previous ST coordinates and the current HA orientation are correct. Otherwise, records in the Stakeout function may not be correct. Programs NO Stn Setup C CAUTION Selecting Continue does not resume the last ST record. You should only use the Continue option if you are sure that the previous ST coordinates and the current HA orientation are correct. Otherwise, records in the Programs function may not be correct. You did not perform a station setup or BS check before entering the Programs function. To... go to the Stn Setup menu return to the BMS go to the Programs menu Press...

[2] or select Stn Setup

[ESC]

[1] or select Continue 124 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Recording data DATA FULL The data storage is full. Error Messages C Press any button to return to the Basic Measurement Screen (BMS). Then:

To... delete unnecessary data delete jobs DUPLICATE PT Press...

[MENU] and select Data

[MENU] and select Job The input PT you are trying to record already exists in the current job. An existing coordinate record cannot be overwritten by measured data. Press any button to return to the point input screen. Change the setting in the PT field. Duplicate PT The input PT you are trying to record already exists in the current job as an SS, SO, or CP record. An existing SS, SO, or CP record can be overwritten by measured data. To... return to the PT input screen record RAW data and update XYZ data record RAW data only Press...

[ESC] or the Abrt softkey the XYZ softkey the RAW softkey No Open Job No job is open. To... open the job list, if there are existing jobs create a new job return to the previous screen Press...

[1] or select Select job

[2] or select Create job

[ESC]

NO Stn Setup There is no station record in the current job, or a station setup or BS check has not been done since the program was rebooted. To... continue recording go to the Stn Setup menu return to the previous screen Press...

[1] or select Continue. If there is already an ST record in the job, the message CO, Use current orientation appears.

[2] or select STN Setup

[ESC]

Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 125 C Error Messages OVER RANGE You are trying to record a coordinate with more than 13 digits. Press any button to return to the previous screen. Then check the setting for the current ST coordinate. Searching Settings PT Not Found There is no point that matches the criteria entered. Press any button to return to the point input screen. This message may appear in any function where the PT/CD is input, such as Station Setup or Stakeout. Job Settings will be changed You have changed one or more of the following job settings:

VA zero or HA in the Angle screen (see Angle, page 90) Scale, T-P, Sea Lvl, or C&R in the Distance screen (see Distance, page 90) Coord or Az Zero in the Coordinates screen (see Coordinate, page 93) Angle, Dist, Temp, or Press in the Unit screen (see Unit, page 93) To... discard the changes to the job settings close the current job and save the changes to the job settings Press...

[ESC] or the Abrt softkey. The current job remains open.

[ENT] or the OK softkey. Note To record a point using the new settings, create a new job using the new settings. 126 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide Station setup Same Coordinate Error Messages C The input PT or coordinate is identical to the current station in STN/2:Known, or the same coordinate or point name/number is found in Resection. Press any button to return to the PT input screen. Then use a different PT. Space LOW There is not enough space to record a station when you start any of the Station Setup functions. To... return to the BMS continue Press... press [ESC] or select the Abrt softkey. Select the DEL softkey in Job Manager to delete old jobs. press [ENT] or select the OK softkey. You may not be able to record the whole process. XY-coordinate is required The input point for ST/BS does not have N/E coordinates. Press any button to return to the PT input screen. Then use a PT that has N/E coordinates. Z-coordinate is required The input point for Benchmark does not have a Z coordinate. Press any button to return to the PT input screen. Then use a PT that has a Z coordinate. See page 68. System error

=SYSTEM ERROR=

The system has detected an internal error that is related to the lower-level system. Press any key to turn the instrument off. The system will reboot when this error is reported. If you still have more points to shoot in the site, turn the instrument on and repeat the open a job and station setup procedures. Data stored before this error will be kept safely in the Job file. If the error appears frequently, please contact your dealer or Trimble Support and report the message that appears below the =SYSTEM ERROR= line. Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide 127 C Error Messages 128 Trimble TS635 Construction Total Station User Guide